spesification-heating,ventilating,air conditioning & bms

SPECIFICATION S040804D1MA

HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING & BMS

PROJECT 040804

UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES &

DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE

PREPARED BY

VOS Group Pty Limited

Level 2, 10-18 Cliff Street

MILSONS POINT NSW 2061

AUSTRALIA

Tel: +61 2 9956 8080

Fax: +61 2 9956 8101

Email: [email protected]

VOS Group Consulting Engineers

PO Box 46649

Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971 4 397 9645

Fax: +971 4 397 9643

Email: [email protected]

Tender Issue

S040804DIMA 19 July 2006

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 2

Mechanical Services – Tender Issue – 19 July 2006

SPECIFICATION AUTHORISATION

Verified by: John O’Leary (Senior Engineer)

Signed:__________________________

Date: 19/07/2006

Approved by: Geoff Taylor (Project Team Leader)

Signed:__________________________

Date: 19/07/2006

REVISION STATUS

Rev No. Description of Revision Date Approved

A Tender Issue 19/07/2006

Please Note # Recipients are responsible for eliminating all superseded documents in their possession.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.00.00 HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND BMCS 14

23.01.00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 14 23.01.01 INTRODUCTION AND INTENT 14 23.01.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 14 23.01.03 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 15

23.01.03.01 Sub-Contractor to Inform Himself 15 23.01.03.02 Drawings and Information Supplied by the Engineer 15 23.01.03.03 Definitions 15 23.01.03.04 Obvious Work 16 23.01.03.05 Equipment Variations After Tendering 16 23.01.03.06 Standards, Quality of Work and Materials, Submittals and Approval 16 23.01.03.07 Protection 17 23.01.03.08 Tests 17 23.01.03.09 Provisional Sums 18

23.01.04 NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES (NOCs) 18 23.01.05 AUTHORITY PERMITS, FEES, INSPECTIONS AND NOCs 18

23.02.00 DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES 19 23.02.01 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT 19 23.02.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS 19 23.02.03 DRAWINGS BY ENGINEER 19 23.02.04 SCOPE OF WORK 20

23.02.04.01 Preliminaries 20 23.02.04.02 Chilled Water Systems 21 23.02.04.03 Air Conditioning Units (Air Handling Unit (AHU), Fan Coil Unit (FCU)) 22 23.02.04.04 Ventilation Systems 23 23.02.04.05 Ductwork and Accessories 23 23.02.04.06 Electrical 24 23.02.04.07 Controls Including: 25 23.02.04.08 Commissioning and Certification including: 25

23.02.05 ASSOCIATED WORKS 26 23.02.05.01 Building Trade Work 26 23.02.05.02 Electrical Trade Work 27 23.02.05.03 Hydraulic Trade Work 27 23.02.05.04 Fire Trade Work 28 23.02.05.05 Lift Trade Work 28

23.02.06 PERFORMANCE & GUARANTEE 28 23.02.06.01 Performance Criteria 28

23.02.07 PRESSURISATION PHILOSOPHY 30 23.02.07.01 Fire Philosophy and Smoke Management 30 23.02.07.02 Air Intake System 30

23.02.08 BUILDING DETAILS 30 23.02.09 GENERAL 31

23.02.09.01 Co-Ordination 31 23.02.09.02 Electrical 31

23.03.00 EQUIPMENT 32 23.03.01 GENERAL 32

23.03.01.01 Site Climatic Conditions 32 23.03.01.02 Layout 32 23.03.01.03 Plinths 32 23.03.01.04 Fastenings 32 23.03.01.05 Lubrication 33 23.03.01.06 Shafts 33 23.03.01.07 Bearings 33

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.03.01.08 Couplings 33 23.03.01.09 Gaskets, Sealants and Mastics 34 23.03.01.10 Direct Drives 34 23.03.01.11 Belt Drives 34 23.03.01.12 Guards 34 23.03.01.13 Installation 34 23.03.01.14 Lifting Lugs 34

23.03.02 GENERAL AIR HANDLING UNIT(AHU) 35 23.03.02.01 General 35 23.03.02.02 Casing 35 23.03.02.03 Vibration Isolation 36 23.03.02.04 Filter Section 36 23.03.02.05 Fan Assembly 37 23.03.02.06 Chilled Water Cooling Coil 38 23.03.02.07 Drain Tray 38 23.03.02.08 Motor Mounting 38 23.03.02.09 Motors 38 23.03.02.10 Electric Heaters 39

23.03.03 HYGIENIC TYPE AIR HANDLING UNITS (HAHU) 39 23.03.03.01 General 39 23.03.03.02 Construction and Access to Components 39

23.03.04 FAN COIL UNITS (FCU) 40 23.03.04.01 General 40 23.03.04.02 Construction 40

23.03.05 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 41 23.03.05.01 General 41 23.03.05.02 Precision Air Conditioning Systems 41 23.03.05.03 Cabinet Construction 42 23.03.05.04 Chilled Water Coil 42 23.03.05.05 Fans 42 23.03.05.06 Floor Stands 42 23.03.05.07 Service Area 42 23.03.05.08 2-Stage Operation 42 23.03.05.09 Filtration 42 23.03.05.10 Controls 42

23.03.06 AXIAL FANS - DIRECT DRIVE 43 23.03.06.01 General 43 23.03.06.02 Bearings 44 23.03.06.03 Motors 44 23.03.06.04 Impellers 44 23.03.06.05 Casings and Assembly 44 23.03.06.06 Factory Finish 44

23.03.07 CENTRIFUGAL FANS 44 23.03.07.01 General 44 23.03.07.02 Performance and Type 44 23.03.07.03 Bearings 45 23.03.07.04 Drives 45 23.03.07.05 Motors 45 23.03.07.06 Guards 45 23.03.07.07 Assembly and Mounting 45

23.03.08 IN LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS 46 23.03.09 PROPELLER FANS 46 23.03.10 SILENCERS - ACOUSTIC ATTENUATORS 47

23.03.10.01 General 47 23.03.10.02 Silencers - Duct Mounted Type 47

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.03.11 FILTERS 47 23.03.11.01 General 47 23.03.11.02 Dry Media Filters - Deep Bed Type, Medium Efficiency 48 23.03.11.03 Dry Media Filters - Dry Media, Panel Type 48 23.03.11.04 Panel Filters - Grease Type 48 23.03.11.05 Absolute Filters – HGPA Filter Module 49

23.03.12 ROOM PRESSURE STABILISATION MONITORING 49 23.03.13 Electric Motors 49 23.03.14 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 50

23.03.14.01 General 50 23.03.14.02 Ceiling Diffusers - Linear Slot 51 23.03.14.03 Ceiling Diffusers - Louvre Face 51 23.03.14.04 Registers (Universal Type - Aluminium) 51 23.03.14.05 Return Air Grilles - Wall Mounted (Visible one side only) 51 23.03.14.06 Return Air Grilles - Door or Wall Mounted (Visible from both sides) 51 23.03.14.07 Ceiling Mounted Return Air and Exhaust Grilles 51 23.03.14.08 Car Park Supply and Exhaust Grilles 52 23.03.14.09 Exhaust Air Louvres 52 23.03.14.10 Sand Trap Louvre for Air Intake 52 23.03.14.11 Birdscreens 52

23.03.15 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS 52 23.03.15.01 General 52

23.03.16 OPEN TYPE EXPANSION TANKS 53 23.03.17 chilled WATER PUMPS 53

23.03.17.01 General 53 23.03.17.02 Materials 54 23.03.17.03 Drives 54 23.03.17.04 Motor and Impeller 55 23.03.17.05 Seals 55

23.03.18 VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS 55 23.03.19 COILS (RUN AROUND AND COOLING) 56 23.03.20 emergency air cooled screw chiller 56 23.03.21 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS 59

23.03.21.01 Construction and Materials 60 23.03.22 CARBON MONOXIDE MONITORING SYSTEM 60

23.03.22.01 General 60 23.03.22.02 Carbon Monoxide Monitoring 60 23.03.22.03 Carbon Monoxide Sensors 61 23.03.22.04 Field Wiring Connections 61 23.03.22.05 Control Signal/Interface 61 23.03.22.06 Certification 61

23.04.00 SHEETMETAL WORK 62 23.04.01 DUCTWORK AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS 62

23.04.01.01 Sheetmetal Ductwork 62 23.04.01.02 Pitot Holes in Ductwork 62 23.04.01.03 Flexible Fan Connections 63 23.04.01.04 Flashing Collars 63 23.04.01.05 Duct Access Hatches 63 23.04.01.06 Vertical Discharge or Intake Ducts 63 23.04.01.07 Toilet Exhaust Ductwork 64 23.04.01.08 Flexible Ductwork 64 23.04.01.09 Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork 64 23.04.01.10 Circular and Oval Sheetmetal Ductwork 64

23.04.02 PVC DUCTWORK 65

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.04.02.01 Material 65 23.04.03 DAMPERS 65

23.04.03.01 General 66 23.04.03.02 Motorised Damper Sets 66 23.04.03.03 Manually Adjustable Damper Sets 66 23.04.03.04 Non-Return Dampers 67 23.04.03.05 Smoke Control Dampers 67

23.04.04 FIRE DAMPERS 67 23.04.04.01 Fire Dampers - Fusible Link Type 67

23.04.05 TECHNICAL SUBMISSION 69

23.05.00 REFRIGERATION PIPING 70 23.05.01 GENERAL 70

23.05.01.01 Fire Precautions 70 23.05.02 PIPING MATERIALS 70 23.05.03 HANDLING, PREPARATION, INSTALLATION 70 23.05.04 JOINTS 70 23.05.05 BENDS 71 23.05.06 TEES 71 23.05.07 SUPPORTS 71 23.05.08 SLEEVES 72 23.05.09 ESCUTCHEON PLATES 72 23.05.10 VALVES AND FITTINGS 72

23.05.10.01 Muffler 72 23.05.10.02 Strainer 72 23.05.10.03 Dryer 72 23.05.10.04 Sight Glass 72 23.05.10.05 Thermostatic Expansion Valves 73 23.05.10.06 Refrigerant Distributors 73 23.05.10.07 Solenoid Valves 73 23.05.10.08 Pressure Tappings 73 23.05.10.09 Valves 73 23.05.10.10 Thermometer Wells 73 23.05.10.11 Drain Piping 73

23.06.00 PIPEWORK 74 23.06.01 GENERAL 74 23.06.02 PIPING MATERIALS 74

23.06.02.01 Chilled Water Pipework 74 23.06.02.02 Condensate Piping 74

23.06.03 HANDLING, PREPARATION, INSTALLATION 75 23.06.04 JOINTS 75

23.06.04.01 Brazing 76 23.06.04.02 Flanges 76 23.06.04.03 Screwed Unions 76 23.06.04.04 Flared Fittings 77 23.06.04.05 Joints between Dissimilar Metals (Dielectric Isolators) 77

23.06.05 BENDS 77 23.06.06 TEES 77 23.06.07 CHANGE IN DIAMETER 77 23.06.08 SUPPORTS 77 23.06.09 EXPANSION, CONTRACTION 78 23.06.10 SLEEVES 79 23.06.11 ESCUTCHEON PLATES 80 23.06.12 TESTING OF PIPING 80

23.06.12.01 General 80

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.06.12.02 Testing of Water Pipework Systems 80 23.06.12.03 Testing of Drains 80

23.06.13 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING 81 23.06.14 PIPE CLEANING 81 23.06.15 ABS PIPING 81

23.06.15.01 Jointing 81 23.06.15.02 Support 82

23.07.00 VALVES 83 23.07.01 GENERAL 83 23.07.02 ISOLATING VALVES 84

23.07.02.01 Ball Valves 84 23.07.02.02 Butterfly Valves 84

23.07.03 FLOW CONTROL VALVES 85 23.07.03.01 Automatic Flow Control Valves 85 23.07.03.02 Butterfly Valves 85 23.07.03.03 Double Regulating Valves 85 23.07.03.04 Eccentric Plug Cocks 86 23.07.03.05 Manometer Connections 86

23.07.04 CHECK VALVES 86 23.07.05 GAUGE VALVES 87 23.07.06 AIR ELIMINATORS 87

23.07.06.01 Specifications 87 23.07.07 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES 88

23.07.07.01 Specification 88 23.07.08 STRAINERS 88 23.07.09 GAUGE AND INSTRUMENT FITTINGS 88 23.07.10 ABS PIPEWORK VALVES 89

23.07.10.01 Isolating Valves (Up to 50mm) 89 23.07.10.02 Isolating Valves (65mm to 200mm) 89 23.07.10.03 Isolating Valves (over 200mm) 89 23.07.10.04 Check Valves (All Sizes) 89 23.07.10.05 Strainers 90

23.08.00 INSULATION 91 23.08.01 GENERAL 91 23.08.02 SCOPE OF WORK 92 23.08.03 DUCTWORK - EXTERNAL INSULATION 92 23.08.04 FIRE RATED DUCTWORK 93 23.08.05 REFRIGERATION SUCTION GAS PIPEWORK 93 23.08.06 SMALL REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK 94 23.08.07 CHILLED WATER PIPEWORK 94 23.08.08 SAMPLES 95

23.09.00 WATER TREATMENT 96 23.09.01 GENERAL 96 23.09.02 FLUSHING 96 23.09.03 SYSTEMS OPERATED WITHOUT WATER TREATMENT 96

23.09.03.01 Hydrostatic Pressure Testing 97 23.09.04 WATER TREATMENT 97

23.10.00 CORROSION PROTECTION, PAINTING & LABELLING 99 23.10.01 GENERAL 99 23.10.02 PAINTING, GENERAL 99 23.10.03 SURFACE PREPARATION 100

23.10.03.01 Degreasing 100 23.10.03.02 Hand Cleaning 100

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.10.03.03 Blast Cleaning 100 23.10.03.04 Pickling 100 23.10.03.05 Hand and Machine 100

23.10.04 PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS 101 23.10.04.01 Galvanising 101 23.10.04.02 Painting of Metal (Enamel Finish) 101 23.10.04.03 Painting of Concrete 101

23.10.05 PAINTING MATERIAL 101 23.10.06 PAINTING SCOPE 101 23.10.07 LABELLING 102

23.11.00 PIPED MEDICAL GASES, VACUUM, MEDICAL AIR AND ANAESTHETIC GAS

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS 103 23.11.01 MEDICAL GAS 103

23.11.01.01 Extent of Work 103 23.11.02 ASSOCIATED WORKS 103 23.11.03 STANDARDs AND LOCAL Regulations 104 23.11.04 EQUIPMENT AND UNIFORMITY 104 23.11.05 PIPEWORK, FLANGES AND SUPPORTS 104

23.11.05.01 General 104 23.11.05.02 Handling, Preparation, Installation 104 23.11.05.03 Brazing 105 23.11.05.04 Flanges 105 23.11.05.05 Change in Diameter 106 23.11.05.06 Supports 106 23.11.05.07 Expansion, Contraction 106 23.11.05.08 Sleeves 106 23.11.05.09 Escutcheon Plates 107

23.11.06 Pipeline Shut Off Valves & zone isolation valve box (zivb) 107 23.11.07 Terminal Units 109 23.11.08 Pressure Gauge, SWITCHES, REGULATIONS AND SAFETY VALVES 110

23.11.08.01 Pressure Gauge 110 23.11.08.02 Pressure Switches 110 23.11.08.03 Pressure Control Regulators 110 23.11.08.04 Pressure Safety Valve 110

23.11.09 Medical VACUUM PLANT 110 23.11.09.01 General 110 23.11.09.02 Vacuum Pumps 110 23.11.09.03 Vacuum Receiver 111 23.11.09.04 Control Panel 111 23.11.09.05 Bacterial Filters/Drainage Trap Assembly 112 23.11.09.06 Exhaust System 112

23.11.10 Medical compressed air plant (4 BAR) 112 23.11.10.01 General 112 23.11.10.02 Air Compressors 113 23.11.10.03 Air Receivers 113 23.11.10.04 Air Dryers, Filter Dryer Assembly & After Coolers 113 23.11.10.05 Control Panels 115 23.11.10.06 Duplex Pressure Reducing Station 116

23.11.11 surgical compressed air plant (7 BAR) 116 23.11.11.01 General 116 23.11.11.02 Air Compressors 116 23.11.11.03 Air Receivers 116 23.11.11.04 Air Dryers, Filter Dryer Assembly & After Coolers 116 23.11.11.05 Control Panels 118

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.11.12 Anaesthetic gas scavenging disposal system 119 23.11.13 Alarm system 119

23.11.13.01 General 119 23.11.13.02 Area Alarm Panels 120 23.11.13.03 Medical Gas Central Plantrooms Alarms. 120

23.11.14 modular manifold supply system & manifold control panel 121 23.11.14.01 General 121 23.11.14.02 Oxygen and N2O Manifold Control Panel 122 23.11.14.03 Emergency Supply Manifolds (ESM) 123

23.11.15 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION 123 23.11.15.01 General 123 23.11.15.02 Testing of Pipework Systems 124

23.11.16 IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODING AND LABELLING 124

23.12.00 ELECTRICAL ASSOCIATED WITH HVAC WORKS 125 23.12.01 EXTENT OF WORK 125 23.12.02 WORK BY BUILDER 125

23.12.02.01 Electrical Trade 125 23.12.02.02 Fire Trade 125

23.12.03 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCAL RULES 126 23.12.04 EQUIPMENT AND UNIFORMITY 126 23.12.05 CONTINUITY OF SUPPLY 126 23.12.06 BALANCE OF LOAD 126 23.12.07 TESTS 126 23.12.08 IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODES, LABELLING AND WIRING DIAGRAMS 126 23.12.09 FORM OF ELECTRICAL SUPPLY 127 23.12.10 EARTHING 127 23.12.11 WIRING METHODS 127 23.12.12 CONDUIT INSTALLATION 128 23.12.13 CABLE DUCTS 131

23.12.13.01 Metal 131 23.12.13.02 Plastic 131 23.12.13.03 Cable Trays 131

23.12.14 TPS CONDUCTORS INSTALLATION 132 23.12.15 TPI CONDUCTORS 132 23.12.16 SHIELDED CABLES 132 23.12.17 MOTORS 133 23.12.18 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR TO BE USED 133

23.12.18.01 Switchboards 133 23.12.18.02 Schedule of Switchboard Equipment 134 23.12.18.03 Cabinet Construction 135 23.12.18.04 Finishes 136 23.12.18.05 Busbars 137 23.12.18.06 Links 137 23.12.18.07 Hardware 138 23.12.18.08 Mounting of Equipment 138 23.12.18.09 Installation of Switchboards 139 23.12.18.10 Switcgear and Controlgear to be used 139 23.12.18.11 Switchgear and Controlgear 139 23.12.18.12 Switches and Isolators (Switchboard Mounted) 140 23.12.18.13 Combination Fuse Switches (CFS UNITS) 140 23.12.18.14 HRC Fuses 141 23.12.18.15 HRC Fuse Cartridges 141 23.12.18.16 Contactors 141 23.12.18.17 Overload Protection 141

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.12.18.18 Local Isolating Switches 143 23.12.18.19 Time Switches 143 23.12.18.20 Current Transformers 143 23.12.18.21 Meters 143 23.12.18.22 Auxiliary and Control Switches 144 23.12.18.23 Indicator Lights 144 23.12.18.24 Control Relays 144 23.12.18.25 Auto-Transformer Starters 144 23.12.18.26 Star-Delta Starters (Closed Transition) 145

23.12.19 SPEED CONTROLLERS 145 23.12.19.01 General 145 23.12.19.02 Performance 146 23.12.19.03 Control and Monitoring 150 23.12.19.04 Protection And Monitoring 153

23.13.00 CONTROLS 156 23.13.01.01 GENERAL 156

23.13.02 EXTENT OF WORK 157 23.13.02.01 Associated Works 158

23.13.03 FUNCTIONAL BUILDING MANAGEMENT CONTROL SPECIFICATION 159 23.13.03.01 General 159 23.13.03.02 Emergency Chilled Water Pant 159 23.13.03.03 Building (Secondary) Chilled Water Pumps 160

23..04 Air handling units for pre conditioning of O/A (dedicated outside air units) 161 23.13.03.04 Chilled Water Fan Coil Units 162 23.13.03.05 Computer Room Air Conditioning System 163 23.13.03.06 Kitchen Exhaust System 164 23.13.03.07 Garbage Room Exhaust Fan 164 23.13.03.08 Car Park Ventilation 164 23.13.03.09 Operating Sequence 164 23.13.03.10 Fire Mode 165 23.13.03.11 Run and Fault Lights 165 23.13.03.12 After Hours Air Conditioning Requests 165 23.13.03.13 Other Mechanical Ventilation Systems 165

23.13.04 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY 165 23.13.05 BMCS POINT SCHEDULE 166

23.13.05.01 Mechanical Services 166 23.13.05.02 Electrical Services 169 23.13.05.03 Fire Services 170 23.13.05.04 Hydraulic Services 170

23.13.06 RETURN FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION 170

23.14.00 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMCS) 171 23.14.01 GENERAL 171 23.14.02 OPERATOR INTERFACE 172

23.14.02.01 General 172 23.14.02.02 Printer(s) 173 23.14.02.03 Modem 173

23.14.03 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (LAN) 173 23.14.03.01 Controller LAN 173 23.14.03.02 Commercial LAN 173

23.14.04 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM 174 23.14.04.01 Communication Techniques 174 23.14.04.02 Network Support 174 23.14.04.03 Network Trees & Summaries 174 23.14.04.04 Fibre Optic Pathways 174

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.14.05 FIELD HARDWARE 175 23.14.05.01 DCU Global Communications 175 23.14.05.02 DCU Field Input/Output Capability 176 23.14.05.03 DCU Point Scanning 176 23.14.05.04 DCU Upload/Download Capability 176 23.14.05.05 DCU Diagnostics 176 23.14.05.06 DCU Test Mode Operation 176 23.14.05.07 DCU Local Operator Console 176 23.14.05.08 MicroController Interface 177 23.14.05.09 Application Specific Controllers 177 23.14.05.10 Micro Controller Field Input/Output Capability 177 23.14.05.11 Distributed Lighting Control Panel 178 23.14.05.12 ViewCon 178 23.14.05.13 Temperature Sensors 179 23.14.05.14 Intelligent Sensors 179

23.14.06 BMCS SOFTWARE 179 23.14.06.01 General 179 23.14.06.02 Dynamic Graphic Flow Chart Programming 180 23.14.06.03 Zoom 181 23.14.06.04 Input/Output Capabilities 181 23.14.06.05 Operator Access 183 23.14.06.06 Command Functions 183 23.14.06.07 Database Functions 183 23.14.06.08 Database Creation and Support 183 23.14.06.09 Operator Workstation 184 23.14.06.10 Alarm Processing 185 23.14.06.11 Event Processing 186 23.14.06.12 Automatic Restart 186 23.14.06.13 Messages 186 23.14.06.14 Free Form Historical Reports 186 23.14.06.15 Prepared Historical Report 187 23.14.06.16 Parameter Save/Restore 187 23.14.06.17 Data Collection 187 23.14.06.18 Graphic Display 187 23.14.06.19 Maintenance Management 188 23.14.06.20 Context Sensitive Help Screens 188 23.14.06.21 Application Sensitive Help Screens 188 23.14.06.22 Dedicated Function Keys 189

23.14.07 DCU/MCI APPLICATION ROUTINES 189 23.14.07.01 General 189 23.14.07.02 Demand Monitoring and Load Shedding 189 23.14.07.03 Automatic Time Scheduling (ATS) 190 23.14.07.04 "Distributed" Start/Stop Time Optimisation (SSTO) 190 23.14.07.05 Duty Cycle Control (DCC) 191 23.14.07.06 Night Setback/Setup Program 191 23.14.07.07 Calculated Points 191 23.14.07.08 Event Initiated Programming (EIP) 192 23.14.07.09 Direct Digital Control (DDC) Modules 192 23.14.07.10 Self Tuning PID Loops 192 23.14.07.11 Trend Logging 193 23.14.07.12 Override 194

23.14.08 PAGER INTERFACE 194 23.14.09 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 195

23.14.09.01 Application Specific Controller Interface 195 23.14.09.02 Application Specific Controller - Common Requirements 195

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.14.09.03 HandHeld Console 196 23.14.09.04 Workstation 196 23.14.09.05 Room Sensor 197

23.14.10 FIELD DEVICES 197 23.14.10.01 General 197 23.14.10.02 Temperature Sensors 197 23.14.10.03 Current Transformers 198 23.14.10.04 Humidity Sensors 198 23.14.10.05 Differential Pressure Sensors (Low Pressure air) 198 23.14.10.06 Damper Actuators 198 23.14.10.07 Motor Speed Controllers 199

23.14.11 COMMISSIONING 199 23.14.12 STANDBY FOR OTHER SYSTEMS TESTING 200 23.14.13 ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATIONS 200 23.14.14 SYSTEM HAND-OVER 200 23.14.15 DOCUMENTATION 200

23.14.15.01 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 200 23.14.16 SITE/USER TRAINING 201 23.14.17 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT 201

23.15.00 NOISE AND VIBRATION 202 23.15.01 GENERAL 202 23.15.02 NOISE MEASUREMENTS 202 23.15.03 NOISE RATING NUMBERS 203 23.15.04 INTERNAL NOISE LEVELS 203 23.15.05 EXTERNAL NOISE LEVELS 203

23.15.05.01 Property Boundaries 203 23.15.06 PLANT NOISE LEVELS 203 23.15.07 VIBRATION PRODUCED BY PLANT 204 23.15.08 TESTING ON COMPLETION 204 23.15.09 NOISE GENERATED BY THE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 204 23.15.10 STRUCTURE BORNE NOISE AND VIBRATION 204 23.15.11 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTS AND ISOLATORS 205

23.15.11.01 Selection of Equipment Isolation Mounts 205 23.15.11.02 Piping Isolation Mounts 205 23.15.11.03 Isolation Mount Types 205 23.15.11.04 Isolation Hanger Types 206

23.15.12 EQUIPMENT BASES 206 23.15.13 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTS 206 23.15.14 PENETRATIONS 207 23.15.15 SILENCERS - GENERAL 207

23.15.15.01 Silencers 207 23.15.15.02 Silencers Exposed to Moisture 207

23.16.00 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 209 23.16.01.01 GENERAL 209

23.16.02 TESTING 209 23.16.02.01 General 209 23.16.02.02 Medical Gases 210 23.16.02.03 Control, Instrumentation, Gauges 210

23.16.03 WITNESSING OF ACCEPTANCE TESTING BY THE ENGINEER 210 23.16.03.01 MSSs and Control Panels 210

23.16.04 COMMISSIONING 210 23.16.05 POST COMMISSIONING OPERATION 212

23.16.05.01 Capacity Tests 212 23.16.05.02 Final Checks 212

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page No.



23.17.00 WARRANTY AND SERVICE 213 23.17.01 GENERAL 213 23.17.02 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD 213 23.17.03 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 213 23.17.04 AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS 215 23.17.05 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 215

23.17.05.01 All Plant 216 23.17.05.02 Air Handling Units 216 23.17.05.03 Vibration Isolators 217 23.17.05.04 Fans (Supply, Return and Exhaust) 217 23.17.05.05 Pumps 217 23.17.05.06 Air Handling Units, Filters, Fans, Electrical Switchboards, Refrigeration Pipework

(Split Systems Only), Vibration Isolators, Controls, Condensers 218 23.17.05.07 Refrigeration Pipework 219 23.17.05.08 Controls 219 23.17.05.09 Electrical Switchboards, Electrical Wiring 219 23.17.05.10 Plantrooms 220 23.17.05.11 Water Treatment 220 23.17.05.12 Corrosion Protection 220

23.18.00 SCHEDULES OF PERFORMANCE 222 23.18.01 GENERAL 222 23.18.02 CHILLERS – AIR COOLED 223 23.18.03 CIRCULATING WATER PUMPS 224 23.18.04 AIR HANDLING UNITS (INCLUDING HEAT RECOVERY) 225 23.18.05 AIR HANDLING UNITS (INCLUDING HEAT RECOVERY) FAN SCHEDULE 226 23.18.06 AIR HANDLING UNITS (WITHOUT HEAT RECOVERY) 227 23.18.07 CHILLED WATER FAN COIL UNITS (FCU’s) 228 23.18.08 COMPUTER ROOM UNITS – CHILLED WATER 238 23.18.09 FANS 239 23.18.10 MEDICAL AIR (4 BAR) / SURGICAL AIR (7 BAR) COMPRESSOR SCHEDULE 240 23.18.11 MEDICAL VACUUM PUMP SCHEDULE (450mm Hg) 241 23.18.12 ANAESTHESIA GAS SCAVENGING SYSTEM SCHEDULE 242 23.18.13 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS (EDH) 243 23.18.14 Plate HEAT EXCHANGERS (WATER TO WATER) 244 23.18.15 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES (MCCS) 245

23.19.00 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE 269



23.00.00 HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND BMCS

23.01.00 GENERAL CONDITIONS

23.01.01 INTRODUCTION AND INTENT

This Division of the specification contains the Technical Specification for the Mechanical

Services Trade section of the Building Tender / Contract Documents for the proposed building

and associated works. (This division may be separately bound for ease of reference only).

Tenderers' attention is directed to other sections of the Main Documents which may contain

items relevant to the Mechanical Services Trade, particularly with respect to the General

Conditions of Contract and Conditions of Particular Application, Special Conditions of Sub-

Contract, Preliminaries and Associated Works including Procurement and Contracting

Requirements and General Requirements. Failure to refer to other sections will be at the risk of

the Tenderer.

It is the intent of the Specification to call for finished work, installed, tested, ready for operation

and of guaranteed performance.

Any materials, apparatus etc., not shown on the drawings but which are mentioned in the

Specification or vice versa, shall be supplied and installed at no extra cost. Any services, item

of work or small detail not usually specified but inferred and necessary for the satisfactory

operation of the system or installation, shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor without any

additional expense to the Proprietor.

All materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new and of first class quality and

shall be furnished, delivered erected, connected and finished in every detail. Where no specific

type of quality of material is specified, a first class standard article as approved by the Engineer,

shall be provided.

Plant, equipment and services shall be of approved design, make and construction and shall be

complete with all accessories and fittings as specified and shown on the drawings, together with

any additional accessories and fittings not specifically mentioned but necessary for satisfactory

performance and shall be so arranged as to allow sufficient service access and space and shall be

safely and securely attached to and supported from the building structure.

All equipment and machinery shall be standard, catalogued item of reputable manufacture and

shall have certified performance data.

The performance of each item of plant when operating under the as installed conditions shall be

such that the system as a whole meets the requirements of this Specification. All performance

requirements specified shall be regarded as minimum values.

All materials and equipment shall be provided by a manufacturer experienced in such

equipment, have spare parts available in the UAE and have technical data and service facilities

readily available in the UAE.

All work carried out shall be performed in accordance with the best trade practice by competent

tradesmen.

23.01.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The successful Tenderer (hereinafter referred to as the Sub-Contractor) for the works included

in this specification shall perform the said works under a Sub-Contract to the Proprietor.

GENERAL CONDITIONS



The Building Contract (hereinafter referred to as the Contract) is binding between the Proprietor

and the Builder only. The Builder is required under certain clauses in the Contract to make such

clauses binding between the Builder and the Sub-Contractor.

The sub-contract documents comprise:

(a) Mechanical Specification Ref .S040804D1MA dated 19 July 2006 Pages 1 to 270.

(b) Mechanical Drawings. As listed in Clause 23.02.03

(c) Particular Conditions: Procurement, Contracting and General Requirements Refer to

MAIN Contract documents.

23.01.03 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

23.01.03.01 Sub-Contractor to Inform Himself

The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have carefully examined the Sub-Contract Documents

and Particular Conditions, the Specification and drawings. If the Sub-Contractor has any doubt

as to the meaning of any portion of these documents, he shall, before submitting a tender, set

forth the particulars thereof and submit them to the Engineer in writing, in order that such doubt

may be removed.

The Sub-Contract drawings are for tendering purposes, are diagrammatic only and do not

purport to show all the structural and architectural details. Any information involving accurate

measurement of the building shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings and at

the building. Drawings of detail do not purpose to show the exact presentation of components

and the Sub-Contractor shall check with component suppliers for accurate information on the

actual component to be provided.

The Sub-Contractor shall make, without variation in cost to the Sub-Contract, all necessary and

minor changes or additions to co-ordinate with all other services and the building structure.

The Sub-Contractor must carefully consider local conditions, visit the site of the proposed work

and make any field survey necessary for proper planning and execution of the work. Failure to

do so shall in no way relieve the Sub-Contractor of responsibility for changes or unanticipated

costs due to field conditions.

After a tender has been accepted, the responsibility for any misunderstanding or error shall rest

with the Sub-Contractor.

The Sub-Contractor shall arrange his own work in co-operation with other trades so that all

work is installed to the best advantage. Where equipment is installed by this Sub-Contractor

without due regard to other trades, work of relocation of such equipment shall be performed by

the Sub-Contractor at his expense.

23.01.03.02 Drawings and Information Supplied by the Engineer

The drawings as mentioned above shall not be departed from in any way whatsoever, except by

the written consent of the Engineer. During the execution of the work one of the sets of prints of

the Sub-Contract drawings shall be available for reference where the work is to be carried out.

23.01.03.03 Definitions

GENERAL CONDITIONS



Where equipment or materials are specified by a specific manufacturer's product trade name and

model number and the words 'OR APPROVED EQUAL' added, it shall be understood to mean

that any other manufacturer's equipment which is comparable in performance, quality of

workmanship and material shall be acceptable. The interpretation of the term 'APPROVED

EQUAL' shall rest entirely with the Engineer whose judgement shall be final.

Where equipment or materials are specified by a specific manufacturer's produce trade name

and model number and the words 'OR APPROVED EQUAL' are not added, it shall mean that

this Sub-Contractor shall allow in his base tender for this equipment or material only.

The terms 'approved', 'directed' and 'selected' shall mean respectively approved, directed and

selected by the Engineer.

23.01.03.04 Obvious Work

If neither the specification nor the drawings contain any particulars of minor parts, which are

nevertheless clearly to be inferred, or minor parts, which are necessary for the completion of the

work under the Sub-Contract, all such parts shall be supplied and executed by the Sub-

Contractor without extra charge.

23.01.03.05 Equipment Variations After Tendering

If the Sub-Contractor proposes variations in equipment after the Sub-Contract has been signed,

he shall apply in writing to the Engineer for approval of alternatives and shall include full

technical information of the proposed variations, together with the cost of adjustment to the

Sub-Contract.

The Builder, if instructed in writing by the Engineer and Project Manager, shall authorise the

Sub-Contractor to use products of other manufacturers or other alternatives as applicable instead

of those specified.

23.01.03.06 Standards, Quality of Work and Materials, Submittals and Approval

All materials, fittings, accessories, apparatus and equipment shall be new (unless the re-use of

existing materials, etc. is specified) and of the first grade design and manufacture and shall

comply with all authority regulations and be in accordance with the current edition at date of

tender and of the following standards and codes of practice where applicable.

. British Standards (BS) and Codes of Practice (BSCP)

. NFPA Standards

. National Health Services (NHS) Technical Health Memoranda

. CIBSE Design Guides

. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

. DEWA By Laws and Regulations

. Dubai Municipality By Laws and Regulations

. Dubai Civil Defence Requirements

. DIC Regulations and Guidelines

. Etisalat Regulations and Guidelines

. TECOM Regulations, Guidelines and Requirements

The Sub-Contractor shall submit nominated samples and/or technical literature, catalogues, shop

drawings, calculations, Certificates and Compliance Statements, for all accessories, fittings and

apparatus and equipment proposed for use in the work of this Sub-Contract to the Engineer

through the Builder for approval in accordance with the Main Contract Conditions. Only such

items which are approved shall be installed. Failure to comply with this provision may result in

the unconditional rejection of such items when inspected on site. Any rejected materials,

GENERAL CONDITIONS



fittings, accessories or apparatus shall be removed from the site within 24 hours of such

rejection.

The workmanship shall be of a high standard throughout and only first class tradesmen shall be

employed on the works in their respective trades.

If the Sub-Contractor executes any defective work or supplies any plant inferior in quality or

deficient in quantity of those specified, notwithstanding that approval may have previously been

obtained for such work or materials and notwithstanding that a progress payment may have been

made in respect thereof, the Engineer under the terms of the sub-contract may give to the

Builder and the Sub-Contractor notice in writing setting forth the defect and deficiency and such

condemnation or refusal shall be conclusive. The Sub-Contractor shall, at his own expense and

without undue delay, alter or remove and reconstruct the work or supply the materials in

conformity with the Sub-Contract.

For the purpose of inspection of any portion of the work already assembled, the Engineer may,

at any time during the currency of the Sub-Contract, direct the Sub-Contractor by notice in

writing, to dismantle any portion of the work.

23.01.03.07 Protection

Until the work is taken over, the Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the

work and for the proper fencing, guarding, lighting, flagging and watching of all works

comprised in the Sub-Contract and for the provision of temporary footways, guards and fences

as far as may be rendered necessary by reason of the work for the accommodation and

protection of foot passengers, vehicles and animals and of owners and occupiers of adjoining

property and of the public.

The Sub-Contractor shall, during the progress of the work, properly cover up and protect any

part of the work liable to injury by exposure to the weather and shall take every reasonable

precaution against accident or damage to work from any cause.

23.01.03.08 Tests

When the Sub-Contractor requires tests to be made, the Sub-Contractor shall give seven

working days notice in writing to the Builder and copy to the Engineer of the date on which

such tests will be made or such other period of notice as may be reasonable in the

circumstances. Unless otherwise agreed, the tests shall be commenced on such date and shall be

carried out in the presence of the Engineer.

Where the Sub-Contract provides for tests at the premises of the Sub-Contractor, the Sub-

Contractor shall provide, free of charge, such labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores,

apparatus and instruments as may reasonably be demanded to carry out such tests in accordance

with the Sub-Contract and he shall give such facilities to the Engineer to carry out such tests.

All major equipment tested and commissioned on site shall be undertaken by a

qualified/certified Manufacturer’s Representative.

The Sub-Contractor shall allow for all expenses for up to two people for any nominated

manufacturers factory performance witness testing of major equipment.

Where the Sub-Contract provides for tests on the site, the Sub-Contractor shall provide, free of

charge electricity, fuel and water and shall make available the apparatus to be tested.

Where nominated the Sub-Contractor shall provide a Independent Specialist Third Party for

testing and commissioning.

GENERAL CONDITIONS



23.01.03.09 Provisional Sums

Provisional Sums are included to cover work which is known to be required in certain areas but

for which the details are not available. These sums shall be expended only as directed in writing

from the Proprietor. The whole or any unexpended portion at the date of completion shall be

deducted from the Sub-Contract price.

23.01.04 NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES (NOCS)

Copies of NOCs received from Authorities are enclosed as Appendix “B” for reference. The

Engineer does not assume any responsibility for the accuracy of the information provided in the

NOC or that shown on the drawings. The Sub-Contractor shall carry out necessary exploratory

works and investigations to obtain sufficient information as required.

23.01.05 AUTHORITY PERMITS, FEES, INSPECTIONS AND NOCS

The Sub-Contractor shall obtain all necessary authority statutory permits for their works and:

. Arrange for all inspections by the local authorities as and where applicable on an ongoing

basis throughout construction to avoid delays to the project.

. Submit all documentation required by the authorities for checking and approval.

. Comply with any changes requested by the authorities and notify the Engineer

immediately of such changes and obtain his approval.

. Pay all fees/charges as levied by the authorities for inspections, approvals, temporary

services, connections, etc.

. Liaise with the authorities and co-ordinate in compliance with their dictates the relocation

or rerouting of any existing services that may be required.

. On completion of works and approval present final Authority Approval Certificates to the

Engineers.



23.02.00 DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES

23.02.01 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT

The works covered by this specification comprises the supply, installation, testing,

commissioning and defects liability of materials, labour and equipment for the mechanical

services at the new specialist Urology, Nephrology, Diabetes and Diagnostic Imaging Centre on

the combined Plot No’s B/P42 and B/P43 within the Dubai Health Care City (DHCC) in Dubai,

United Arab Emirates.

The hospital building will comprise of four (4) major structural elements:

. Building A (Ground, Levels 1, 2, 4 and roof)

. Building B (Ground, Levels 1, 2, 3, 4 and roof)

. Covered Link Bridges between buildings

. Underground Car Park (Levels B1 and B2)

23.02.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

The mechanical services works broadly covered by this specification covers the following

specific areas:

. Air conditioning of Medical and Administration areas.

. Amenities ventilation (WC, dirty utilities, staff change, etc.

. Car park ventilation.

. Kitchen ventilation.

. Grease arrestor exhaust.

. General exhaust.

. Primary chilled water connection via DHCC district cooling system (EMPOWER Energy

Transfer Station (ETS)).

. Medical gas systems, including oxygen, nitrous oxide, vacuum, medical air (4bar),

surgical air (7 bar) and anaesthetic gas scavenging system, plus a monitoring and alarm

system.

. Building Management Control System (BMCS).

23.02.03 DRAWINGS BY ENGINEER

The design drawings show approximate locations of fittings and items of plant only and shall be

considered as diagrammatic and a guide only. The drawings, specification and other documents

are intended to be mutually explanatory and complete, but all work entailed by the one, even if

not by the other, shall be fully executed.

This Specification shall be read in conjunction with the services drawings, architectural

drawings and all revisions, amendments, annexures and instructions issued by the Architect.

The following drawings shall form part of this Specification

Drawing No. Title

M-01 Legend, General Notes and Drawing List – Mechanical Services

M-02 Site Plan – External Services – Mechanical Services

M-03 Building A/B – Basement 2 – Mechanical Services Layout

M-04 Building A/B – Basement 1 – Mechanical Services Layout

M-05 Building A – Ground Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES



M-06 Building B – Ground Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-07 Building A – First Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-08 Building B – First Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-09 Building A – Second Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-10 Building B – Second Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-11 Building A – Third Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-12 Building B – Third Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-13 Building A – Fourth Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-14 Building B – Fourth Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-15 Building A – Roof Plant – Mechanical Services Layout

M-16 Building B – Roof Plant – Mechanical Services Layout

M-17 Building A – Air Schematic – Mechanical Services

M-18 Building B – Air Schematic – Mechanical Services

M-19 Chilled Water Schematic – Mechanical Services

M-20 Detail Sheet 1 – Mechanical Services

M-21 Detail Sheet 2 – Mechanical Services

M-101 Legend, General Notes and Drawing List – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-102 Building A – Ground Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-103 Building B – Ground Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-104 Building A – First Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-105 Building B – First Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-106 Building A – Second Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-107 Building B – Second Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-108 Building A – Third Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-109 Building B – Third Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-110 Building A – Fourth Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-111 Building B – Fourth Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-112 Building A – Roof Plant – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-113 Building B – Roof Plant – Medical Gases Services Layout

M-114 Medical Gases Services Schematic (Sheet 1)

M-115 Medical Gases Services Schematic (Sheet 2)

M-116 Medical Gases Services Details (Sheet 1)

M-117 Medical Gases Services Details (Sheet 2)

M-118 Medical Gases Services Spare

23.02.04 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of works comprises the manufacture, fabrication, supply, delivery, installation,

testing, commissioning, guarantee and twelve months defects liability of all plant, systems and

services associated for the complete Mechanical Services installation.

The work shall include all necessary minor and incidental work required to implement the intent

and meaning of this specification and associated works.

Whether or not the words “supply and install” appear in this Specification or on the drawings,

unless clearly excluded, all items of equipment for the complete installation are required and

shall be supplied and installed. The scope of work shall include but not necessarily be limited to

the following:

23.02.04.01 Preliminaries

. Provision of detailed shop drawings for the complete installation.




. Provision of detailed drawings showing locations and sizes of all access panels required

for access to volume control dampers, fire dampers, fans, valves and the like and for

access required for cleaning and monitoring equipment.

. Provision of detailed drawings showing locations and sizes of all penetrations for ducts,

pipes, grilles, cast-in pipe anchor points, piping trenches, plinths, drain points and any

other items required to be provided by other trades.

. Provision of all holding bolts, sleeves, conduits and any other fittings required to be built

in during construction and provision of drawings showing their accurate location.

. Hoisting of all equipment not hoisted by the Building Trade.

. Provision of all required scaffolding not provided by Building Trade.

. Provision of detailed schedule listing nameplate and consumed kilowatts for the

mechanical services plant and equipment and submission to the Engineer prior to

submission of switchboard shop drawings or the placement of orders.

. Provision of samples of all fittings exposed to view to the Architect and Engineer for

approval.

23.02.04.02 Chilled Water Systems

Primary chilled water system incorporating the following:

. The primary chilled water source serving the hospital shall be via connection to the local

DHCC district cooling system administrated by EMPOWER.

Note that EMPOWER guidelines and requirements are to be strictly followed.

. An Energy Transfer Station (ETS) is to be located on basement level B1. Within the ETS

the demarcation of EMPOWER responsible work and building Mechanical contractor

responsible work will be defined as:-

- EMPOWER to supply and install all primary chilled water pipework, valves and

fittings up to and including the heat exchangers on the “plant” side as defined in

the EMPOWER guidelines.

. Three (3) off chilled water pumps as shown in the schedules.

. Feed and expansion tank.

. Chemical dosing system and corrosion inhibitor dosing with auto bleed-off.

. From connections on the ETS heat exchanger building “customer” side, the Mechanical

contractor shall be responsible for the chilled water piping system comprising steel

reticulation insulated pipework, valves, strainers, hangers, fittings, automatic air vents,

expansion joints for temperature expansion compensation, etc. Note that pipework routes

indicated on the drawings are diagrammatic and sufficient offsets and bends should be

allowed to suit the site installation.




Standby chiller system incorporating the following:

. One (1) air cooled screw chiller comprising screw compressor, evaporator vessel, air

cooled condensers, electrical and controls to form a complete system and as shown in the

schedule.

. Two (2) off chilled water pump as shown in the schedules.

. Chilled water pipework system comprising steel reticulation insulated pipework, valves ,

strainer, hangers, fittings, automatic air vents, expansion joints for temperature expansion

compensation, etc.

Note that pipework routes indicated on the drawings are diagrammatic and sufficient offsets and

bends should be allowed to suit the site installation.

Piping Systems – General Items

. All miscellaneous drain, overflow and bleed off piping from equipment.

. All domestic cold water make-up piping from valves supply points provided by

Hydraulic Trade.

. Chilled water feed and expansion make-up tank.

. Escutcheon plates around all pipework penetrations exposed to view.

. Concrete inertia base for each spring mounted centrifugal pump.

. For inertia base requirements refer to “Noise and Vibration” section and Acoustic

Specifications.

23.02.04.03 Air Conditioning Units (Air Handling Unit (AHU), Fan Coil Unit (FCU))

Operating Theatre AHUs and Sterile Store

. Five (5) off factory assembled low pressure, horizontal, draw through supply air handling

units as shown on the drawings and schedules. Each unit shall comprise motorised

outside air dampers panel pre-filter, deep bed bag filter, run around heat recovery coil,

main cooling coil and fan section with centrifugal fan. Access hatches are to be provided

between each element of the AHU plus duct mounted electric reheater.

Operating Theatre Exhaust Air (AHU) and Sterile Store

. Five (5) off factory assembled low pressure, horizontal draw through exhaust air handling

units as shown on the drawings and schedules. Each unit shall comprise motorised return

air damper, panel filter run around coil and fan section with centrifugal fan. Access

hatches are to be provided between each element of the AHU.

General Outside Air Supply AHU

. Two (2) off factory assembled low pressure, horizontal draw through supply air handling

units as shown on the drawings and schedules. Each unit shall comprise motorised

outside air dampers, panel pre-filter, deep bed bag filter, heat recovery run around coil,

main cooling coil and fan section with centrifugal fan.




General Exhaust Air (AHU)

. Two (2) off factory assembled low pressure, horizontal draw through exhaust air

handling units as shown on the drawings and schedules. Each unit shall comprise

motorised return air damper, panel filter, run around coil and fan section with centrifugal

fan. Access hatches are to be provided between each element of the AHU.

Fan Coil Units (FCUs)

. Multiple ceiling mounted chilled water FCUs refer to drawings and schedules. Each

FCU shall comprise panel filter, chilled water cooling coil and centrifugal fan.

Computer Room Air Conditioning Units (CRACs)

. Two (2) off floor mounted, down blow chilled water CRAC units as shown on the

drawings and schedules. Each CRAC unit shall comprise floor mounting frame, cooling

coil and centrifugal fan filter plus integral controls.

23.02.04.04 Ventilation Systems

. Ventilation supply and exhaust systems including fans, anti vibration mountings, filters,

ductwork, air terminals, insulation and the like as applicable to serve the following:

- Garbage exhaust (1 off)

- Pump and valve room supply

- Toilet exhaust system (2 off)

- Kitchen exhaust (1 off)

- Dilution pit exhaust (1 off)

- Grease arrestor exhaust (1 off)

- IT room gas suppression exhaust (1 off)

- Batch washer exhaust (1 off)

- Safety cabinets (3 off)

Car Park Ventilation System

. Car Park Ventilation System comprising two (2) off exhaust air fan, two (2) off supply air

fan, ductwork, dampers, grilles, sound attenuators, motorised dampers, CO monitoring

system.

23.02.04.05 Ductwork and Accessories

. All low pressure sheetmetal ductwork (supply, return, exhaust and outside air) for the air

conditioning and ventilation systems including fittings such as fire dampers, balancing

dampers, modulating dampers, flexible connections, access panels, flashings, supports.

. Supply air diffusion shall be carried out by means of linear slot diffusers and louvre faced

grilles. Return air shall be via direct ducting to spaces through egg crate grilles.

. All necessary supply air diffusers and grilles, exhaust and return grilles, linear diffusers

and bar grilles, accessories, balancing dampers, cushion heads etc.

. The supply for installation by the Building Trade of all door grilles as shown on the

drawings.




. Electric duct heaters including flow switches and safety controls. All heater contactors

shall be installed in the mechanical switchboards. Power and control wiring of all

electric heaters including provision of safety thermostats.

. Sound attenuators as shown on the drawings and schedules.

. Acoustic and thermal insulation of ductwork, supply and return air plenums as shown on

the drawings and described in the acoustic specifications.

. If there are any discrepancies between the mechanical drawings and acoustic

specifications regarding acoustic treatment of mechanical services, the acoustic

specification shall take precedence.

. Vibration isolation equipment including inertia bases, springs, waffle pad and associated

fittings to eliminate vibration to the structure as shown on the mechanical drawings and

described in the acoustic specifications. If there are any discrepancies between

mechanical drawings and acoustic specifications regarding vibration isolation of

mechanical equipment, the acoustic specifications shall take precedence.

. Fire rating of ductwork where shown on drawings.

. Overflashing to all ducts, pipes and the like penetrating external walls and roof

(underflashing shall be by Building Trade).

. Trim angles around all ductwork penetrations exposed to view.

. Cutting and sealing airtight of holes in sheetmetal work for the installation of smoke

detectors, including access panels, gaskets and sash catches for these detectors (smoke

detectors shall be supplied by the Fire Trade).

. Galvanised metal plinth surrounds and fixing in position for concrete plinths (concrete

pouring shall be by Building Trade).

23.02.04.06 Electrical

. All electrical equipment, wiring and controls provided under the Mechanical Trade as

described under the Specification clause “Electrical” including:

- Mechanical services switchboards as shown on the drawings and schedules

connected to emergency supplies.

- All circuit breakers, fuses, starters, relays, switches, timers, pilot lights and

isolating switches, safety controls, required for the satisfactory operation and

maintenance of the systems.

- All power wiring between the main switchboard in plantroom to floor by floor

sub-switchboard and motors, starters, heater and ancillary equipment including

termination and final connections.

- All control and interlocking wiring required to form a complete and operating

control system.

- Final connection of incoming control wiring from the fire indicator panel to

terminals in the mechanical switchboards and fire fan control panel including

relays.




- Complete control system including wiring from fire fan control panel (FFCP) to

mechanical switchboards.

- All power and control wiring and switchgear between circuit breakers in the lift

distribution boards and lift motor room ventilation system.

23.02.04.07 Controls Including:

. A complete automatic Direct Digital Building Management Control System as described

under the “Controls” section. The control system shall be complete in all aspects,

including full co-ordination between the Mechanical, Electrical and Control Trades to

ensure the correct location and functionality including:

- Installation of wells and tappings supplied by the Controls Trade.

- Co-ordination of room temperature sensor locations to suit final architectural

layouts.

- Provision of all pressure switches for fan and pump indications.

- Installation of all valves supplied by the Controls Trade.

- Provision of segregated and covered terminals in mechanical services

switchboards for wiring by the Controls Trade to control equipment.

- Co-ordination to ensure correct interfacing of systems and accurate cross

referencing of drawings. Attendance as required to prove correct operation of

interface points.

23.02.04.08 Commissioning and Certification including:

- Balancing and commissioning of air and water systems as required.

- Complete witnessed demonstration of the air and water balance figures.

- Complete commissioning, validation and demonstration of all medical gas

systems.

- Testing and demonstrating the performance of all systems.

. Painting of the completed installation including labelling of equipment, piping and

services as specified.

. Painting of all ductwork, pipework and equipment exposed to view or the weather to

colours nominated by the Architect.

. Provision of twelve months defects liability.

. The instruction of personnel who will be in charge of operating the plant after

commissioning.

. Provision of Operating and Maintenance Manuals, together with as-installed drawings as

specified including CAD files in DWG format.

. Permanent reduced scale diagrams in the plantrooms as specified.




. All work and materials not specifically mentioned in this specification but obviously

necessary for the proper and complete installation and operation of the services as

envisaged shall be deemed to have been included in the tender.

. The Mechanical Trade shall make good or pay all costs in respect of patching, filling,

painting, etc of holes and chases or damage caused by him or his Trade Contractors in the

execution of the Works. Such making good shall be of a standard to restore the surface to

its original condition.

23.02.05 ASSOCIATED WORKS

The following is a list of work associated with the mechanical services which shall be provided

by the Building Trade at no cost to the Mechanical Trade.

The Mechanical Trade shall supply and bear the cost of all detail drawings required for the

guidance of the other trades and shall be responsible for checking the associated setting out.

23.02.05.01 Building Trade Work

. Provision of airtight plantrooms as shown on the drawings to house mechanical plant,

complete with acoustic seals on acoustic doors and hobs at bottom of doors.

. Provision of waterproofing to the plantroom floors properly graded to floor wastes.

. Provision of concrete plinths for AHUs, pumps, chillers, fans and MCCs. The

Mechanical Trade shall provide galvanised metal plinth surrounds and fix in position for

pouring by the Building Trade.

. The building in of all pipe sleeves in masonry. Sleeves in concrete walls and slabs shall

be fixed in the formwork by the Mechanical Trade. Coring for pipework passing through

existing walls and slabs shall be by the Mechanical Trade.

. The Provision of all openings and making good in the building structure for the passage

of ducts, pipes and conduits to locations and dimensions provided by the Mechanical

Trade.

. The provision of trimmed openings in walls, ceilings and doors for diffusers, louvres and

grilles.

. Concrete kerbs 150mm high around all plantroom floor penetrations. Detail drawings

shall be provided by the Mechanical Trade.

. Kerbs for roof mounted fans, discharges and intakes. Detail drawings shall be provided

by the Mechanical Trade.

. Perimeter kerbs around the cooling tower enclosure. Detail drawings shall be provided

by the Mechanical Trade.

. Under flashing for all roof and external wall penetrations.

. Openings in ceiling bulkheads, walls and at other positions as required for adjustment,

access and maintenance of equipment. Detail drawings shall be provided by the

Mechanical Trade.




. The provision and installation of all sand and weatherproof outside air louvres complete

with birdscreens. Louvres and screens resistance to air flow shall not exceed 50Pa at a

face velocity of 2.5m/s. Louvre face areas are nominated on the drawings. Blank off

unused sections of louvres in a workmanlike manner where indicated on the drawings.

. Airtight fire rated masonry shafts through the building for the vertical distribution of

supply and return air. Duct penetrations in the walls of these shafts shall be sealed

airtight around by the Mechanical Trade.

. Fire rated shafts through the building enclosure ductwork for the vertical distribution of

mechanical ventilation systems and piping.

. Provision of 25mm undercut on doors designated on the drawings “U/C”.

. Provision of lift shaft smoke vents.

. Provision of natural ventilation to substation.

. Supply and installation of airtight and vapour sealed underfloor plenums and peripheral

walls for each area where floor mounted computer room units supply air to the false floor

space.

. The supply and installation of ventilating floor tiles or floor air grilles for each area

nominated as having underfloor plenums. Required area of grilles to be nominated by the

Mechanical Trade

. Provision of a platform for the chilled water feed tank in the roof plantroom.

. Weatherproofing of shafts for car park exhaust, diesel generator exhaust.

23.02.05.02 Electrical Trade Work

. Supply and installation of all lighting and power outlets in the plantrooms.

. General lighting and temporary power for construction purposes.

. High impact general purpose outlets adjacent to each mechanical switchboard.

. Wiring for lights in kitchen exhaust hoods, terminating at an on/off switch located on the

hood exterior or other approved location.

23.02.05.03 Hydraulic Trade Work

The following hydraulic services works shall be provided:

. Domestic cold water supply to the following locations terminating with a stop valve

capable of delivering the water quantity shown:-

- Adjacent the chilled water expansion tank (0.2 l/s @ 200 kPa)

- Adjacent to run around coil expansion tank (0.1 l/s @ 200kPa)

Final connection shall be provided by the Mechanical Trade.

. Provision of hose cocks in the chiller plantroom.

. Provision of trapped floor wastes in the plantrooms as shown on the drawings.




23.02.05.04 Fire Trade Work

The following fire services works shall/will be provided:

. Provision of fire indicator board (FIB), fire fan control panel (FFCP) plus all necessary

wiring and signalling from these panels to terminal blocks in each of the mechanical

services switchboards (MCC).

. Wiring from this terminal block, subsequent control and status indication of the

mechanical plant required to operate in fire mode shall be provided by the Mechanical

Trade.

. Permanent fire extinguishers in plantrooms.

. Smoke detectors required to initiate Smoke Control Actions, including wiring back to

FIB. Space and access panels plus all cutting of duct to these detectors shall be provided

by the Mechanical Services Trade in all ducts etc.

23.02.05.05 Lift Trade Work

. An interface panel, located in the LMR incorporating all high level alarm contacts,

associated with the lifts systems, required to be connected to the BMCS. Wiring between

the interface panel and the BMCS shall be carried out by the Mechanical Trade.

23.02.06 PERFORMANCE & GUARANTEE

23.02.06.01 Performance Criteria

The Mechanical Trade shall guarantee that the installed performance of the plant shall comply

with the specified requirements, shall control within the limits of the plant capacity and

maintain conditions within the limits of the plant capacity and maintain conditions within the

limits specified and that all equipment supplied is suitable for the duty.

All plant and systems shall be selected, installed and commissioned to ensure safe, continuous

and unattended operation under the following design criteria:

Outdoor design conditions:

Summer: 46.1°C db/29°C wb

Winter: 14°C db

Indoor design conditions:

Operating Rooms and Category 1:

Summer / Winter: 23°C db + 0.5°C, 50% RH + 10% RH

Category 2:

Summer / Winter: 23°C db +1°C, RH virtue of cooling coil

selection

Category 3:

Summer / Winter: 26°C db + 1.5°C, RH virtue of cooling

coil selection

Plantrooms:

Summer / Winter: 28°C + 1.5°C




Maximum Ambient for air cooled 50°C db

devices:

Occupancy load: 1 person/10m2

Heat gain from lighting: 20 W/m²

Heat gain from office equipment: 15 W/m²

Ventilation requirements:

Fresh Air:

- General 10 l/s/person

- Operating Theatre 20 AC

Minimum Supply Air Rate 5 l/s/m2

Extract Air:

- Patient/Consulting Room Toilets 10 AC

- Dirty Utility 10 AC

For other areas, refer to CIBSE Guide Book B

Acoustic performance:

- Operating Rooms NC 30-35

- Wards NC 30-40

- Offices NC 35-40

- Laboratories NC 30-40

- Consulting Rooms NC 30-40

- Corridors / Public Area NC 35-40

- Private Rooms NC 30-35

- Toilets / Dirty Utilities NC 40-45

- Plantrooms NC 50-55

“Noise and Vibration” selection

At site boundaries mechanical plant noise

shall not exceed DHCC specified levels.

Chilled water coil inlet temperature: 5.5°C

Chilled water coil outlet temperature: 14.5°C

Zoning

Perimeter zone depth: 3.5m

Maximum Air Velocities: m/s

Ductwork:

- Supply 6.0

- Exhaust car park riser 7.0

- Car park distribution 6.0

- Kitchen 10-12

- Toilet 6.0

- Flexibles 4.5

Grille Neck:

- Supply 2.5




- Exhaust 2.0

- Car park exhaust 3.0

Space Air Movement: between 0.1 and 0.25 m/s between

to 1.5m above floor level

Air Filters 2.5

Louvre Face

- Intake 2.5

- Discharge 3.0

Air Filtration %

- Filter bed No. 1 * 40%

- Filer bed No. 2 * 85%

- HEPA 99.99%

Note: * Based on ASHRAE, Chapter 7.

23.02.07 PRESSURISATION PHILOSOPHY

Fresh air requirements to each zone shall be generally determined by the level of dirty extract to

the same zone, or to a value as required for the levels of occupancy in each zone.

Areas requiring no dirty extract shall be pressurised (+ ve) positive or maintained neutral as

recommended by ASHRAE, Standard for Health Care Facilities, Table 3 of Chapter 7.

Areas requiring dirty extract, shall be negatively pressurised (- ve).

The buildings generally will be (+ ve) positively pressurised to minimise hot air infiltration.

23.02.07.01 Fire Philosophy and Smoke Management

Fire dampers shall be positioned in all supply and exhaust air ductwork crossing fire walls/slabs

excluding fire rated kitchen exhaust ductwork to the same rating as the wall/slab. They shall be

triggered from fusible link connections sited in the damper.

23.02.07.02 Air Intake System

Fresh air intake to each air handling unit shall incorporate a sand trap louvre and/or in line

filters within a sheetmetal plenum chamber.

Air intake louvres shall, in general, be located as far away as practical from extract louvres,

medical gas discharge points, drainage vent stacks, generator engine discharges and the like, to

avoid short-circuiting of dirty air.

23.02.08 BUILDING DETAILS

Any aspects of or revisions to the building design which in the opinion of the Mechanical Trade,

may affect the capacity of any of the air conditioning equipment and/or require amendments to

the tender design shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in writing. This shall be done

as soon as the changes become apparent so as not to disrupt the building programme.




23.02.09 GENERAL

23.02.09.01 Co-Ordination

The Mechanical Trade shall arrange its work in co-operation with all other trades.

The Mechanical Trade shall take site measurements, check all Architectural, Structural,

Plumbing and Electrical drawings in relation to his work and co-ordinate all work with other

trades.

Any cutting, patching, modifications to other trades work, etc., required as a result of the

Mechanical Trade failing to co-ordinate with the construction/project programme shall be

carried out at the Mechanical Trade’s expense.

23.02.09.02 Electrical

Immediately upon being awarded contracted to carry out the works the Mechanical Trade shall

list all powered devices. This list, together with the Mechanical Trade’s estimate of maximum

demand, shall be forwarded to the Engineer for checking against the specified incoming cable

sizes.



23.03.00 EQUIPMENT

23.03.01 GENERAL

All equipment shall be new and suitable for the duty with due allowance being made for

dynamic loads, stress concentrations, the operating temperature, pressure range and the

environment at site.

Equipment shall be of service proven design and have spare parts available from stock for parts

required for routine servicing and in Australia for all other parts.

Equipment shall be suitable for safe, reliable operation under installed conditions of service and

be fitted with approved guards over all safety hazards.

In all cases, equipment shall be protected against operation in conditions which could cause

damage to the equipment, danger to personnel, or damage to the building or its contents.

Uniformity of type, life expectancy, protection and finish shall be preserved with practicable

limits throughout the installation.

23.03.01.01 Site Climatic Conditions

Equipment shall be suitable for climatic conditions as defined in this specification.

23.03.01.02 Layout

Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed with provision for easy access for

operation, servicing and maintenance.

The Mechanical Trade shall satisfy themselves that the equipment offered can comply with the

above requirements when installed in the positions allocated. Should any additional space or

services or revised layouts be required the Mechanical Trade shall submit details of their

requirements at the time of tendering.

23.03.01.03 Plinths

Plinths shall be provided under all floor mounted equipment and shall be 100mm high unless

detailed otherwise on drawings.

23.03.01.04 Fastenings

Fastenings shall be of the same or more corrosion resistant material than the materials fastened,

of a minimum number of varieties and sizes and suitable for fitting with commonly available

tools.

Screw threads shall be lubricated with graphite grease or similar long life lubricant.

Washers shall be fitted under nuts.

Fastenings subject to vibration shall be locked tight.

Self tapping screws shall not be used where periodic dismantling is required.

Bolts and set screws shall have hexagonal or Allen-keyed heads and shall be cadmium plated.

Drilling of structural elements for fixings shall comply with the Engineer's instructions.

EQUIPMENT



Power fasteners shall not be used without the approval of the Engineer in writing.

Blind rivets shall be of the pressure tight type, i.e. Imex. Rivets shall not be used where loaded

in tension.

Dowels shall be of the threaded, tapered type.

23.03.01.05 Lubrication

All moving parts shall be lubricated before placing them into service.

Lubricants shall be compatible with the duty.

Equipment shall be selected to minimise the variety of lubricants required.

23.03.01.06 Shafts

Shafts shall be designed to avoid critical speeds within the speed range 0-130% of operating

speed and shall be stepped to provide easy removal of bearings and attachments.

Attachments shall be securely and positively fixed.

Shafts operating in corrosive environments shall be given a uniform fine ground surface finish.

23.03.01.07 Bearings

Bearings shall be of the rolling element type wherever possible. Bearings shall be selected to

suit the duty as installed, be grease lubricated, provided with lubrication nipples of a common

type and size and be fully accessible for servicing and replacement.

Alignment shall be to within limits specified by the manufacturer.

Bearings shall have a 90% probability of a minimum life of one hundred thousand hours

continuous operation at the installed duty.

Bearing housings shall incorporate means of automatically relieving excess lubrication pressure

and be sealed against entry of moisture, dust or vermin.

Where bearings are mounted in pillow blocks, the blocks shall be dowelled to the supporting

structure after bearings have been aligned. The blocks shall also fully enclose the bearings and

be provided with shaft labyrinth seals and a port to channel excess grease for collection.

23.03.01.08 Couplings

Couplings shall be of the flexible non-lubricated type keyed to shafts, sealed against entry of

dust or dirt and be suitable for the installed duty.

Couplings shall only be installed on shafts aligned within limits recommended by the coupling

manufacturer. Allowances shall be made for changes in alignment which may take place

between idle and operating conditions.

Couplings shall be dynamically balanced to comply with the Specification Section 'Noise and

Vibration' and shall run smoothly in either direction without undue noise or vibration.

EQUIPMENT



23.03.01.09 Gaskets, Sealants and Mastics

Gaskets shall be of Klinger or Bells manufacture, installed in all flanged joints and shall be

selected and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Sealants and mastics shall be 3M, Norton, Nonporite, Fosters or approved manufacture applied

in all joints in piping systems and shall be selected and applied in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions.

Non-setting mastics or sealants shall be applied to components subject to movement in

operation.

23.03.01.10 Direct Drives

Following final alignment and acceptance by the Engineer all equipment mounting feet shall be

dowelled to their bases.

23.03.01.11 Belt Drives

Belt drives shall be 'V' belt type selected to match driving power multiplied by a service factor

of 1.5 and shall consist of not less than two matched belts.

Pulleys shall be keyed or fixed with keyed taper-lock bushes to shafts, have belt grooves

accurately profiled and smoothly finished and have a pitch circle diameter exceeding the

minimum recommended for the belts supplied.

Pulleys shall be accurately aligned and dynamically balanced to comply with the Specification

Section 'Noise and Vibration'.

Motors shall be mounted with provision for belt adjustment.

23.03.01.12 Guards

Removable guards shall be fitted over belts, couplings, exposed rotating or reciprocating parts

and other safety hazards.

Guards shall permit speed measurements taken with a tachometer at pulley shafts without

having to remove the guards.

23.03.01.13 Installation

Equipment shall be bolted down, installed plumb and level in the locations specified or shown

on the drawings.

All equipment shall be commissioned in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as well

as test operated in all possible modes and have any defects discovered made good to approval.

23.03.01.14 Lifting Lugs

Equipment shall be fitted with lifting lugs permitting it to be lifted as an assembly and

additional lugs for lifting any items which require periodic removal for servicing or

maintenance and exceed 50 kg in weight.

Lugs may be removable and if supplied separately shall be packed and labelled for easily

identified storage.

EQUIPMENT



The pressure requirements nominated for equipment detailed in the Schedules of Performance

are for tendering purposes only. The Mechanical Trade shall undertake a detailed analysis of

each system making due allowance for the resistance of all his selected equipment and allow for

these requirements in his tender.

23.03.02 GENERAL AIR HANDLING UNIT(AHU)

23.03.02.01 General

The air handling units shall be as manufactured by Carrier, Flakt, York, Trane or approved

equal.

The Contractor shall calculate the head and flow requirements for all AHUs based on actual

layouts as approved shop drawings and shall submit calculations for Engineer’s approval.

Quality Assurance

The equipment manufacturer shall strictly adhere to the following standards and specification:

. ISO 9001 certificate required.

. Equipment shall have Eurovent – Certificate, to be submitted by AHU manufacturer.

. Air handling unit manufacturer shall strictly adhere to CEN standards (Committee

European de Normalisation). Air handling units shall meet the Eurovent Certification

requirements of:-

- Casing strength to CLASS 2A

- Casing air leakage minus 400 Pa to CLASS A

- Casing air leakage plus 700 Pa to CLASS A

- Thermal transmittance CLASS T4

- Thermal bridge factor CLASS TB3

23.03.02.02 Casing

Unit Construction

The unit casings shall be of double skinned insulated panels 50mm thick in plantrooms 25mm

thick where located within the building. Casing shall be assembled with self supporting

modular panel elements with an integrated base frame made of zincated steel and sections along

upper sides of the units.

Sheet metal thickness for all units with fibre glass insulation shall be not less than 1.5mm for the

inner skin and 0.8mm for the outer skin and shall be made from zincated steel sheets or

anodised aluminium alloy construction. The outside of the outer skin shall be plastic coated to a

thickness of 0.15mm for additional protection. Inside and outside of panel walls shall be

complete smooth. The overall heat thermal transmittance (Heat Transfer Coefficient) shall not

exceed k=0.59 W/m2k.

The units with polyurethane injected foam insulation, the inner and outer panel thickness shall

not be less than 1.0mm.

All casing panels shall be insulated with glass fibre layer of 50mm thick or (pressure injected

foam insulation) incombustible with class of inflammability:

EQUIPMENT



. A1 in accordance to DIN 4102

. O in accordance to ISO 1182.2

The base frame of the units shall be made from sendzimir galvanised sheet metal for size with

largest dimensions up to 2500mm and hot dip galvanised U-profile for larger units. Service

doors shall be provided with special gasket and locking device. Access doors 400mm and larger

shall be provided with hinges and handles for external and internal opening.

Access doors with width smaller than 400mm shall be removable type fitted with quick release

flap turn lock with spring pressure arrangement. Sealant between panels shall be an anti-

fungicide sealant material.

All air handling units installed outdoors shall be fitted with aluminium weather canopy.

The AHU manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior of

panels. In the even that any condensation problems appear after installation, the Contractor

shall undertake all remedial measure to rectify and to the satisfaction of the consultants. Any

stacked or double height coils shall have separate drain pans to reduce carry over.

Acoustical insulation through the panel:

HZ MID FREQUENCY OCTAVE BAND

125

250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

14 25 28 27 29 31 34

23.03.02.03 Vibration Isolation

The air handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan, motor and

drive assembly on spring isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected to the air handling unit

casing through canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer. In addition to the above, the

entire unit shall be mounted on additional vibration isolators.

23.03.02.04 Filter Section

Filter cells shall be of standard sizes and shall be obtained from reputed European manufacturer.

The filters shall be sealed against the filter frame using a permanently elastic gasket to a

standard compatible with the filter efficiency.

Pressure drop tappings shall be fitted to allow manometer or filter monitor to be connected.

Filter materials shall be flame-retardant, incombustible, non-odorous and offer no sustenance to

vermin. Each filter section has to be provided with manometer.

Pre Filters (Panel Filter)

The pre-filter material shall be synthetic, pleated to provide a large effective area and shall be

supported by a wire mesh and galvanised metal frame. The filter cells shall be suitable for side

withdrawal on the inspection side. The filter class shall be G4 as per EN 779.

Bag Filters

Bag filters shall be high performance extended area disposable type filters Class F-9. The filter

media shall have an average efficiency of 95%. Each filter shall consist of high density glass

microfibre media with a chemically bonded backer, individual pockets and a corrosion resistant

galvanised steel enclosing frame. The filter unit shall be completely factory assembled and

shall be classified by underwriter’s laboratories.

EQUIPMENT



Pockets shall consist of glass micro fibres chemically bonded to a reinforced backing. They

shall be sewn with a tapered stitch which forms a ‘V’ or wedge shaped pocket resulting in

uniform velocity in the passages of the air entering and air exiting sides of the filter. The

pockets shall be equipped with a minimum of 40 support points per square foot f the filter

media.

All stitching points shall be complete sealed with foam seal or equivalent. The pockets shall be

chemically adhered around the periphery of the galvanised steel retainers. Retainers shall have

rolled edges to reduce possible cuts to media or lacerations to installers.

Enclosing frame shall be construction of ‘J’ return channel of galvanised steel.

HEPA Filters

The HEPA filters may not necessarily be located within the AHU, but elsewhere in the same

supply air system. The following requirements comply.

Each filter shall be individually tested and certified to have an efficiency not less than (99.99%)

when tested with 0.3 micron thermally generated particulates. Filter class shall be EU-13.

This test shall be run at the rated 25mm WG capacity of the filter with the upstream aerosol

concentration of 80 + 20 micrograms per litre. The test aerosol concentration of a mass median

particle size of 0.3 microns with less than 1% by mass under 0.12 or over 0.5 microns.

Filter shall be constructed of all glass water proof media. It shall have a minimum tensile

strength of 0.5Kg/cm of width and shall retain 50% of its tensile strength when folded flat upon

itself. Media shall be waterproof to withstand, with no water penetration at 500mm water

column raised at a rate of 300mm per minute.

Filter shall be factory constructed by pleating a continuous sheet of media into closely spaced

pleats with safe edge aluminium separators. The filter’s sealing system shall encapsulate the top

and bottom of the filter pack and frame joints in a completely leak tight manner. The adhesive

shall be a two (2) part urethan. The filter frame shall be all metal 16 gauge corrosion resistant

zinc coated steel which is capable of maintaining its structurally rigid shape without mechanical

fasteners such as bolts, screws or rivets.

Overall dimensions shall be correct to within –3mm, +0mm and squareness shall be within

3mm. Filters shall be supplied with closed cell neoprene gaskets.

Filters shall be UL certified or approved by an equal certification authority. Pressure drop

across all filters shall be monitored at the BMCS.

23.03.02.05 Fan Assembly

Fans shall be double inlet double width multiblade type. Forward curved bladed fan shall be

used for system up to 700Pa total static pressure and backward curved non overloading type for

above 700Pa total static pressure. Construction shall be of galvanised steel sheet, fan blades

shall be rivetted to the centre hub and outer rings. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft. Fan

wheels shall be painted with rust inhibiting primer. Fans shall be tested in accordance with

AMCA 300 – 85 and shall conform to DIN323, VDI2060 and ISO 1940/L. All fan wheels shall

be statically and dynamically balanced prior to fitting to air handlers. Fan scrolls shall be

constructed from the same material as the fan wheels. The fan assembly shall be rigidly

supported to the unit base frame by folded galvanised steel rolled steel angle. All fan shafts

shall be solid high carbon steel, fully sized throughout, the maximum rated fan rpm shall be

below the first critical fan shaft speed. Bearings shall be of the flange mounted, self-aligning

EQUIPMENT



grease lubricated ball type mounted on the outside of the unit casing and provided with

accessible lubricators, with a minimum 200,000 hour bearing life. All bearings shall be sized

with a minimum service factor of 4.

The factory furnished and installed motors shall be mounted inside the fan section.

Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on a common galvanised framework entirely isolated

from the unit by spring vibration mountings. The fan discharge shall be isolated from the casing

by an airtight flexible duct connection. Fans shall not exceed a maximum outlet velocity of

15 m/sec.

23.03.02.06 Chilled Water Cooling Coil

Coils shall be constructed with 16 mm OD copper tubes with aluminium ripple fins. Tubes

shall be arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to air flow. Fins shall have full drawn

collars to provide a continuous secondary surface cover over the entire tube length. Tubes shall

be expanded out to fins to provide continuous primary and secondary contact for maximum heat

transfer efficiency. Coils face velocities shall not exceed 2.5 m/s for cooling coils and 3.5 m/s

for heating coils. Where cooling and heating coils are required in the same unit the heating coil

face dimensions shall be the same as the cooling coil.

All coils shall be tested with 2100 kPa and designed to operate at 1600 kPa working pressure.

Coil performance duties shall match those shown in the schedules. All coils shall be arranged in

the air handler in a vertical position with the air passing horizontally through the coil to ensure

removal of the condensate from the coil. Where coil height (cooling) exceeds 1067 mm

multiple coils shall be used with intermediate drain trays between each coil. Coils shall be

sealed to the air handler casing to ensure no by-pass or air around the coil occurs. Coil headers

and distributors shall be contained within the air handler casing.

The coil shall be mounted on guide rails for side withdrawal.

23.03.02.07 Drain Tray

The drain tray shall be thermally separated from the casing and a positive deep gutter shall be

provided within the tray profile for the full width of the air handler with a positive fall to the

gutter and the drain tray connection. The drain tray shall be stainless steel grade SS-316 either

integrated in the insulated base or placed under the coil section. Drain trays shall have drain

connections to the service side.

23.03.02.08 Motor Mounting

Motors shall be mounted on an adjustable hinged galvanised sheet steel base plate of sufficient

strength not to distort under the weight and torque loading of the drive. The base plate shall be

such that easy adjustment of the belt tension can be obtained without misalignment of drive. All

air handlers are to be test run in the factory prior to delivery. Test readings on bearing panel

vibration and motor amp draw are to be recorded and supplied on request. A minimum of two

matched belts shall be fitted to all air handlers with a motor size greater than 1.1 kW. All

pulleys are to be secured to the shafts with taperlock bushes and shaft keys.

Belt guards or screen protection door in fan section shall be provided in accordance with CEN

Standards.

23.03.02.09 Motors

All fan motors shall be TEFC with minimum IP54 protection and located in the air stream.

Motors shall have adjustable slide rails and shall have adequate capacity to allow for speeds to

EQUIPMENT



be increased if necessary to provide air flow rates 10% more than the specified design air flow

rates against corresponding increases in system resistances. Thermistors shall be included in

windings for motors 11kW and larger.

The fan motor shall be suitable for operating 380V, 3Ph, 50Hz electrical power supply. The fan

motor shall be wired to the safety switch or connection box.

The fan and motor assembly shall be isolated from the casing by means of anti vibration

mountings selected to suit the speed of the fan and designed for 90% isolation.

23.03.02.10 Electric Heaters

Where electric heaters are provided within the AHU, they shall be factory installed. The

electric element shall be wired so it will not activate unless the AHU fan is running. The

element shall be controlled by thyristor and a manual reset over heating trip switch. The electric

heating coil shall be heavy construction of 304L stainless steel with absolute safety finned

tubes.

23.03.03 HYGIENIC TYPE AIR HANDLING UNITS (HAHU)

23.03.03.01 General

Hygienic type AHUs shall be installed to service all the hospital areas. The units shall be as

manufactured by Carrier, Flakt, York, Trane or equivalent. The unit capacity and sections detail

shall be as shown on drawing and schedules. The Contractor shall calculate the head and final

flow requirements for all AHUs, based on actual layouts as approved on ship drawings and shall

submit calculations for Engineer’s approval.

The unit must be specifically selected for use in hospitals.

The unit capacity and sections detail shall be as shown on drawings.

All equipment shall be covered by a report from a Specialist in Hospital Hygiene as suitability

to meet complete requirements of Hospital Hygiene.

23.03.03.02 Construction and Access to Components

Hygiene type AHUs generally shall be similar in construction to General AHUs listed under

earlier clauses, with the following exceptions:

. Hygienic type AHU components shall be capable of being easily removed through large

access doors. These doors shall have special rubber gaskets and aluminium handles with

position indicator.

. Doors shall open over the whole length of the section in order to allow the free flow of

disinfectant into the external drain (all sections shall be provided with such doors).

. The components inside the units shall be easily and safely accessible and removable by

one person. Access to all sections utilising simple manually operated hinged doors fitted

with quick release Cremorne bolting lock (espagnolette lock), except for coil section with

side connection removable panel with bakelite knobs and handles will be used. This

arrangement will facilitate the removal of all internal ports such as filters with pressure

seals, heating coils, moisture eliminator and splitters from silencer section, complete fan

assembly, etc.

EQUIPMENT



. The fan shall be flush mounted utilising special rubber connector to simplify removal of

complete motor and fan assembly for purpose of cleaning of unit. The fan and motor

shall be located on stainless steel assembly which can be slid out over stainless steel rails.

. Outside drain in the form of channel running the whole length of the unit shall be

provided to remove liquids used for disinfecting the unit.

. All internal surfaces of the air handling units shall be smooth. The units shall be double

skin construction with the inner skin of stainless steel Grade SS – 316. Also all internal

blanking plates, filter frames, etc. shall be made in stainless steel Grade SS - 316.

. Fan sections, filter sections shall be fitted with inspection ports and internal lighting

wired to external isolating switch.

. Coils shall be mounted on guide rails for side removal. Header connection shall be on

side with screwed flanges outside the units and easily removable side panels.

Coils shall be made with smaller face area than standard coil for facilitating removal and

cleaning of coil section.

. For silencers, the sound insulating material shall be moisture protected mineral wool.

. No material shall be used that encourages the growth of bacteria and fungi in the

presence of moisture.

. Units in this section should be covered by a report from a specialist in hospital hygiene as

to the suitability of these units to meet completely the requirements of hospital hygiene.

Units shall comply with DIN 1946 Part 4.

. Extended lube line for fan bearing will not be fitted.

. The AHU shall be controlled and monitored at the BMCS as indicated on the data point

schedule.

. Casing air leakage shall be Class B.

23.03.04 FAN COIL UNITS (FCU)

23.03.04.01 General

Fan coil units (FCU) shall be as manufactured by Carrier, Flakt, York, Trane or equivalent. The

capacity and selection details shall be as shown on drawings and schedules.

23.03.04.02 Construction

Units shall be complete with double skinned insulated casing panels 25mm thick filters(s),

chilled water coil(s), fan(s), motor(s), extended drain pan stainless steel Grade SS – 316 and all

required wiring, piping, controls and special features.

Horizontal base unit with plenum for concealed installation shall have a factory installed,

galvanised steel plenum section and throw away filter. The plenum shall be either bottom or

rear return, lined and include a removable panel to provide an access to the fan/motor assembly.

Horizontal cabinet unit for exposed installation shall be constructed of steel with champagne

beige re-coatable baked enamel finish. Cabinet shall be lined with 12mm thick glass fibre

EQUIPMENT



insulation and have removable bottom access panel. Unit shall include hinged bar type return

air grille on rear of unit with throwaway filter and integral double deflection supply grille.

Fans shall be direct driven, double width fan wheels shall have forward curved blades and be

statically and dynamically balanced.

Fan motors shall be 3-speed permanent split capacitor type with sleeve type bearings and over

sized oil reservoirs.

Standard base unit shall be equipped with a 4-row coil for installation in a 2-pipe system. Coils

shall have 12mm copper tubes, aluminium fins bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion

and have a working pressure of 16 bar. Each coil shall have a manual air vent and sweat

connections for copper tubes.

The drain pan shall be constructed of galvanised steel extending the entire length and width of

the coil(s) including below FCU control valve and isolating valve arrangement and pitched for

drainage. The inside surface of the drain pan shall be coated with closed cell fire retardant foam

insulation. An extension drain pan shall be provided for installation at the job site under the

valve package.

Unit manufacturers shall have ISO 9001 certification.

Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA-90A requirements for flame spread and smoke

generation. All equipment wiring shall comply with NEC requirements.

Unit capacity ratings shall be certified in compliance with industry Standard 441-66 for

equipment, testing and rating of fan coil air conditioners as administered at ARI Entire unit shall

be Underwriter’s Laboratory listed and comply with National Electric code. When units do not

have ARI certified ratings, the Contractor must perform capacity tests of the completed

installation which are witnessed by the Engineer, to confirm specified capacity is achieved

while not exceeding specified sound power levels.

Units shall be provided with 25mm thick throw away filters.

Control valves shall be modulating type two way.

For silencers, the sound insulating material shall be moisture protected mineral wood.

No materials shall be used that encourages the growth of bacteria and fungi in the presence of

moisture.

Units shall be monitored and controlled at the Building Management System.

23.03.05 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

23.03.05.01 General

The CRAC units shall be as manufactured by Liebert, Stultz or equivalent. The unit capacity

and selection details shall be as shown on drawings and schedules.

23.03.05.02 Precision Air Conditioning Systems

The computer room air conditioning equipment shall be designed specifically for precision

environmental control.

EQUIPMENT



The units shall produce not less than the capacities nominated at the specified conditions as

tabulated.

23.03.05.03 Cabinet Construction

The frame and panels shall be constructed of heavy gauge zinc-anneal corrosion resistant sheet

steel.

The fan section shall be insulated with a minimum of 25mm insulation fire rated to Australian

Standard 1530 (indices 0,0,0,3).

The cabinet shall be powder coated with Dulux “grey nurse” colour and have a textured finish.

23.03.05.04 Chilled Water Coil

The chilled water coil shall be constructed of copper tubes and louvred aluminium fins, with the

frame and drip trays fabricated from heavy gauge aluminium. The drip trays must be easily

removable for cleaning. The cooling coil shall be a maximum of 5 rows deep. The distance

between the fins should be not less than 1.8mm and the face velocity shall be not more than

2.5m/s.

23.03.05.05 Fans

The fans shall be of the forward curved centrifugal type, double width, double inlet and

statically and dynamically balanced. Each fan shall be directly driven by a multi-speed high

efficiency motor.

23.03.05.06 Floor Stands

Each unit shall come with its own floor stand. The stand shall be:

- Suitable for the weight of the unit such that it is in no way distorted when supporting the

unit.

- Be constructed such that it is readily integrated into the false floor.

- Have height adjustable legs (minimum 15mm adjustment) to provide some tolerance if

the floor level is slightly uneven.

23.03.05.07 Service Area

The unit shall be serviceable from the front only with a maximum service space required of

600mm.

23.03.05.08 2-Stage Operation

The unit shall be capable of providing 0%, 50% or 100% cooling capacity.

23.03.05.09 Filtration

Filtration shall be provided by dry media disposable filters capable of filtering air to 20%

efficiency (AS1324) and withdrawable form the unit front.

23.03.05.10 Controls

EQUIPMENT



The standard controls shall be a microprocessor based, programmable logic controller. The

controls shall have separate indication of operating modes (cooling, heating, humidifying and

dehumidifying), alarm conditions for both units (high temp. alarm, low temp. alarm, high

humidity alarm, a/c units not operating, underfloor water detection), and numerical displays for

temperature and relative humidity. The display and indication shall be visible on the front

without removing any external panels. Local and remote alarms will be triggered if an alarm

condition is reached.

23.03.06 AXIAL FANS - DIRECT DRIVE

23.03.06.01 General

Axial fans shall be as manufactured by Woods, Nuaire or equivalent. The unit capacity and

selection details shall be as shown on drawings and schedules. The Contractor shall calculate

the head and flow requirement for all fans based on actual layout as approved shop drawings

and shall submit calculations for Engineer’s approval.

All fans shall be selected for maximum static efficiency and quiet operation. Each fan shall

have a minimum stable operating range exceeding plus or minus 20% from the design air

volume and estimated static point on the performance curve.

Fan tests and performance curves shall be in accordance with BSS-848. All performance

information shall be based on such tests.

Each fan impeller shall be fitted with its final drive pulley and then statically and dynamically

balanced at the manufacturer’s works at design speed. Any fan which is assembled at the site

shall be rebalanced after assembly.

All fans shall be designed, particularly in regard to critical shaft speeds, rotor design, bearing

selection V-belt drive selection and motor rating, to allow fan speeds to be increased to provide

air flow rates 10% more than the specified design air flow rates against the corresponding

increased system resistances.

All fans are to be mounted on or from vibration isolators. All ductwork connected to the fans

shall be attached via flexible canvas connections ensuring that no vibration is transmitted to the

structure, building or any associated ductwork and fittings.

Fan motors shall be provided with grease packed ball or ball and roller bearings designed for a

calculated life of 100,000 hours under the particular duty of the fan. Dust seals shall be

provided for all bearings. Low pressure, dustproof, grease caps to an accessible location shall

be provided on all bearings.

Motors shall be of the type, minimum horsepower and current characteristics specified. All fan

motors shall be capable of handling 10% more air than that specified against the increased

system resistance.

Non-overloading aerofoil fans shall be adjustable pitchcast aluminium alloy impellers or may

have adjustable pitch polypropylene impellers on fans up to 300mm diameter. All impellers

shall be statically and dynamically balanced and Certificate shall be forwarded.

Non-overloading aerofoil fans shall be fitted with inlet and/or outlet cones where shown on the

drawings and where required for satisfactory operation.

All axial fans shall be as manufactured by Fantech or approved equivalent.

EQUIPMENT




Fan motors shall be provided with grease packed close tolerance ball bearings designed for quiet

operation and a calculated life of 100,000 hours under the particular duty of the fan. Dust seals

shall be provided for all bearings. All bearings shall be fitted in housings that are provided with

identical grease nipples equal to Tecalamit type H. The grease nipples shall be located in

accessible positions and piped to the bearing housings.

23.03.06.03 Motors

Motor frame sizes and shapes shall be the same as those used by the manufacturer as a basis for

the catalogued air quantity and noise level data.

Each motor shall be of the type, minimum kW rating and current characteristics as specified in

the Motors and Starters Schedule. All fan motors shall be capable of delivering 10% more air

through the system than the quantity specified.

23.03.06.04 Impellers

Each fan shall have an aerofoil blade impeller and the blade pitch shall be readily and accurately

adjustable on site. All impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Certification of

balance shall be forwarded to the Engineer. The fan design shall be such that the adjustment of

the blade pitch on site shall not affect the static or dynamic balance.

23.03.06.05 Casings and Assembly

Each fan shall have a flanged casing extending for the length of the fan and motor (unless

specified or shown otherwise), complete with one or more airtight access doors suitably placed

for easy fan inspection. Fans 300mm diameter or less may have casings without access doors.

Each fan shall be fitted with inlet and/or outlet cones as shown on the drawings and these cones

where required shall be as supplied by the fan manufacturer. Open fan intakes and discharges

shall have heavy gauge galvanised wire mesh guards fitted.

Each guard shall be easily removable for access and shall be designed to prevent accidental

contact with moving parts under the full weight of a man. The guards shall be as supplied by

the fan manufacturer. Each fan assembly shall be supported by vibration isolators.

23.03.06.06 Factory Finish

Each fan shall be painted throughout with one coat of red lead and two finishing coats of grey

enamel.

23.03.07 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

23.03.07.01 General

Centrifugal fans shall be as manufactured by Woods Heliers Ventilation or equivalent. The unit

capacity and selection details shall be as shown on drawings and schedules. The Contract shall

calculate the head and flow requirements for all fans based on actual layout as approved shop

drawings and shall submit calculations for Engineer’s report.

23.03.07.02 Performance and Type

Each fan shall deliver the air quantity specified in the Fan Schedule against the resistance of the

installed system. Each fan shall be of either the S.I.S.W. or D.I.D.W. type as noted in the

EQUIPMENT



schedule and shall have angle of discharge as shown on the drawings. Each belt driven, single

inlet fan shall have an overhung impeller with the bearings accessible from the drive end similar

to arrangement 1. Each impeller shall be non-loading, backward curved flat blade type (or

backward curved aerofoil blade type) unless indicated in the Fan Schedule to be a forward

curved (F.C.) multivane type.


Each fan shall be provided with double row bearings designed for a calculated life of 100,000

hours under the particular duty of the fan. Dust seals shall be provided for all bearings. All

bearings shall be of the self-aligning spherical roller type where the wheel shaft diameter is

30mm or larger. Self-aligning ball bearings shall be provided where the wheel shafts are

smaller than 30mm diameter. All bearings, whether similar to those manufactured by S.K.F.

Ball Bearing Co Ltd. Housings with external mechanical grease valve fittings shall not be

acceptable and all bearing housings shall be fitted with identical grease nipples equal to

Tecalamit type H. The bearing housings shall be dowelled to the bearing support members in

the factory after test running of each fan.

23.03.07.04 Drives

Fans shall be belt driven by a minimum of two V-belts except where direct driven fans are

specified. Belts shall be sized for a minimum of 125% of the motor kW rating and shall be

sufficient to transmit the starting torque of the motor without slip. "A" section belts may be

used on motors up to 1.5kW. "B" section belts shall be used above 1.5kW. Belt sections shall

be in accordance with AS 2784. All vee belt pulleys shall be keyed to the shaft. Tapered bush

pulleys are preferred. Motor slide rails of an approved type shall be provided for easy

tensioning of belts as required.

23.03.07.05 Motors

Motors shall have a minimum kW rating as nominated in the Fan Schedule. Motor ratings are

nominated as a basis for tendering only and shall be checked before ordering to ensure that they

are sufficient for the duty. All fan motors shall be selected of sufficient kW rating to delivering

10% more air through the system than the quantity specified. Motors shall comply with all

requirements specified under ELECTRICAL.

23.03.07.06 Guards

A belt guard shall be fitted on each belt driven fan. S.W.S.I. fan drives shall be fitted with a

rigid sheetmetal belt guard. D.W.D.I. fan guards shall be similar but shall have sides of 1.6mm

x 18mm flattened expanded metal or 12mm x 1.6mm diameter woven wire mesh screens. The

fixed section of the belt guard shall be bolted to the fan scroll, pedestal or baseplate. The

removable section shall be screwed to the fixed section with hexagonal headed machine screws.

Self tapping screws will not be accepted. Accessible fan inlets and discharges shall be fitted

with wire mesh guards to the Engineer's approval. All guards shall be easily removable for

service and shall be designed for minimum restriction to air flow.

23.03.07.07 Assembly and Mounting

Where spring vibration isolators are specified in the schedule for a particular fan, the motor, fan

and drive shall be mounted on a rigid integral steel chassis and the whole assembly supported on

the spring isolators. No flexing of the chassis frame between motor and fan will be permitted.

Where rubber vibration isolators are specified, the motor may be mounted on the fan in a

manner approved by the Engineer and the entire assembly supported on the isolators. Vibration

isolators shall be sized for the deflections indicated in the Schedule. Spring isolators shall be

mounted on rubber pads and when loaded shall have a length approximately equal to their

EQUIPMENT



diameter. When installing fans on site, each support point shall be carefully shimmed to ensure

that the fan housings are not distorted. All fan wheel and shaft assemblies shall be statically and

dynamically balanced. Certification of balance shall be forwarded to the Engineer.

All fans having an impeller with a diameter greater than 1,200mm shall have a horizontally split

casing.

The air inlet/s shall b fully streamlined for minimal resistance with removable inlet ‘bells’.

Motorised inlet guide vanes shall be provided where scheduled.

The fan scroll shall be manufactured from heavy gauge sheet steel with reinforcement where

necessary, to achieve structural rigidity and prevent drumming and vibration during operation.

The fan impeller shall be constructed of steel, designed and constructed to withstand centrifugal

forces of rotational speeds at least 20% in excess of the duty specified.

The relative shapes and clearances between fan inlet bells and impeller shall be similar to the

tested prototype on which the manufacturer's ratings are based.

23.03.08 IN LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

In line centrifugal fans shall be Woods, Nuaire or equivalent.

Fans shall deliver air quantities specified against the resistance of the system as installed.

Fans shall be selected to ensure noise levels specified are not exceeded.

Each fan shall be provided with self-aligning ball bearings, sealed for life, or with accessible

grease nipples, designed for a calculated life of 100,000 hours under the particular duty of the

fan.

Impellers shall be backward curved centrifugal design and driven by speed controllable external

rotor motors with integral thermal protection.

Units shall incorporate soundless four-step speed control, enabling direct connection to any one

of the four speeds.

Fans shall be mounted on anti-vibration isolators to 95% efficiency.

23.03.09 PROPELLER FANS

All fans shall be as manufactured by Woods, Nuaire or equivalent. Each fan shall be a

resiliently mounted, direct driven propeller fan and shall deliver the air quantity specified in the

Fan Schedule against the resistance of its system.

The overall sound power level of the fan shall not exceed the level nominated in the Fan

Schedule at the specified duty. Where the fan noise level is not specified then the overall sound

power level shall not exceed the duty. Where the fan noise level is not specified then the overall

sound power level shall not exceed the level nominated in the manufacturer's catalogue data at

the specified duty.

Each fan impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall be driven by a totally

enclosed motor that satisfies the minimum power and current requirement as specified in the

Motors and Starters Schedule.

EQUIPMENT



All bearings shall be provided with dust seals and where grease nipples are provided they shall

be Tecalamit type H.

The fan and motor shall be isolated from the mountings by rubber isolators.

The fan and all its components and fixing shall be made from corrosion resistance materials or

provided with a suitable corrosion resistant finish.

23.03.10 SILENCERS - ACOUSTIC ATTENUATORS

23.03.10.01 General

Packaged type sound silencers shall be to size, numbers, length, location and type as shown on

drawings and listed in the Schedule of Performance to provide the necessary attenuation and

shall not exceed the pressure drops specified for the air quantity handled.

23.03.10.02 Silencers - Duct Mounted Type

The silencers shall be as manufactured by Gulf Acoustic or equivalent.

Each silencer shall comprise a galvanised steel case with internal sound absorbing panels. Each

panel shall consist of a fibreglass high density rockwool fill retained with fire proof fibreglass

scrim encased in a 0.6mm thick perforated galvanised steel casing. The case shall be made from

not less than 1.6mm thick galvanised steel with continuous welded or grooved seams and with

galvanised angle iron frames at each end fixed to the case. The case shall be suitably braced so

as to be completely airtight and free from drumming or distortion at all pressures up to 1.25 kPa.

Matching angle frames shall be supplied and shall be jig drilled so as to be interchangeable.

The casing and cells shall have a smooth, non moisture absorbent finish, with all edges neatly

butted. Raw edges, fixing straps or screws are not to protrude into the air stream.

Silencers selected shall have cross sectional dimensions as near as possible to the ducts to which

they join.

23.03.11 FILTERS

23.03.11.01 General

Air filters shall be installed where shown on the drawings and shall be of the types as scheduled.

Each filter shall be sized capable of handling the scheduled air quantity at the maximum

effective face velocity specified and its performance characteristics shall meet the requirements

specified hereafter for the scheduled filter type.

All filters and components shall be readily available in Dubai and shall be manufactured by

AAF or equivalent.

Filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE Chapter 7 as appropriate and prototypes

shall have been tested by a NATA registered laboratory.

Filters shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations complete with all

accessories necessary for their proper performance. All filter connections to adjoining

EQUIPMENT



equipment, panelling or support framing shall be sealed airtight to prevent any air by-passing

the filter media.

Adequate access shall be provided to each filter for inspection and maintenance (and removal if

applicable).

Filter sizes where nominated in the schedule have been used on the drawings to indicate the

connecting sizes of the adjoining equipment, ductwork or apparatus housing. Make any

adjustment to accommodate filters sized differently to those scheduled.

23.03.11.02 Dry Media Filters - Deep Bed Type, Medium Efficiency

When tested in accordance with ASHRAE test dust numbers 1 and 4 each filter cell shall have a

clean resistance of 42 Pa, an initial arrestance efficiency of not less than 23% to no.1 test dust

and 90% average efficiency to no. 4 dust and no. 4 dust holding capacity at final resistance of

1200g at 125Pa. Certified test results by a NATA registered laboratory for the above test shall

be required to be produced before a filter will be accepted.

The filter media shall be mounted on a supporting frame of minimum 3.2mm wire which shall

clip into a steel holding frame to provide a positive seal with no air by-pass. The holding

frames shall be of minimum 1.2mm steel and shall be bolted together with a non-hardening

mastic bead or neoprene gasket applied between frames to form an airtight seal. Where

necessary to form a rigid assembly of holding frames, intermediate channel stiffeners shall be

installed. The entire assembly shall be sealed to prevent any air by-passing the filter media.

The steel holding frame and wire supporting frames shall be either hot dipped galvanised, epoxy

coated or given a high quality enamelled paint finish after proper etch priming.

A pressure gauge of approved design and with suitable scale range shall be installed on the

outside of each conditioner housing at the filter bank to indicate filter air resistance.

23.03.11.03 Dry Media Filters - Dry Media, Panel Type

Filters shall be fixed panel filter.

When tested in accordance with ASHRAE standard test dust numbers 2 and 4 each filter cell

shall have an initial arrestance efficiency of not less than 80% to no.2 test dust and 73% average

efficiency to no. 4 dust and a minimum dust holding capacity of 133 grams per 595 x 595 cell at

an initial resistance of 51Pa, final resistance of 177Pa when tested at 2.54 m/s face velocity.

Certified test results by a NATA registered laboratory for the above test shall be required to be

produced before a filter will be accepted

The filter media shall be mounted in a mounting frame of welded aluminium which shall clip

into a steel holding frame to provide a positive seal with no air by-pass. The holding frames

shall be of minimum 1.2mm steel and shall be bolted together with a non-hardening mastic bead

or neoprene gasket applied between frames to form an airtight seal. Where necessary to form a

rigid assembly of holding frames, intermediate channel stiffeners shall be installed. The entire

assembly shall be sealed to prevent any air by-passing the filter media.

The steel holding frame and wire supporting frames shall be either hot dipped galvanised, epoxy

coated or given a high quality enamelled paint finish after proper etch priming.

23.03.11.04 Panel Filters - Grease Type

Filters to be as manufactured by AAF or equivalent. At rated capacity the filter has an average

efficiency of 90% to the ASH and AE method of test.

EQUIPMENT



The filter media consists of a 50mm thick honeycomb of specially corrugated light gauge

aluminium sheet enclosed in an aluminium frame.

The filter must always be installed with its face at no more than 30° from the vertical to

minimise the possibility of grease dripping off the filter face.

Grease filters must be cleaned regularly to minimise the possibility of collected grease dropping

back in semi-liquid form off the cell. Cleaners containing caustic must not be used as they will

attack the aluminium from which the unit is made.

23.03.11.05 Absolute Filters – HGPA Filter Module

Filters to be as manufactured by AAF or equivalent.

Filter modules shall be manufactured to conform with ASHRAE standard. Modules shall be

tested by a NATA registered laboratory and the manufacturer shall provide a certificate showing

test results for the purpose of establishing compliance with ASHRAE standard. Filter modules

shall be individually tested by a NATA registered laboratory and filtering medium shall

conform with US MIL Standard 510790.

Absolute filter panels shall be capable of meeting (Class 350 air cleanliness).

The filter modules shall comprise an absolute filter housed in an attractively styled cabinet. The

combination shall ensure the effective removal of airborne contamination from air drawn in by

air conditioning system and passed through the filter to the working environment.

Construction of the filter shall be of zimcseal steel finished with white enamel.

The absolute filter shall carry the standard mark of Standards Australia certifying strict

conformity with ASHRAE standard. The filtering media should be pleated into separators. The

media pack is sealed to a sturdy metal frame with polyurethane foam.

23.03.12 ROOM PRESSURE STABILISATION MONITORING

Room pressure monitors shall be provided in operating theatres and in areas as indicated on

drawings to maintain positive and/or negative pressures within the relevant areas. The unit shall

have pressure sensor inside and outside the room to measure pressure difference and enable the

operation of the pressure stabilisation motorised dampers. The unit shall have temperature and

humidity sensor and the following features:

. The system could be activated for a desired mode (positive or negative) by a simple

switch.

. Display room pressurisation, temperature, pressure, humidity level and alarm conditions.

. Where indicated on drawings, this should be able to control air flow through the pressure

by-pass transfer duct to maintain the desired pressure.

. Shall be interfaced with the BMCS.

23.03.13 ELECTRIC MOTORS

EQUIPMENT



Unless otherwise specified in the equipment specifications, all motors supplied and installed as

a part of mechanical works shall confirm to the following requirements:

. Motors shall be of high efficiency and shall be constructed and type tested in compliance

with relevant sections of BS. 4999 and BS. 5000. These shall be of totally enclosed fan

cooled (TEFC) type to IP54 either with foot-mounting or flange-mounting suitable for its

application. Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be designed for continuous running

duty type S1 for operation during 3 years without maintenance. They shall be of such

size as to drive adequately their associated equipment under the range of operating

conditions, without overloading.

Windings shall be insulated with Class F insulation material to BS. 2757 and temperature rise of

windings shall be Class B.

23.03.14 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

23.03.14.01 General

Diffusers, registers, grilles and other air terminal fittings shall be of the types, sizes, numbers

and positions as shown on the drawings and/or specified hereafter, for all air conditioning and

ventilation systems. The terminal fittings shall be as manufactured by Trox, Air Master or

equivalent.

The ceiling arrangement and type of tiles and suspension system, including type of air terminal

fitting shall be checked with the Engineer prior to ordering of equipment.

Diffusers shall be 1-way, 2-way, 3-way or 4-way blow as indicated on the plans and shall have

the necessary louvred core styles to give required direction of blow as shown on drawings and

draftless air distribution without the introduction of noise.

Volume control dampers shall be provided for all diffusers, registers and grilles.

Single blade stream splitter type volume controls shall be provided at the duct branch takeoffs to

individual outlets in which case VCD and/or OBD throttling dampers are not required behind

the outlet.

Multiblade VCD stream splitter volume controls shall be provided behind registers mounted on

the side of ductwork and at spigot takeoffs from duct branches serving more than one outlet.

OBD volume dampers shall be provided behind all return air and exhaust air grilles to regulate

the air flow over the face of the grille. Diffusers or registers which do not have multiblade VCD

dampers, and which have spigot connections between the duct and the outlet or less length than

the larger neck dimension of the diffuser or register, shall be fitted with equalising deflection

grids to ensure even air distribution from the outlet.

All volume controls where mounted behind grilles, registers and diffusers, together with any

visible ductwork or insulation shall be finished in matt black paint.

VCD and OBD dampers shall have blades linked together in sections for ganged operation from

adjusting screws. Where VCD or OBD dampers are mounted on the back of outlets or grilles

the screw shall be accessible through the blades of the outlet. Where the VCD or OBD is

mounted in the duct spigot back from the outlet, then the screw adjustment shall be accessible

through the removable core of the diffuser or by removing the register or grille.

EQUIPMENT



VCD dampers shall give volume control and even air distribution over the full face of the outlet

without the introduction of noise.

VCD dampers shall have a sheetmetal frame enclosure around the blades to give reasonably

robust construction and to ensure all the air diverted by the blades is directed through the outlet.

23.03.14.02 Ceiling Diffusers - Linear Slot

Linear slot diffusers shall be manufactured from extruded aluminium and/or pressed steel and

finished in baked enamel to a colour to be advised by the Architect. All diffusers shall have

directional control and volume control devices, accessible through the face.

23.03.14.03 Ceiling Diffusers - Louvre Face

Ceiling diffusers shall be manufactured from extruded aluminium and/or pressed steel and

finished in baked enamel to a colour to be advised by the Architect. All diffusers shall have a

removable core.

Ceiling diffusers, where shown on the drawings for air conditioning or ventilation supply air

shall be the types such that the border frame fits the ceiling tile/suspension system.

23.03.14.04 Registers (Universal Type - Aluminium)

All universal type registers shall be of aluminium and/or steel construction and shall have two

sets of vanes adjustable in the horizontal or vertical planes and shall be designed to give a

satisfactory distribution of air without the introduction of noise. A sponge rubber gasket shall

be supplied around the frame of each register. The front set of vanes of each register shall be

horizontal and the spacing of the horizontal and vertical blades shall not exceed 18mm. The

vanes shall have an aerofoil shape. The registers shall be finished in baked enamel to a colour

to be selected by the Architect.

The register frame and core shall be such that no screw heads are visible on the face of the grille

after fixing.

23.03.14.05 Return Air Grilles - Wall Mounted (Visible one side only)

Wall mounted return air grilles shall have a minimum 60% free area.

Grilles shall have extruded aluminium blades and frames and shall be provided with a baked

enamel finish to a colour nominated by the Architect.

23.03.14.06 Return Air Grilles - Door or Wall Mounted (Visible from both sides)

Door or wall mounted grilles visible on both sides shall constructed with extruded aluminium

inverted vee sight proof horizontal blades and extruded aluminium border frame fitting both

front and back of the door or wall.

Grilles shall have a free area of not less than 60% and shall be provided with baked enamel

finish to a colour nominated by the Architect.

23.03.14.07 Ceiling Mounted Return Air and Exhaust Grilles

Grilles shall be of all aluminium construction and shall be supplied in baked enamel finish in a

colour selected by the Architect. The louvres shall form a 12mm x 12mm grid and shall be

12mm deep. The grille frame and core shall be such that no screw heads are visible on the face

of the grille after fixing.

EQUIPMENT



23.03.14.08 Car Park Supply and Exhaust Grilles

Car park supply and exhaust grilles shall be linear bar grilles with integral volume control

damper. Grilles shall be of sturdy aluminium construction. The grilles shall be finished in a

baked enamel to a colour to be selected by the Architect.

23.03.14.09 Exhaust Air Louvres

Louvres shall be extruded aluminium frame with aluminium blades of not less than 2mm

thickness and shall be firmly fixed so as not to vibrate. Unsupported blade width shall not

exceed 1800mm.

Behind each louvre shall be an insect mesh screen 76 x 6mm made from 2mm diameter wire.

The screen will be clamped by a 20mm frame and will be firmly fixed to the outer edges of the

louvre. The screen and frame shall be hot dip galvanised after fabrication.

The connection to the louvre shall be flexible and shall ensure no duct load is transmitted to the

louvre.

Louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the Architect.

23.03.14.10 Sand Trap Louvre for Air Intake

Sand trap louvres shall have a double deflection inlet passage to separate sand from incoming

air by means of centrifugal forces.

Separation efficiency particle size 350-700 shall not be less than 90% at a face velocity of

1M/Sec and not less than 70% at a face velocity of 2M/sec.

Sand trap louvre shall be of aluminium construction, self cleaning and maintenance free. The

base of the louvre shall have self-emptying sand holes.

Pressure drop at 2M/sec average face velocity shall not exceed 120 pascals.

Insect mesh shall be included.

Sand louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the Architect.

23.03.14.11 Birdscreens

12mm x 12mm x 1.6mm diameter galvanised woven mesh or weld mesh birdscreens in rigid

galvanised iron frames shall be installed behind all external louvres and over all relief and

exhaust air openings to outside of the building.

23.03.15 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS

23.03.15.01 General

Heaters shall have the elements mounted on a galvanised steel terminal box, for insertion into a

rectangular hole in the one side of the duct and shall be arranged so as to evenly heat the air

without unduly restricting the air flow. The elements shall be equally balanced over three

phases and shall give the capacities, not less than that tabled in the Electric Duct Heater

Schedule. (Standard sized elements shall only be used.) The number of steps required is listed

in the Schedule.

EQUIPMENT



The complete heating section shall be easily removable from the duct. Power supply to each

heater shall be interlocked with the appropriate fan motor starter, such that the heater cannot

operate unless the fan motor is energised.

Wiring connections to heater element terminals shall be made in heat resistant insulated cabling

taken to a terminal strip mounted on insulating material and located clear of hot surfaces.

A duct safety thermostat with manual reset, shall be fitted in the duct adjacent to each heater as

a protection against overheating in the duct. If the temperature exceeds 120°C the interface with

the power supply shall shut down the elements within two (2) minutes after failure of the air

supply.

Where reset is inaccessible a reset facility is to be provided to enable easy reset of safety

thermostat.

An air supply failure switch shall be installed in the distribution system to interrupt the electrical

power supply to the heater when air flow through the duct heater ceases.

The thermally insulated case shall have a co-efficient of heat transfer not greater than 30 W/m²K

at 100oC, such as Kaowool board or approved equal to a distance of 300mm on either side.

23.03.16 OPEN TYPE EXPANSION TANKS

Feed and expansion tanks for chilled water systems shall be fabricated from 1mm thick copper

having a water expansion capacity to suit 5% of the system capacity without making up water or

overflowing. As an alternative PVC may be offered in lieu of copper.

Tank shall be complete with ball float valve for water make-up purposes, isolating stopcock on

make-up line and quick fill, overflow lines and drain lines as shown on schematic drawings.

Tanks shall be mounted at high level with a drip tray manufactured from 1mm thick copper with

a 100mm high reinforced upturn edge and 25mm dia. drain. The tank shall be supported via

75mm x 25mm galvanised steel channels.

The mounting height of the tank shall be such that its lowest operating level provides a static

head to the pump suction greater than the frictional losses between the tank and the pump and in

any case shall be not less than 600mm above the highest level of the reticulation system.

Ball float shall be adjusted to prevent overflow when expansion takes place.

Tanks shall be covered with a light gauge copper coned cover with breather holes and handles.

Ball valve used in tanks shall provide a constant level, shall be brass with extended cast brass

lever and copper or stainless steel ball and shall comply with the requirements of the Local

Water Supply Authority.

Stop cocks used on cold water make-up lines shall comply with the requirements of the local

Water Supply Authority.

23.03.17 CHILLED WATER PUMPS

23.03.17.01 General

EQUIPMENT



Chilled water pumps shall be as manufactured by Pullen, Holden and Brook, Armstrong or

equivalent.

The Contractor shall calculate the head and flow requirements for all pumps, based on actual

layouts as approved on shop drawings and shall submit calculations for Engineer’s approval.

Pumps shall be end suction or horizontal split casing type as shown on drawings and schedules.

The efficiency of the pumps shall be a minimum 80%.

Pumps shall comply with the Specification Sections "Equipment General", "Noise and

Vibration", "Corrosion Protection and Painting" and " Commissioning and Testing".

23.03.17.02 Materials

Materials to be used shall be:

Casing: Cast iron

Impeller: Bronze

Shaft: Stainless steel shall be 416 grade or equivalent.

23.03.17.03 Drives

Pumps shall be direct driven through flexible couplings by electric motors complying with the

Specification Section "Electrical".

Pumps shall be mounted on base as specified.

Pumps shall:

- be of the 'Back Pull' design;

- be supplied, complete with spacer coupling, so that the impeller and shaft can be removed

as a unit without disturbing pipe connections;

- have flanged connections;

- have a maximum speed of 24 rps or 48 rps as stated in the Pump Schedule.

Casings shall:

- be vertically split;

- have top horizontal or vertical discharge as shown on drawing;

- have replaceable wearing rings.

Impellers shall:

- be of the shrouded type;

- be fitted with replaceable wearing collars which run inside the casing wearing rings;

- be keyed and locked to the shaft.

EQUIPMENT



Shafts shall be fitted with replaceable bronze or stainless steel gland sleeves and water throw

rings.

Shaft seals shall be stuffing boxes packed with graphite impregnated fibre rings and liquid

sealed. The lantern ring shall be of bronze or approved plastic.

Two (2) rolling element bearings shall be provided.

23.03.17.04 Motor and Impeller

The motor shall be sized to operate continuously without exceeding the horsepower rating

regardless of the flow and head throughout the entire range of operation. Motors shall be TEFC,

1450 RPM. Windings shall have Class ‘F’ insulation and shall have thermistors in wingdings to

protect against excessive temperature rise. Motors shall be from Europe. Motors shall be

selected for the pumps to operate at any point of the pump curve.

The selected pumps shall have provision for site installing the next larger sized impeller without

having to upgrade the motor.

23.03.17.05 Seals

The mechanical seals shall be filtered discharge pressure water lubricated based on the pressure,

temperature and liquid being pumped, complete with brass housing bellows and seal gaskets,

stainless steel spring and be of carbon ceramic design.

23.03.18 VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS

The secondary chilled water pumps units shall be variable speed systems. The pumping system

shall include as a minimum, the programmable controller, adjustable frequency drives, remote

sensors, motors and pumps.

The pump manufacture shall take “Unit Responsibility” for the successful operation of the

system supplied by him.

The pump manufacturer shall supply the complete variable speed system and shall have a

minimum of ten years experience with variable speed pumping systems.

At the time of submittal for approval, the pump manufacturer shall provide a complete system

profile analysis which shall include as a minimum the pumps performance (variable speed pump

curves) and the operating characteristics in the system (system curve).

This system profile analysis shall include pump motor and adjustable frequency drive

efficiencies, load profile, staging points, horsepower and kilowatt / hour draw.

The pump manufacture shall supply and be responsible for the operation of a programmable

solid state variable speed pump controller. The controller shall prevent hunting. An internal

P.I.D or proportional, integral, derivative controller shall be furnished.

The controller shall control pump speed in response to one (1) remote set point sensor analogue

input. The set point shall be re-setable by the operator through keypad entry.

The variable speed pump controller shall be capable of performing diagnostics to verify sensor

input on the readout device.

EQUIPMENT



The readout device shall incorporate alpha/numeric ½ inch display in bright LED or fluorescent

characters. Operator interphase shall be through a sealed membrane type keypad. Operator

access shall be protected with key lock security to allow only authorised program changes.

Two-way communications from the building management system, host computer or monitor

shall be available, with standard terminal hook-up type RS232/422. Two-way communications

shall allow for remote adjustment of set point and remote readout of all display messages and

operating registers.

23.03.19 COILS (RUN AROUND AND COOLING)

Coils shall be constructed with 12mm OD copper tubes with aluminium ripple fins. Tubes shall

be arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to air flow. Fins shall have full drawn collars to

provide a continuous secondary surface cover over the entire tube length. Tubes shall be

expanded out to finds to provide continuous primary and secondary contact for maximum heat

transfer efficiency. Coils face velocities shall not exceed 2.5 m/s for run-around coils and for

cooling coils as well. Coil water pressure drops shall not exceed 25kPa, no device shall be used

inside the tubes to create turbulence and/or higher pressure drop.

All coils shall be tested with 1600 kPa air under 70°C water and guaranteed for 1050kPa

working pressure. Coil performance duties shall match those shown in the schedules.

Run-around coils shall be arranged in the ductwork in a vertical position with the air passing

horizontally through the coil to ensure removal of the condensate from the coil.

Where coil height exceeds 1067mm, multiple coils shall be used with intermediate drain trays

between each coil. Coils shall be sealed to the ductwork to ensure no by-pass of air around the

coil occurs. Coil headers and distributors shall be contained within the air handler casing.

Each run around coil system to include heat recovery coil, cooling coil, pump, water make-up

tank, insulated pipework, valves and fittings.

23.03.20 EMERGENCY AIR COOLED SCREW CHILLER

The air cooled chiller shall be as manufactured by Carrier, York, Trane or equivalent.

This chiller shall operate at times when the EMPOWER district coding system has failed.

Supply and install where indicated air cooled water chillers with screw compressors having

capacity not less than that scheduled, when rated at 14.5 to 5.5°C water temperatures and at

50°C ambient. The water pressure drop shall not exceed 48 kilopascals.

The unit shall operate on 380 volts, 50 Hertz, 3 phase electrical service.

The unit shall be completely factory assembled on a rugged channel steel base and be

individually performance tested at full and part load conditions. The unit shall be leak tested

and shipped with a full operating charge of refrigerant R134a environment friendly.

Construction and ratings shall be in accordance with the latest ARI Standard 590 and shall

comply with ANSI B 9.1 Safety Code, National Electrical Code and ASME Code of the USA.

Unit ratings shall be in both imperial and metric systems.

Unit casing and all structural member shall be fabricated of continuous galvanised steel and

rugged steel channel. Exterior casing shall be painted with a baked enamel finish minimum of

150 Microne.

EQUIPMENT



Screw compressors shall be accessible hermetic, direct drive, 2950 RPM. Bearing groups at

each end of rotors shall be separately housed with pressure lubricated rolling elements.

Capacity control shall be fully modulating by use of a slide valve in the rotor section of the

compressors positioned by hydraulic action. Fitments included shall be suction and discharge

service valves and pressure gauges, removable core filter dryer, sight glass with moisture

indicator, and oil strainer.

Compressor motors shall be refrigerant gas cooled, high torque, hermetic induction type with

inherent thermal protection in all three phases. Compressors shall be mounted on anti-vibration

spring isolators to minimise noise vibration transmission.

Cooler shall be direct expansion type with carbon steel barrel, water baffles and internally

finned copper through-tubes roll expanded into heave carbon steel tube sheets. The cooler shall

be constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Code (or equal) requirements,

with a refrigerant side rating of 1550 KPa and a water side rating of min. 1550 KPa and a water

side rating of min. 1035 KPa.

The condenser coil shall be constructed of min. 3/8” (9.5mm) O.D seamless copper tubes

mechanically expanded into plate type aluminium fins. Distance between two (2) fins shall not

be less than 2mm. Entire condenser coil must be factory tested for leaks at min. 3100 KPa. All

fins shall be with full drawn collars. A sub cooling coil shall be an integral part of the main

condenser coil.

Condenser fans shall be propeller type arranged for vertical discharge. The fans shall be direct

drive by separate fan motors. Fan blades shall be aluminium construction statically and

dynamically balanced. Each fan shall be protected by a heavy duty fan Class-F insulation

designed for high ambient temperature operation without sacrificing any reduction in shaft

output to avoid nuisance tripping at high ambient. All condenser fan motors must be protected

externally by means of sensitive ambient compensated thermal O/L relay located inside the

control panel for each access. The motor shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings.

Units shall be provided with automatic head pressure control to permit satisfactory operation at

low ambient air temperatures by cycling condenser fans in response to head pressure variations.

Unit shall be capable of operating at ambient temperatures of 55 degrees centigrade with a

capacity reduction without mechanical failure.

Field power connected, control interlock terminals and unit control system shall be centrally

located in a weatherproof enclosure. Panel access doors shall be key locked and include steel

rod door retainers to prevent flapping while open. Dead front panels shall protect service

personnel against accidental contact with live voltage components.

Power and starting components shall include individual circuit breaker for each compressor.

Circuit breaker for the control circuit, starting contactors, including individual contactors for

each fan motor, solid state compressor sequence start timers, solid state overload protection in

all phases for the compressor and a unit terminal block for field connection to a single

disconnect switch. Panel to be protected against direct sun to avoid temperature raise inside the

control panel.

Unit controls shall include the following minimum components:

. Microprocessor

. Power and Control circuit terminal blocks

EQUIPMENT



. ON/OFF control switch

. Replaceable solid state relay panel

. 8 Digit alpha numeric diagnostic display / set point panel

. Thermistors and / or pressure transducers

. Automatic compressor lead / lag

. Pumpdown at beginning and end of every circuit cycle

. Capacity control based on leaving chilled water temperature and compensated by rate of

change of return water temperature.

. Limiting of chilled water temperature pull down rate at start up to 0.56°C per minute to

prevent excessive demand spikes at start up.

. Leaving chilled water temperature reset.

Unit Safety Features

Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and / or pressure transducers and all necessary

components in conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the following

protections:

. Loss of refrigerant charge protection.

. Low water flow detection.

. Low chilled water temperature protection.

. Low and high superheat protection.

. Low oil protection for each compressor.

. Low control voltage to unit protection.

. Ground current protection for each compressor which shuts down compressor when no

more than 2.5 amps are measure to prevent formation of acids.

. Compressors shall be provided with following manual reset type protections:-

- Pressure overload.

- Electrical overload through the use of definite purpose contactors and calibrated,

ambient compensated magnetic trip circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall open

all three phase in the event of an overload in any one phase or single phasing

condition.

Diagnostics

Diagnostic display module shall be capacity of indicating the safety lockout condition by

displaying a code for which an explanation may be scrolled at the display. Protections included

for display shall be:

EQUIPMENT



. Compressor lockout.

. Loss of charge.

. Low water flow.

. Low oil pressure.

. Cooler freeze protection.

. High or low suction superheat.

. Thermistor or potentiometer malfunction.

. Entering and leaving water temperature.

. Evaporator and condenser pressure.

. All set points.

The module in conjunction with the microprocessor shall also be capable of displaying the

output of a run test to verify operation of every switch, thermistor, potentiometer, fan and

compressor before the chiller is started.

Multi-refrigerant circuits shall be completely independent of each other. Each unit shall have a

minimum to two (2) refrigerant circuits.

The units shall also include capacity reduction thermostats for operation up to 125°C (52°C).

The units shall have flow switches in all outlet line and shall have operating – hour meters.

The unit shall be monitored and controlled at the BMS as indicated in the data point schedule.

Chiller Plant Manager

Chiller plant manager shall be supplied as part of chiller manufacturer supply. Chiller supplier

shall provide integration and interconnection all chillers and provide cabling and controls up to

chiller plant manager. Chiller manufacturer shall supply gateway and translate to access all

parameters and controls through BMS.

23.03.21 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

Heat exchangers shall be of the sandwiched plate type, consisting of gasketted heat exchange

plates, fixed end plate, removable pressure plate, upper carrying bar, lower guide bar, end

support column, clamping rods, lifting lugs, mounting feet and screwed drain connections.

Heat exchangers shall be of 'Alfa Laval' or approved equivalent manufacture.

Heat exchangers shall be selected to ensure that the pressure drop through each water circuit

does not exceed 50 kPa at specified design requirements.

Heat exchangers shall be factory pressure tested to a hydrostatic test pressure of not less than

2.0 times the working pressure through each water circuit. Certified pressure test details shall

be furnished by the manufacturer and shall include the test procedure, duration of test, and the

test pressures adopted.

EQUIPMENT



23.03.21.01 Construction and Materials

Heat exchanger plates shall be fabricated from 316 stainless steel with a press-formed

corrugated finish. Adjoining plates shall have their corrugations aligned in orthogonal

directions to produce a herringbone flow pattern and flow and return apertures between plates

shall be arranged to provide a single pass of each water circuit with full counterflow conditions

maintained throughout.

Flow passages between adjoining plates shall be fully gasketted to prevent intermixing or

external leakage. Gaskets shall be of nitrile rubber manufacture of grade suitable for the

working temperatures and pressures and shall be thermally bonded to the heat exchange plates.

End plates and pressure plates shall be of machined carbon steel fabrication. All external flow

and return pipe connections shall be made solely to the end plate which shall be provided with

flanged and gasketted nozzles for this purpose. The pressure plate shall mate to the upper

carrying bar and lower guide bar and shall be fitted with rollers to permit ease of withdrawal by

a single tradesperson.

Carrying bars, guide bars and end support columns shall be fabricated from rolled steel sections.

Carrying and guide bars shall have machined roller surfaces and shall be of sufficient length and

size to permit an additional 40% accommodation of heat exchange plates if required, without

restriction to the serviceability of individual plates.

Clamping rods and nuts shall be of high tensile steel fabrication and shall be readily removable

for access to heat exchange plates.

Except for heat exchanger plates and roller surfaces, all exposed steelwork shall be factory de-

scaled, prime coated with a rust and corrosion inhibitor and painted with an epoxy resin finish.

23.03.22 CARBON MONOXIDE MONITORING SYSTEM

23.03.22.01 General

The carbon monoxide monitoring systems shall serve the basement car park levels and ramps.

Systems shall be either Austech Micro 4000, Austech 2400 System Controller (or current model

at time of order) or equivalent, multi channel system with sampling points, as indicated on the

drawings in locations to provide adequate sensing. One off carbon monoxide sampling points

shall be provided on each level to control the exhaust and make-up supply systems. MODBUS

communication protocols shall be available to allow interface with Building Management

Systems (BMS). The car park supply and exhaust fans shall be provided with speed controllers.

23.03.22.02 Carbon Monoxide Monitoring

The carbon monoxide monitoring system shall continuously monitor sampling points in the

locations as indicated on the drawings, on an uninterrupted basis.

There shall be no time delays in measuring/controlling circuitry apart from the inherent sensor

response which shall be less than 60 seconds to 90% full scale deflection for any point. A

continuous analog output of 4-20mA shall be available for each monitored point to enable

continuous and uninterrupted signals for monitoring of carbon monoxide levels.

The system shall be so configured that the greatest time delay in sensing gas on any channel is

60 seconds, regardless of the number of channels in the overall system.

EQUIPMENT



The system shall be capable of sensing gas up to 25 metres from any sensor location to main

control unit, without any special modifications or additions. There shall be LCD and LED

indication provided on the front panel of the main control housing. Individual fault monitoring

circuitry shall be provided on each channel so that any fault will be indicated on the individual

channel module and via appropriate common fault output relay contacts. A fault on any one

channel shall not interfere with the operation of any other channel, and the alarm outputs from

the fault channel shall be inhibited whilst that channel is in fault condition.

23.03.22.03 Carbon Monoxide Sensors

The Carbon Monoxide sensors shall be Austech brand or approve equivalent. The measuring

principle shall be electro-chemical utilizing two electrode electrochemical cells each mounted in

a powder coated or painted aluminium, tamper proof wall mounted enclosure with a 4-20mA

output board fitted.

Mounting brackets shall be provided with the sensor to hold cell at 150mm from mounting

surface; the zero and span adjustments shall be made at the detector location to eliminate the

need for two persons to check and calibrate the system. Measuring range shall be 0-150 ppm

CO with a linear scale.

The carbon monoxide sensors have an inbuilt no-gas sensor test, which is enacted by applying a

magnet to the side of the housing, eliminating the need to apply a test gas at regular intervals to

ensure the system is operable.

The carbon monoxide sensors shall have a warranty of at least five years

The monitor shall be capable of accuracy to + 5% of full scale deflection, sensitivity of 1% full

scale deflection and repeatability of + 1% full scale deflection.

23.03.22.04 Field Wiring Connections

Wiring from each detector location shall be made with two-conductor, overall shielded data

cable of good quality, and shall be possible with equivalent quality multi-core cabling where

required.

All wiring shall be run in PVC electrical conduit run within the concrete structure where conduit

would otherwise be exposed within the space.

The Mechanical Trade shall ensure conduits are placed within slabs as required.

23.03.22.05 Control Signal/Interface

Refer to Control section.

23.03.22.06 Certification

Certification of system shall be carried out every 12 months.



23.04.00 SHEETMETAL WORK

23.04.01 DUCTWORK AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS

23.04.01.01 Sheetmetal Ductwork

The material, or any composite material, employed in the construction of ductwork shall comply

with the fire performance requirements of Class O BS476 Part 6 and 7 and with the

S.M.A.C.N.A. Low Velocity Duct Manual 5th Edition 1976 except the Snap Lock seams will

not be acceptable.

The following minimum metric thicknesses shall be used for the sheetmetal gauges nominated

in the S.M.A.C.N.A. Manual:

24 U.S. gauge - 0.6mm





All sheetmetal ductwork shall be manufactured from lock forming quality galvanised sheet

steel. Galvanising shall be 275 gms/m2.

Ductwork shall be installed using supports, as described in DW144 and according to

manufacturers requirements.

All flanges, stiffener angles and supporting frames on ductwork installed outside the building or

exposed to weather shall be hot dip galvanised. Flanges and angles shall be rivetted to the

sheetmetal duct. Spot welding is not acceptable in this case.

All ducts shall be carefully designed and provided with all necessary anchoring and flexible

connections to prevent damage to either the ducts or the building structure due to thermal

expansion and/or contraction of the ducts and to obviate transmission of vibration from any

motive or noise generating equipment as fans, air handling units, valves etc.

Drive slide cross-joints shall be sealed airtight at corners using metal tongues and Silverseal

sealer or equal.

Vanes in elbows may be single thickness where the vanes are not more than 300mm long and

double thickness above that length. (Refer SMACNA figures 2-3 and 2-4).

Tee connections may be straight tap in type for takeoffs to individual outlets in which case an

adjustable single blade stream splitter damper or VCD damper shall be used. Tee connections

for branch takeoffs shall be radius tap in or angle takeoff with clinch lock connections and

stream splitter damper.

Each piece of ductwork shall be wiped inside and out before installation and all open ends shall

be capped and sealed to prevent ingress of dirt during construction. Ensure ductwork systems

are clean and free from dirt, dust, grime, debris, etc., before initial operation of fans. Fans shall

not be operated until filters are installed and approval from the Consultant has been obtained.

23.04.01.02 Pitot Holes in Ductwork

As a minimum, pitot holes shall be provided at all main branches and at each fan discharge and

suction.

SHEETMETAL WORK



25mm diameter holes closed off with rubber grommets or other approved means shall be

provided in the ductwork where required for purposes of testing with a velometer or pitot tube.

The holes shall be located according to the table below, across the duct and in straight lengths of

at least 2.0m so that there shall be a minimum of 1.0m of straight duct up-stream and down-

stream.

Up to 300mm - 2 openings

301mm to 450mm - 3 openings



Above 1220mm - 6 openings

23.04.01.03 Flexible Fan Connections

All connections of the ductwork to fans and air handling units shall be provided with flexible

connecting sections, formed by the use of heavy PVC coated vinyl or fibreglass fabric and

confirm to SMACNA Figure 3.5. The flexible connections shall have adequate slack to absorb

relative movement and vibration of the connected items and shall be U.L certified.

The fabric shall be rated for use up to 200°F (93°C) working temperature with tensile strength

of not less than 690 KPa.

Where exposed to weather, flexible connections shall be fitted with a weather shield.

23.04.01.04 Flashing Collars

Galvanised steel flashing collars shall be provided and fixed to all ductwork and pipework

penetrating roof or external walls or where necessary for the waterproofing of mechanical

services penetrations as shown on the drawings.

23.04.01.05 Duct Access Hatches

All low pressure ductwork shall have access hatches where specified or shown on drawings and

where required for satisfactory inspection and service purposes and shall conform with

SMACNA Figure 2.14 Door Frame 1 and Door C.

Provide access hatches where shown, required and directed and as a minimum in the following

locations:

. Bottom of all duct risers.

. Next to outside air intakes and outlets.

. At each fire damper.

. Into apparatus casings to facilitate maintenance and cleaning of all components.

23.04.01.06 Vertical Discharge or Intake Ducts

Vertical discharge or intake ducts that are exposed to weather shall be provided with flashing

collars and birdscreens where they penetrate the roof. The ducts shall be internally drained with

a copper drain line run to the nearest drain point.

These ducts shall be graded to the drain point and shall have all joints and seams in the exposed

section sealed watertight with an approved sealant.

SHEETMETAL WORK



23.04.01.07 Toilet Exhaust Ductwork

All toilet exhaust ductwork within ceilings or shafts shall be carefully treated with a suitable

sealing compound such as Scotch Sealer 6691-1E as manufactured by 3M or approved equal, at

all joints and seams to ensure that the duct is airtight and leakproof.

23.04.01.08 Flexible Ductwork

Flexible ductwork shall be constructed with two (2) layer aluminised polyester innercore,

surrounded by 25mm thickness 24kg/m3 density fibre glass, all wrapped in a reinforced multi

layer aluminium polyester outer jacket and installed in accordance with the recommendations of

BS476, BS4913 and BS5588 Part 9 and NFPA-90A.

All materials used within flexible ductwork shall not give off toxic emissions and shall meet the

standards of NFPA 90A and U.L listed or to meet BS476 and BS413. Maximum flame spread

rating – 12 (Class 1). Maximum smoke developed rating – 50.

All flexible ductwork shall be acoustically insulated.

All air conditioning flexible ductwork to be thermally insulated.

Flexible ductwork penetrations through masonry walls shall be provided with rigid sheetmetal

sleeves.

All ductwork lengths shall not exceed 1.5m wherever possible.

Duct clamps of 8mm wide stainless steel band with “lifted” edges to avoid damage to the duct.

The clamp shall be provided with a ‘flip up’ and ‘quick lock’ tightening for ease of installation.

23.04.01.09 Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork

Ductwork and installation shall comply with the requirements of SMACNA, NFPA-90A. Ducts

installed horizontally shall be installed with a rise in the direction of air flow of not less than

0.5%.

Ductwork shall be galvanised steel of thickness not less than 1.2mm. Ducts shall be sealed in

accordance with BS5588 Part 9 except that button punch snaplock joints shall not be used. All

seams and joints shall be soldered completely airtight. Alternatively, all seams and joints shall

be filled during manufacture of ductwork with No. 6691-1E Silverseal as manufactured by 3M.

Clean out panels of suitable size shall be provided every 3.0m and at branches, change of

direction and in locations as required to enable cleaning out of the entire ductwork system.

Clean out panels shall be 1.2mm galvanised steel with 12mm turned up edges for stiffening and

shall be screw fixed by means of 6mm hexagonal head bolts to tapping strips welded to the duct.

A 3mm thick woven fireproof gasket shall be provided and the whole assembly shall be neat

and workmanlike and result in an airtight assembly.

One hundred percent air and liquid tight welded and flanged 3mm black mild steel exhaust

ducting may be considered subject to Engineer approval.

Kitchen exhaust duct work to be applied with 1 hour fire rating from hood to discharge.

23.04.01.10 Circular and Oval Sheetmetal Ductwork

SHEETMETAL WORK



All circular and oval sheetmetal ductwork for low and medium pressure application shall be

fabricated from full size galvanised sheet steel specifically manufactured for roll forming, such

as “Galvabond” or approved equivalent. Galvanising shall remain unbroken after fabrication

and, in all cases, long runs to duct up to 2400mm in length shall be fabricated from continuous

sheets unless broken by transitions, bends etc. Patched ductwork fabricated from small pieces

shall not be used.

In general all circular and oval ductwork shall be provided with a proprietary spiral lock seam,

with proprietary duct fittings such as reducers, bends and tee-pieces. Bends shall be lobster

back type.

All straight ducts shall be fabricated in lengths as long a possible consistent with transport,

access and site requirements, to minimise site joints.

All site joints shall be of the spigotted type.

Exposed circular ductwork shall be fitted with proprietary joint fittings and care taken to

disguise the joint visually. Exposed jointing shall be subject to approval.

Where openings are formed in duct to allow connections or the like to be made, the duct shall be

braced to ensure it retains it’s shape.

Where duct is internally insulated, it should be lined with perforated zincalume metal. Foil

facing is not acceptable. Internal insulation shall be finished neatly at joins so as to ensure the

insulation does not inhibit joining of ductwork and provides an even airway.

Duct over 500Ν or equal area shall be suspended using profiled flat bar to ensure the chart

retains its shape.

23.04.02 PVC DUCTWORK

23.04.02.01 Material

Ductwork shall be constructed from grey, pressed, unplasticised, rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC)

sheeting, heat formed to the required sections. Extruded PVC pipe and pressed bands may be

used for circular ducting.

Construction

Ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with the following schedule:

Circular Ducts

Mm

Minimum

Gauge

mm

Flanges

mm

Up to 450

3

25 wide x 4 thick

Stiffening is to be added to any duct face to prevent flexing or sagging.

PVC ductwork shall be as manufactured by Kemproof Industries Pty Ltd or approved equal.

23.04.03 DAMPERS

SHEETMETAL WORK



23.04.03.01 General

Volume damper sets shall be provided where specified and/or shown on the drawings.

The type of volume damper to be used for each application shall be as follows:

. Motorised multiblade damper sets for unison control of fresh air, return air, relief air -

parallel blade type.

. Cooling coil by-pass dampers - opposed blade type.

. Manually adjustable damper sets - opposed blade type.

. Motorised smoke exhaust or smoke control dampers - parallel blade type.

. Manually adjustable dampers at duct branch takeoffs - refer Ductwork clause in this

Specification.

. Manually adjustable dampers at air outlets and grilles - refer Diffusers, Registers, Grilles

clause in this Specification.

23.04.03.02 Motorised Damper Sets

Dampers shall be constructed of galvanised sheet steel and shall be Honeywell, Air Master or

equivalent.

Damper sets shall be arranged in substantial supporting frames and each blade shall be mounted

on a 12mm shaft which turns in sintered bronze bearings. Bearings shall be self-aligning, non-

binding type similar to those used on fire dampers. All damper blades shall be interconnected

by means of a suitable bar linkage for ganged operation.

The bar linkage shall positively connect all blades via ball joint connections so that all blades

rotate equally and close tightly without any dependence on tight clearance bearings.

All other modulating dampers shall be arranged with spindles horizontal. Dampers shall be

sized as shown on the drawings to handle air quantities indicated. All dampers shall provide

positive shut-off and the damper linkages shall be free from unnecessary slackness.

All motorised dampers shall have the motor drive shaft situated centrally on the damper section

and shall extend continuous along the full length of the driven damper blade. Drive blades shall

be drilled and tapped for positive bolt fixings to avoid rotation on the drive shaft.

The maximum blade width shall not exceed 250mm and the length 1200mm.

The maximum overall dimensions of any damper section shall not be greater than 2300mm high

or 1200 wide.

The number and size of motors for each damper shall be determined according to the

requirements as set out under Controls.

23.04.03.03 Manually Adjustable Damper Sets

Dampers shall be constructed of galvanised sheet steel and shall be as manufactured by

Honeywell, Air Master or equivalent.

SHEETMETAL WORK



Damper sets shall be arranged in substantial supporting frames and each blade shall be mounted

on a 12mm shaft which turns in sintered bronze bearings. All damper blades shall be

interconnected by means of a suitable bar linkage for ganged operation.

All dampers shall be arranged with spindle horizontal and shall be sized to handle the air

quantities shown on the drawings.

The maximum blade width shall not exceed 250mm and the length 1200mm.

The maximum overall dimensions of any damper section shall not be greater than 2300mm high

or 1200mm wide.

Where manually adjustable damper sets are installed in ductwork or other inaccessible locations

the operating shafts shall be extended through the duct and a lockable quadrant fitted.

23.04.03.04 Non-Return Dampers

Non-return dampers shall be constructed with 1.6mm Z300 Galvabond steel frames with

damper blades manufactured from 0.8mm aluminium sheet. Blades shall be 150mm deep with

longitudinal central swage for rigidity and shall be maximum of 1000mm long. Where damper

sections are wider than 1000mm two sections shall be provided.

23.04.03.05 Smoke Control Dampers

Shall be fabricated from not less than 1.6mm thick galvanised steel sheet with 13mm wide edge

breaks and fastened securely to 13mm dia. bright mild steel spindles. Spindles shall rotate

freely in bronze bushes only.

All blades seals shall be of high temperature silicone rubber having heat stability from -50°C to

+260°C.

Individual blades shall be hinged on 6mm diameter bright steel rods turning in 7mm drilled

holes in 1.6mm Z300 Galvabond sheet steel hat section side frames.

Damper frames shall be sized to fit inside the ductwork or opening in which the damper is to be

installed.

All blades shall be individually hinged and counterweighted so that the whole assembly offers

minimum resistance to the passage of air and closes by gravity to give minimal leakage back

through the damper.

Where dampers are installed in sheetmetal ductwork removable panels shall be provided to give

access to the counterweights and pivots for adjustment and inspection.

23.04.04 FIRE DAMPERS

23.04.04.01 Fire Dampers - Fusible Link Type

Fire dampers shall be fitted at all points where the passage of air or ducts is required in the

building structure to penetrate a fire barrier between any protected areas and/or different fire

zones and as shown on the drawings.

Fire dampers shall have a fire resistance rating not less than that required for the part of the

building structure in which the opening occurs.

SHEETMETAL WORK



Fire dampers shall be either of the pivoted single blade or multiblade type or sliding curtain type

as required to suit the particular application, held in the open position by a 70°C fusible link,

arranged to lock on closure, and shall be constructed and tested in accordance with BS476 and

NFPA 90A. Damper blades and linkages shall be arranged to prevent chatter and vibration

when the system is operating.

All fire dampers shall be a replica of the tested prototype and:

. shall not have a mounting area greater than that of the prototype;

. shall not have blades which are longer than the prototype; and greater than 1.125 or less

than 0.9 times the width of the prototype;

. shall not have any of its components of a lesser thickness than those of the prototype.

Each fire damper shall incorporate bearings specially designed to be self-aligning, pivoting on

stainless steel stub shafts. Each bearing shall be capable of compensating for up to 5 degrees of

misalignment from its central axis.

All fire damper assemblies shall be housed in a 2.5mm welded steel sleeve extending not less

than 75mm on each side of the fire barrier, which shall be independently connected to the fire

barrier so that the damper will remain in position in the event of ductwork being damaged or

collapsing.

Fire dampers shall be installed in strict compliance with BS476, NFPA 90A and the

manufacturer's recommendations and fire resistance test acceptance certificates. In particular

the fire dampers shall be installed such that the damper blades are fully enclosed within the

thickness of the wall or structure when in the closed position and not closer than 40mm to the

finished face of the wall. The face of any flange connection to ductwork shall be not further

than 80mm from the finished face of the wall.

Fire damper sleeves shall be securely anchored to the structure by bolting 38 x 38 x 3 retaining

angles to the sleeves on each side. Where only one side of the damper is accessible, the damper

sleeve shall be fixed by 38 x 38 x 3 mild steel angles on the accessible side bolted to the sleeve

and bolted to the structure with expanding shield bolts, or alternatively by expanding shield

bolts through the damper sleeve into the structure.

Damper assemblies shall be provided with an access panel located in the sleeve or duct adjacent

to the damper, arranged to provide access to the fusible link and spring locking catch for

servicing and inspection. The access opening shall have a minimum 250x 250 free area, or,

where the duct is smaller, square to the maximum width of the duct.

Position all fire dampers into the wall openings provided by the Builder. Sufficient clearance

shall be allowed around each damper. The gap shall be such that it meets the manufacturer's

recommendations and in any case shall not be less than that of the tested prototype and shall be

not greater than half the width of the fixing angles or fixing collar. Pack the gap around the fire

damper with KAO-WOOL or other approved compressible non-combustible material for the

full thickness of the wall.

Dampers shall not be painted. Each fire damper shall have an SAA compliance label which

shall be visible from outside of the damper.

Each fire damper, after being properly fixed in position, shall be tested by manual opening and

closing to ensure free operation.

SHEETMETAL WORK



Duct access doors shall have moulded rubber gaskets and sash clip fasteners. Access panels to

fire dampers in high pressure ducts shall be reinforced where necessary.

23.04.05 TECHNICAL SUBMISSION

The Contractor shall submit catalogue information for all air distribution equipment including

but not limited to:

. Ductwork – low pressure

. Flexible duct work

. Flexible connections

. Access panels

. Volume damper (motorised and manual)

. Non-return damper

. Smoke control damper

. Fire dampers

The Contractor shall submit samples as requested by the Consultant after receipt of the technical

documentation.



23.05.00 REFRIGERATION PIPING

23.05.01 GENERAL

Piping shall be designed and arranged to ensure oil return to the compressor and shall include all

traps, separator, reservoirs, heaters and controls necessary to provide and maintain efficient

compressor lubrication.

Piping shall be designed to have circuit pressure losses not exceeding 40 kPa between

compressor and condenser 20 kPa between evaporator and compressor, 20 kPa between

condenser and evaporator and shall not include any sections with critical lengths giving

noticeable pulse resonance.

Drawings are schematic indicating the route, connections and fittings required but may not in all

parts show piping in its true position. This shall not absolve the Mechanical Trade from their

responsibility for the proper erection of pipework suitable for the duty intended.

23.05.01.01 Fire Precautions

The Mechanical Trade shall take all necessary fire precautions during all cutting and welding

operations.

23.05.02 PIPING MATERIALS

Copper piping shall comply with BS 17235-1 and/or all Codes relevant to the service.

23.05.03 HANDLING, PREPARATION, INSTALLATION

Only new, clean and undamaged piping shall be used.

Piping shall be stored in a dry area remote from materials likely to cause contamination.

Piping and fittings shall be mechanically cleaned prior to installation. Pipes shall be machine

cut by a method giving square ends and undistorted sections.

Burrs shall be removed from both internal and external surfaces.

Pipework shall be installed in locations shown on drawings, have risers arranged vertical and

horizontal runs either parallel or normal to enclosure walls and have parallel runs grouped.

Pipework shall not transmit vibration perceptible to human senses nor noise perceptible above

the noise of components for which sound power level limits have been specified, be installed

with provision for expansion and contraction and not interfere with the removal of equipment,

coils or other piping, nor restrict access to doors, hatches or windows.

Pipework shall pass all specified tests prior to being insulated or otherwise concealed.

23.05.04 JOINTS

A minimum of joints shall be made in the piping systems.

REFRIGERATION PIPING



Silver soldered capillary joints shall be used throughout. Soft soldered joints shall not be used.

Capillary fittings shall be close fitting type which are mechanically rigid without solder, the

solder being used as a seal only.

Brazed joints will be accepted only when silver soldering cannot be used.

Joints in small soft copper tube may be made with flare compression fittings.

Dry nitrogen shall be bled continuously into pipework during soldering.

A charging valve shall be provided. The valve shall be a packed angle valve with seal cap, non-

back seating, 10mm flare x 10mm MPT with flare fitting cap and flare gasket.

23.05.05 BENDS

Bends shall have a minimum centre line radius of 1.5 times pipe diameter, an undistorted cross

section and at least the same pressure rating as the piping of the system in which they are

installed.

23.05.06 TEES

Tees shall be of the streamlined type with the branch making a tangential intersection in the

direction of fluid flow.

Tees shall have at least the same pressure rating as the piping of the system in which they are

installed.

23.05.07 SUPPORTS

Piping shall be supported by clips and hangers at intervals not exceeding the following:

Pipe Nominal Dimensions

(mm)

Support Intervals

(mm)

Copper

Horizontal Vertical

15

20

25

32

40

50

65

80

100

1200

1800

1800

2400

2400

2700

3000

3000

3000

1800

2400

2400

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

Supports shall be fabricated in steel and hot dip galvanised and shall be 'Unistrut" or approved

equivalent manufacture.

Supports shall permit appropriate movement for expansion and contraction in controlled

directions and not damage vapour barriers, insulation or sheathing.




Supports shall be arranged so that stresses or loads due to expansion or contraction pressure

reaction, and the weight of the pipes and their contents do not exceed the safe loads for the

support, supporting structure and equipment to which the pipes connect and the pipes

themselves.

Supports shall not bridge any vibration isolation and shall be fixed to structural elements with

adequate strength for the duty. Fixings shall not weaken the supporting structure.

Where pipes are insulated, high density, sectional cork ferrules shall be installed at all supports.

Ferrules shall be bedded and vapour sealed as specified for insulation on the pipe.

23.05.08 SLEEVES

Sleeves fabricated in 1.0mm thick Galvabond having lock seamed or spot welded joints shall be

provided at all piping penetrations through walls and equipment casings.

Sleeves shall project 50mm each side of wall penetrations and terminate flush with external

surfaces of equipment casings. Sleeves shall be 10mm larger in diameter than pipe plus any

insulation and shall be sealed at equipment casings and penetrations of external walls.

23.05.09 ESCUTCHEON PLATES

Escutcheon plates shall be fitted where exposed pipes pass through walls.

Plates shall trim the pipe opening and shall be of 1.0mm thick Galvabond in one piece, slipped

over the pipe before joints are made and screw fixed to walls.

23.05.10 VALVES AND FITTINGS

23.05.10.01 Muffler

A muffler shall be fitted in the discharge lines of the reciprocating compressor and shall be of a

design and make approved by the compressor manufacturer.

The muffler shall not trap oil.

23.05.10.02 Strainer

A strainer shall be fitted where shown on drawings, be 'Y' type of copper alloy construction and

shall have monel screens with 0.11mm wire and 0.14mm aperture supported on a brass screen

with 1.0mm wire and 1.6mm aperture.

23.05.10.03 Dryer

The dryer shall be of the flanged angle type with replaceable cores and shall be installed in a

valved bypass in the liquid line.

The dryer shall have a flow capacity of 60% circuit capacity, a maximum resistance to flow of

14 kPa and a capacity based on ARI 710-58 rating of 24ΕC or 1 gram per tonne of refrigeration

capacity.

23.05.10.04 Sight Glass




Moisture indicating sight glasses shall be provided where shown on drawing and they shall be

installed in positions where easily viewed.

23.05.10.05 Thermostatic Expansion Valves

Thermostatic expansion valves shall be provided for each refrigeration circuit and shall be

selected to have a rated capacity of not more than 120% of circuit capacity with a minimum

capacity of not more than 25% of rated capacity.

Valves shall have an external equaliser and adjustable super-heat control which shall be

adjusted to give a minimum super-heat of 9oC.

Valves shall have working parts accessible for maintenance and shall be installed with sensing

elements securely clamped to suction lines in a manner ensuring response and in a position

close to the connections of the suction header.

Valves shall be selected with due allowance for refrigerant distributor pressure drop.

23.05.10.06 Refrigerant Distributors

Refrigerant distributors shall be provided at each coil, have the same number of circuits as the

coil served, have replaceable nozzles and be arranged for vertical down feed and with equal

length circuits and feed tail lengths not exceeding 750mm.

23.05.10.07 Solenoid Valves

Solenoid valves shall be provided where shown on drawing and shall provide on/off control of

refrigerant flow.

23.05.10.08 Pressure Tappings

Pressure tappings shall be provided for all pressure gauges, pressure controls and in each

expansion valve equalising line.

Pressure tappings shall be made through packed and capped angle valves.

23.05.10.09 Valves

Valves shall be of the packed, back seating, key operating, forged brass construction type fitted

with suitable screwed caps.

Valves shall be blown through with dry gas before installation.

23.05.10.10 Thermometer Wells

Wells shall be a length of 10mm copper tube brazed to the external surface of the pipe, have a

minimum pipe contact length of 75mm, be arranged to hold oil and be vapour sealed at

penetrations through insulation.

23.05.10.11 Drain Piping

Provide drain piping from the cooling coil drain pans to the floor waste.

Air handling unit drain piping shall be 25mm x 1.2mm copper.



23.06.00 PIPEWORK

23.06.01 GENERAL

Pipework shall comply with the specification sections 'Technical General', Corrosion Protection

and Painting', 'Insulation and Sheathing', 'Noise & Vibration' and 'Commissioning and Testing'.

Pipework in the material scheduled shall be provided to interconnect the components of the

following system:

Chilled Water BSP (Black Steel Piping)

Condensate PVC

Pipework shall be sized and run as shown on drawings or specified. Drawings are schematic

indicating the route, connections and fittings required but may not in all parts show piping in its

true position. This shall not absolve the Mechanical Trade from their responsibility for the

proper erection of pipework suitable for the duty intended.

Pipework shall be suitable for the working and test pressures specified.

All pipework shall be free from surface or general corrosion and have no signs of scaling,

pitting or excess weathering. Any pipework so affected shall be replaced at no cost.

All fittings for each piping system shall be from the same manufacturer.

23.06.02 PIPING MATERIALS

23.06.02.01 Chilled Water Pipework

All chilled water piping shall be black mild steel, seamless type to BS1387 medium weight for

sizes up to 150 mm (6”) diameter and to BS3601 for sizes above 150 mm (6”) diameter or to

ASTM A-53 GRB Schedule 40 and all pipe fittings shall be black, forged steel of the same

quality and weight as the pipes.

All joints shall be welded by an approved welding process, each joint of sufficient strength to

withstand the stress imposed by internal pressure, thermal expansion and weight of pipe, fittings

and thermal insulation. All welded tees, branches, vent pipes reducers, etc. shall have leveled

joints and finished off with a circumferential butt joint weld.

Pipe fittings shall be suitable for welded connections. Butt weld fittings shall be to ASNE V 16-

9 and BS1640 made of seamless carbon steel to ASTM A234 B Grade WPB. Threaded fittings

shall be to BS21 (ISO 7) made of malleable Iron to BS149 and ISO49. Flanges shall be ANSI

Class 150, Carbon Steel weld neck.

In congested areas where small bore chilled water piping may be required, Type K copper

piping with bronze non de zincifiable fittings may be used subject to the Engineers approval and

to a test of the welding operatives who will be doing the brazing. Brazed joints will be required

throughout and no compression fittings will be permitted.

23.06.02.02 Condensate Piping

All condensate drain piping shall be uPVC (unplasticised poly vinyl chloride) to BS 3505 latest

edition Class E (900 Kpa) at 20oC fluid temperature and 40oC ambient temperature or ASTM

D1785 Schedule 40.

PIPEWORK



All fittings and accessories shall be of same material and quality as the pipe and jointing up to

65mm diameters (21/2”) diameter shall be of the spigot and socket cemented type where solvent

cement is applied to both parts all in compliance with BS 4346: Part 1:1969 joints and fittings

for use with uPVC pressure pipes.

All joints should be allowed to set for at least 10 hours.

Unions on uPVC systems shall be factory manufactured unions appropriate for the pipe.

23.06.03 HANDLING, PREPARATION, INSTALLATION

Piping shall be carefully handled to avoid damage to piping and building surfaces.

Only new, clean and undamaged piping shall be used unless specified otherwise.


Piping and fittings shall be mechanically cleaned prior to installation.

Pipes shall be machine cut by a method giving square ends and undistorted sections.


Pipework shall:

. be neatly installed in locations shown on drawings or specified;

. have risers arranged vertical and horizontal runs either parallel or normal to enclosure

walls;

. have parallel runs neatly grouped;

. be graded up towards air release valves and down towards drain valves;

. not include any sections which will not drain or can trap air;

. not transmit vibration perceptible to human senses nor noise perceptible above the noise

of components for which sound power level limits have been specified;

. be installed with provision for expansion and contraction;

. not interfere with the removal of equipment, coils or other piping, nor restrict access to

doors, hatches or windows;

. pass all specified tests prior to being insulated or otherwise concealed.

23.06.04 JOINTS

A minimum of joints shall be made in the piping systems.

Permanent joints shall be brazed for copper pipework.

Non-permanent joints shall be provided at connections to: plant, equipment tanks, drip trays,

flexible connections, valves etc.

PIPEWORK



Non-permanent joints shall be one of the following:

. Flanges for any pipe diameter 65 mm and above.

. Screwed unions for any pipe of 50mm diameter or smaller.

. Flared fittings for any pipe of 20mm diameter or smaller.

. Screwed for any pipe of suitable wall thickness and of 50mm diameter or smaller.

Non-permanent joints shall be easily accessible and shall permit dismantling without disturbing

plant or other piping.

All screw threads shall be lubricated with graphite grease.

23.06.04.01 Brazing

Brazing shall:

. comply with BS 1723;

. be carried out by skilled tradesmen using a minimum of heat, flux and brazing alloy;

. be carried out on joints which are clean and properly prepared.

Brazed joints shall be of the spigot and socket type achieved either by use of capillary joint

fittings or machine formed integral sockets in one end of the meeting pipes. Integral sockets

shall have a length of one pipe diameter or 25mm maximum.

23.06.04.02 Flanges

Flanges shall:

. be of a compatible material with the piping joined;

. made of bronze and be brazed to copper piping;

. comply with BS 4504 or match flanges on equipment or valves and be suitable for the

temperatures and pressures of the system in which installed;

. have a gasket selected for the duty fitted in the joint to BS1737;

. be connected by zinc plated bolts, nuts and washers.

23.06.04.03 Screwed Unions

Screwed unions shall:

. be brazed to copper;

. have ground mating surfaces for metal joints;

. have hexagon nuts.

PIPEWORK



23.06.04.04 Flared Fittings

Flared fittings shall not be used on vibrating pipes.

Pipe ends shall be annealed and flared pipe ends machine formed.

23.06.04.05 Joints between Dissimilar Metals (Dielectric Isolators)

Joints between ferrous and non-ferrous screwed piping and equipment shall be made using

Teflon or Nylon isolating materials in the form of screwed unions.

Joints between ferrous and non-ferrous flanged piping and equipment shall be made using

insulating gaskets and Teflon sleeves and washers between flanges, bolts and nuts.

The entire insulating joint including the dielectric material shall be suitable to withstand the

temperature pressure and other operating characteristics for the service for which they are used.

23.06.05 BENDS

Bends shall:

. have a minimum centre line radius of 1.5 times pipe diameter;

. have an undistorted cross section;

. have at least the same pressure rating as the piping of the system in which they are

installed.

23.06.06 TEES

Tees shall:

. be of the streamlined type with the branch making a tangential intersection in the

direction of fluid flow;

. have at least the same pressure rating as the piping of the system in which they are

installed.

23.06.07 CHANGE IN DIAMETER

Fittings providing a streamlined change in diameter shall be used to connect pipes of different

diameters.

Fittings shall be eccentric where necessary to provide complete venting or drainage of the pipe

system.

23.06.08 SUPPORTS

Piping shall, unless installed underground, be supported by clips, rollers and hangers at intervals

not exceeding the following:

PIPEWORK



Pipe Nominal

Dimension Support Intervals - Metres

mm BSP Copper uPVC

15 2.1 1.5 0.7

20 2.1 1.5 0.7

25 2.4 1.8 0.9

32 2.4 1.8 0.9

40 2.7 2.4 1.0

50 3.0 2.4 1.0

65 3.3 2.7 1.0

80 3.7 3.0 1.3

100 4.0

150 4.0

200 4.0

250 4.0

Supports shall:

. be fabricated in steel and hot dip galvanised;

. be "Unistrut" or approved equivalent manufacture;

. permit appropriate movement for expansion and contraction in controlled directions;

. be arranged so that stresses or loads due to expansion or contraction pressure reaction,

and the weight of the pipes and their contents do not exceed the safe loads for the

support, supporting structure, any pumps or other equipment to which the pipes connect,

and the pipes themselves;

. not bridge any vibration isolation;

. be fixed to structural elements with adequate strength for the duty. Fixings shall not

weaken the supporting structure;

. vertical rising pipes shall also be supported at the base and the support shall withstand the

total weight of the pipe and fluid contained.

23.06.09 EXPANSION, CONTRACTION

Pipework shall be completed with provision for controlled expansion and contraction.

When possible piping shall be arranged to be sufficiently flexible to expand and contract

without:

. development of excessive stresses in the pipework;

. transferring excessive stresses to connected equipment or the structure supporting

pipework;

. when the inherent flexibility of pipework is inadequate, expansion loops, bellows or

telescopic connectors shall be provided.

Anchors shall:

. provide a reaction for expansion forces at positions where forces can be adequately

supported;

PIPEWORK



. be spaced as shown on drawing, or, to proportion expansion approximately equally to

each section of the pipework;

. be welded to steel and PVC piping;

. be clamped to copper piping;

. provide restraint at changes in direction or ring jointed pipework;

. be bolted or welded to supporting structure without causing any weakness in the

structure;

. be fixed to sections of piping free from vibration.

23.06.10 SLEEVES

Sleeves shall:

. be provided at all piping penetrations through floors, walls, roof and equipment casings;

. be fabricated in 1.0mm thick galvabond;

. be installed flush with the underside of floor slabs and with the upper side projecting

75mm above floor slabs.

. project 50mm each side of wall penetrations;

. terminate flush with external surfaces of equipment casings;

. be 10mm larger in diameter than pipe plus any insulation;

. be sealed at sound barriers, equipment casings, and penetration of masonry air shafts;

. have lock seamed on spot welded joints;

. be supplied by the Mechanical Trade and installed by the Builder where the penetrations

are through surfaces provided by the Builder and installed by the Mechanical Trade

where penetrations are through surfaces installed by the Mechanical Trade.

. Sleeves penetrating fire-rated floors and walls shall have the space between piping and

the sleeve packed with a fire resistant packing to the thickness of the fire barrier.

Acoustic Seals shall be as detailed on drawings or;

. sewn boots fabricated in Wavebar 120 leaded vinyl;

. clipped to piping and pipe sleeves with 'Cheney' worm drive hose clips;

. be airtight;

. in installed on both sides of the sleeve at penetrations through plantroom walls and slabs.

PIPEWORK



23.06.11 ESCUTCHEON PLATES

Escutcheon plates shall be fitted where exposed pipes pass through walls or ceilings.

Plates shall:

. trim the piping opening;

. be of 1.0mm thick "galvabond" construction;

. be in one piece, slipped over the pipe before joints are made;

. be screw fixed to walls

23.06.12 TESTING OF PIPING

23.06.12.01 General

Each pipework system shall be tested as a whole or in sections as the work proceeds in

accordance with relevant British Standards and with the following requirements.

Test pressures shall be applied during the construction period and prior to the pipelines being

lagged or painted with each section being blanked until further tests are made.

All equipment, material and labour necessary for testing shall be provided and all necessary

“blanking-off” shall be done to prevent excessive pressures to equipment, seals or other similar

parts of the system.

Leaking joints in welded and brazed pipes shall be remade in accordance with the section of

British Standards and the relevant Code for the system being used. Leaking joints in screwed

fittings and “0” ring fittings shall be fully re-made; caulking of leaks will not be permitted. All

faulty joints shall be re-tested after rectification and repeated until entire systems are

satisfactory.

Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant British Standard taking care that the

pressures stated do not over stress any part of the system due to working pressure or static head.

If such is likely to occur permission shall be requested to vary the test condition.

23.06.12.02 Testing of Water Pipework Systems

All pipework shall be pressure tested by air or water to a test pressure of 1.5 times the working

pressure recorded by an approved gauge placed at the highest point in the system.

Test pressures shall be maintained for a minimum of 8 hours without loss of pressure, with

corrections made for ambient temperature change when necessary.

After sections of pipework are tested they shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed and then

filled with treated water. The water shall be checked quarterly until the system is put into

continuous operation to ensure that deterioration of the pipework has not occurred.

23.06.12.03 Testing of Drains

All open drains shall be tested by capping off the lowest drain point and filling the line with the

fluid being drained and visually checking all joints for leakage. No pressure testing is required.

PIPEWORK



23.06.13 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING

All pipework shall be painted colour banded and lettered in accordance with the “Corrosion

Protection, Painting & Labelling Section” of this specification.

23.06.14 PIPE CLEANING

All systems shall be thoroughly cleaned out before any equipment is connected which may be

damaged or affected by items of particles in the pipes (valves, controls, chiller sets, pump0s

etc).

After initial cleaning, each system shall be flushed with town’s water dosed with a cleaning

agent. Circulation shall be maintained until samples drawn off show that the system is clean

23.06.15 ABS PIPING

ABS pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with Australian Standard AS3518

and must be branded accordingly. The pipe manufacturer shall be accredited with ISO 9002 –

1994. Manufacturer shall be Eurapipe or approved equivalent. The installation shall comprise

standard fittings and purpose made fittings to suit the installation as detailed on the drawings,

and shall have access at all changes in direction for cleaning. The complete installation shall be

fully in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, including allowances for

expansion. Installation shall be in accordance with AS3690 “Installation of ABS Pipe Systems”

and the manufacturers recommendations.

The Mechanical Trade shall ensure all personnel involved with the installation are familiar with

the installation procedures for the ABS piping systems. The diameter and class of pipe

indicated in the associated drawings shall not be varied without prior approval from the

Engineer. The layout of all pipework shall be checked on site prior to installation and all care

shall be taken to ensure a neat and workmanlike appearance of the installation.

Pipe anchor sleeves are required where pipes pass through external concrete walls and shall be

supplied as a proprietary item by the manufacturer for fixing into the formwork prior to casting

of the concrete wall. It is the responsibility of the Mechanical Trade to co-ordinate these works

with the Builder.

23.06.15.01 Jointing

Only purpose made ABS solvent cement and MEK cleaner are approved for jointing. All pipe

shall be cut square and swarf etc. removed prior to jointing. Pipe shall be inserted to full depth

of fitting socket. Installed fittings which do not have pipe inserted to full depth shall be

considered below required standard and shall be rectified at the Installer’s expense. Backing

rings shall be used at all flanged joints. The use of solvent cemented sockets, flanges and

shoulder style couplings are permitted to join pipe and fittings as required. Equipment

connections 50mm and less may be threaded. ABS pipe connections to other materials may not

be made by cementing or flued joints.

The use of a hand operated lever winch or other suitable means of supplying a steady effort

sufficient to apply fittings to pipe shall be used when jointing pipe systems above 100mm. The

use of hammers etc, to apply fittings is NOT permitted at ANY time.

PIPEWORK



23.06.15.02 Support

The maximum distance between supports shall be in accordance with the manufacturers

recommendations. The width of pipe supports shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Pipe supports shall not exert undue pressure on the pipe wall or deform the

pipe wall against the clamp or support. All clamps on horizontal pipe shall allow axial

movement of the pipe.



23.07.00 VALVES

23.07.01 GENERAL

Valves shall:

. as far as possible be of a single make.

. be suitable for the temperature, pressure and fluid of the duty to which they are applied;

. have the direction to open clearly marked on the handwheel;

. pass factory pressure tests as specified in Specification Section "Commissioning and

Testing";

. be labelled as specified below;

. have connections selected from the types permitted for the piping of the system in which

the valve is mounted;

. be entirely suitable and correctly sized for each application and unless otherwise shown

shall be of pipeline size, except in the case of control valves which shall be selected to

manufacturer’s recommendation and selection data.

. have operators which require a force not exceeding 20 kgf to close the valve under worst

operation conditions.

. Valves 50 mm (2”) diameter and smaller shall have threaded ends, valves 65 mm (21/2”)

and larger shall be flanged.

Valve labels shall:

. be clipped in a conspicuous position on each valve;

. be engraved brass tags showing the fluid classification letters and the valve number in

characters 6mm high;

. exhibit the same identification as shown on piping diagrams.

Valves shall not generate excessive noise. Sound power levels shall not exceed the following

when the valve is operating under the most severe normal working conditions.

Octave Band Centre Sound Power Level dB

Frequency Hz Ref. 10

-12

A

Watts

B 8 125 59 74

11 250 52 68

14 500 47 63

.17 1K 43 60

.20 2K 42 57

.23 4K 38 55

A - valves in occupied spaces, or behind panels adjacent to occupied spaces.

B - valves in plantrooms.

VALVES



Valve materials shall comply with the following minimum standards:

Brass - DZR Copper Alloy to CW602N

Bronze - BS1400 LG-2-C/ASTM B62

Cast Iron - BS 1452 Grade 14/ASTM 126 class B

Stainless Steel - Stainless Steel Grade 316 and CF8M

23.07.02 ISOLATING VALVES

Isolating valves shall be provided for isolating equipment or services for maintenance or on-off

control.

Valves shall be of ball or butterfly type.

23.07.02.01 Ball Valves

Service Chilled, Condenser & LPHW

Selection pressure 2100 kPa

Selection temperature 5 - 95 deg.C

Body material DZR Copper Alloy to CW602N

Valve material Polished chromium plating over nickel substrate on DZR

copper alloy to CW602N.

Seals and seats Poly-tetrafluoroethylene

Shaft DZR copper alloy to CW602N.

Approved makes Hyflo-Isis or equal approved.

23.07.02.02 Butterfly Valves

Service Chilled, Condenser & LPHW


Selection temperature 5 - 120 deg.C

Body material Cast iron or ductile iron.

Body type Lugged with holes tapped for set screws

Blade material CF8 or CF8M stainless steel

Seats and seals Replaceable rollout resistant type of NBR, EPDM or

polychloroprene.

Shaft Stainless steel type 304 or 416

Approved makes Hyflo or equal approved

VALVES



23.07.03 FLOW CONTROL VALVES

Flow control valves shall be provided for manual flow control. Automatic flow control valves

are specified in the specification section "Controls".

Valves shall be of butterfly, double regulating globe, or eccentric plug types.

23.07.03.01 Automatic Flow Control Valves

Shall be provided as manufactured by Flow Design Inc. or approved equal.

Selection of the valves to be provided with manufacturer’s requirements.

Service: CHW, HHW & CCW

Selection Pressure: 2500kPa

Selection Temperature: 0-120°C

Body Material: Sizes up to DN50 of DZR copper alloy, sizes over DN50 of

Ductile Iron.

Body Type: Sizes up to DN50 of Union Inlet and fixed female outlet with

integral isolating valve.

Sizes over DN50 of Wafer style suitable for fitting to both

ANSI 150 and 300 Class Flanges.

Cartridge Material: All sizes of Grade 304 stainless steel housing and 17-7ph

stainless steel springs.

‘O’ Rings: All of EPDM unless otherwise specified.

Approved Makes: AutoFlow or equal approved.

All valves shall be dynamic and maintain their flow rate regardless of pressure drop changes

within the system. The valves to be pre-set, correctly tagged and require no on site water

balancing during the commissioning process.

23.07.03.02 Butterfly Valves

As previously specified.

Valves shall have adjustable stops and means of locking the operator in at least ten positions

between open and closed.

23.07.03.03 Double Regulating Valves

These valves are suitable for both flow control and isolation duties.

Service Chilled, Condenser and LPHW

Selection pressure 2000 kPa (50mm and below)

1600 or 2500 kPa (65mm and above)

Selection temperature 5 - 95oC

Body material DZR Copper alloy of Ametal, Cast Iron or Ductile Iron.

Valve material Copper alloy of Ametal with PTFE disc.

Seat Integral

VALVES



Seals Packed gland

Shaft DZR copper alloy of Ametal

Manometer connections Valves shall have valved manometer connections and a

optional drain valve.

CV ratings Kv ratings shall be available

Valves shall have adjustable memory stops.

Approved makes STAD and STAF – Tour and Andersson

23.07.03.04 Eccentric Plug Cocks

Valves shall be De-Zurich eccentric plug type selected for a pressure of 200 psi/1300 kPa and

for the temperatures specified in clause "Double Regulating Valves".

Valves shall have adjustable stops and means of locking the operating in at least ten positions

between open and closed.

23.07.03.05 Manometer Connections

When other than double regulating valves are used for flow control, valved manometer tappings

for flow measurement shall be provided either across the alternative flow regulating valve or

across an alternative fitting for which Kv ratings shall be supplied. Hyflo P/T test plugs of

standard or extended style.

23.07.04 CHECK VALVES

Check valves shall be fitted where shown on drawing and shall be used to prevent fluid or gas

from flowing in opposite to the design direction of flow.

Valves shall be used for all water services and shall be spring loaded flap type with two contra-

rotating semi-circular flaps.


Selection temperature 5.95oC

Body material Cast iron or stainless steel

Valve Stainless steel CF8 or CF8M

Seat Integral

Seals NBR or EPDM vulcanised to seat.

butadiene

Hinge and Stop pins Type 304 stainless steel

Springs Type 304 stainless steel

VALVES



Bearings Fitted between all metal components and of PTFE.

Approved makes Hyflo or equal approved.

23.07.05 GAUGE VALVES

Gauge valves shall be provided at all pressure gauge and instrument connections to services.

Valves shall be 10mm ball valves.


Selection temperature 135oC

Body material DZR Copper Alloy to CW602N

Ball material Polished chromium plating over nickel substrate on DZR

copper alloy to CW602N

Seals Poly-Tetrafluoroethylene

Pipe connections Screwed

Duty fluids Water

23.07.06 AIR ELIMINATORS

Automatic air eliminators shall be fitted at all high points in water systems and shall vent non-

condensables collected at the valve.

Integral Check type isolating valves shall be fitted between the eliminator and the system.

Vents shall be piped to discharge over the nearest waste.

Approved makes Flexvent or Flexvent Super.

23.07.06.01 Specifications

Selection pressure 1,000 kPa

Selection temperature 5 - 120oC

Body material Brass, bronze or malleable cast iron

Valve material Polypropylene/EPDM or stainless steel type 316

Float material Polypropylene/EPDM or stainless steel type 316

Pipe connection screwed.

VALVES



23.07.07 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

Pressure relief valves shall be fitted to pressure vessels when required by code and as shown on

drawing in pipelines.

Valves shall have drain connections which shall be piped to waste.

23.07.07.01 Specification

Selection pressure to suit duty

Set pressure to suit pressure vessel design or pressure reducing valve

setting.

23.07.08 STRAINERS

Strainers shall be used to collect particles of foreign matter in fluids.

Valves larger than 50mm nominal size shall be fitted with drain valves and drain piping

extending to discharge over a waste tundish.

Selection pressure Minimum 1,400 kPa

Selection temperature 5.95oC

Maximum resistance to

flow of fluid strained Strainers to be sized for maximum DP of 15 kPa when screen element

is clean.

Body material Carbon steel, cast iron or bronze

Screen material Type 304 stainless steel

Screen opening 1.0mm for size DN15-DN50 in screwed connections and 3.0mm for

size DN50-DN350 in flanged connections.

Screen Of perforated mesh in sufficient thickness and of a design to prevent

collapse when clean.

Cover gaskets Fibre

Piping connections To suit piping joint specification.

Approved makes Hyflo or equal approved

23.07.09 GAUGE AND INSTRUMENT FITTINGS

Thermometer pockets, thermometers, pressure gauge tappings, pressure gauges and flow fittings

as shown on drawings, or where necessary, shall be installed for the successful operation,

commissioning, recording and energy management of each system, in accordance with all

relevant Codes.

VALVES



Except where permanent instruments are installed, the fittings shall be of the universal type such

as Hyflo to enable both pressure and temperature to be checked.

Approved pockets shall be installed in pipework for all gauges and instruments in positions

where no adverse effects occur to flow conditions and of such material that electrolytic action is

avoided (bronze, stainless steel or brass as appropriate).

Pockets shall project sufficiently far into the pipe to give a good reading and shall be complete

with a minimum of 50mm depth of approved heat conducting fluid and shall be capped.

Pipes smaller than 65mm shall be enlarged to accommodate pockets without loss in flow area.

Pockets shall be vertical or set at an angle to retain heat transfer medium.

Bosses for pressure gauge tappings and similar purposes shall be of the standard inside fitted

type, welded at right angles to the pipes and tapped as required for each application. The

lengths and outside diameter of pipe bosses shall be kept to a minimum consistent with pipe

sizes.

All gauges on pump assemblies and similar equipment shall be neatly installed on to a pressed

galvanised sheetmetal gauge panel or solid hardwood timber panel, to approval, located clear of

vibration, have siphon and, where required pulse snubbers.

Ball valves shall be fitted at all pressure gauges and at all water coils, heat exchangers,

condensers and chiller vessels.

Thermometer pockets shall be fitted at all water coils, heat exchangers, condenser and chiller

vessels and where thermometers are specified.

Gate type valves in lieu of pet cocks may be used for pressure gauge connections, and shall be

rated for the duty pressure of the pipework system.

23.07.10 ABS PIPEWORK VALVES

23.07.10.01 Isolating Valves (Up to 50mm)

Isolating valves up to 50mm diameter shall be ASV Stubbe hand operated PVC butterfly valves,

as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd or approved equal.

23.07.10.02 Isolating Valves (65mm to 200mm)

Isolating valves from 65mm to 200mm diameter shall be Praher Type S4 hand operated

butterfly valves as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd, or approved equal.

23.07.10.03 Isolating Valves (over 200mm)

Isolating valves over 200mm diameter shall be SAFi industrial polypropylene butterfly valves

complete with hand wheel and reduction gearbox as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd, or

approved equal.

23.07.10.04 Check Valves (All Sizes)

Check valves shall be all PVC up to 300mm in size and polypropylene for sizes above this.

These shall be Praher Type S470 as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd or approved equal.

VALVES



23.07.10.05 Strainers

Strainers shall be fitted to all pumps and shall be of the Y type with nylon coated (FBE) cast

iron bodies and Grade 316 stainless steel mesh having maximum diameter of 20mm of

openings. Strainers shall be fitted with valve and drain line to waste to facilitate cleaning and be

as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd or approved equal.



23.08.00 INSULATION

23.08.01 GENERAL

This section of the Specification deals with the materials and methods of construction to be used

in providing all thermal and acoustic linings for ductwork, and piping .

All insulation shall be non-hygroscopic, non combustible when tested in accordance with BS476

Part 4 and have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.04 w/mk at 20oC

All insulation shall be:

. neatly cut to the required size

. have parallel edges and surfaces

. uniform density and surface finish

. have all joints close butted, gaps will not be accepted

. be applied to clean surfaces

. fit snug to the surface insulated

. not be crushed

. be carried out by experienced personnel.

Where there is any anomaly between the scope or intent of this Specification and the drawings

refer to the Engineer for a ruling.

The extent of insulation is shown on the drawings using markings detailed on the drawings.

Submit samples of insulation materials, adhesives and vapour barriers, together with certificates

detailing Combustibility and Early Fire Hazard Properties in terms of BS476 and details of

fastening methods, for each type of pipe and duct insulation and obtain approval from the

Engineer for same prior to commencing work.

The supply and installation of insulation (machined wood blocks, pre-formed cork blocks, or

pre-formed insulation sections) at pipe supports shall be arranged between the Mechanical

Trade and their Insulation Contractor. It is stressed that vapour seals shall be continuous

through underneath all pipe support brackets and clamps.

All insulating materials, finishes, coverings, adhesives, mastics, coatings, sealers and primers

shall be classified as Class 1 surface spread when tested in accordance with BS476 Part 7 and

have a maximum Fire Propogation Index of 12.6 to BS476, Part 6 and a Class 0 rating to BS476

Part 6 (Fire Propogation).

All adhesives, vapour coatings and sealers shall be selected and applied in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations for the application to give a permanent bond and/or seal under

all conditions of installation and operation.

The general intent is to provide a sealed insulation which will not permit sweating of the pipes

or ducts and its supports and which will not retain moisture to the detriment of it’s insulating

capability.

Valves and fittings must be insulated and finished in the same manner and thickness as piping.

Moulded factory shaped sectional pipe coverings, factory or job-fabricated may be used subject

to approval.

Alternative methods and materials to those specified hereafter shall have been submitted and

accepted at the time of tendering in accordance with the Conditions of Tendering. They shall

INSULATION



achieve overall heat transfer co-efficients and moisture vapour permeance not greater than the

methods and materials specified.

23.08.02 SCOPE OF WORK

The extent of the insulation works described hereafter comprises specifically of the following

works.

Sheetmetal

. Internal ductwork where shown on the drawings.

. External ductwork where shown on the drawings.

. Fire rated ductwork where shown on the drawings.

Pipework

. All chilled water pipework

. All condensate drain piping

. All suction gas refrigerant pipework

23.08.03 DUCTWORK - EXTERNAL INSULATION

External insulation materials shall be non hydroscopic, have a thermal conductivity co-efficient

not greater than 0.04 W/mK @ 20°C and a water permeability better than 0.09 ugm/Nh to

BS 4370/2.

A mininmum thickness of 25mm unless shown otherwise on the drawings.

Insulating materials shall be 24 Kg/m3 density flexible fibreglass duct insulation for ducting

within the building air conditioned areas and above ceilings.

Insulating materials shall be 48 Kg/m3 density semi rigid fibreglass duct insulation for ducting

within concealled spaces ,building main risers and plant rooms that are not fully air conditioned

spaces. Detailed calculations shall be forwarded to the Engineer for comment to ensure

excessive heat gain and any condensation is minimized.

Insulating materials shall be minimum 70 Kg/m3 density rigid fibreglass duct insulation for

ducting external to the building or exposed to direct sunlight. The insulation must ensure a

maximum temperature rise not greater than 1 degree C. Outdoor duct insulation shall also be

protected against weather and mechanical damage by 20 gauge Aluminium cladding.

Insulation facing and vapour seal where applicable shall be factory applied Sisalation 450 or

equal reinforced aluminium foil glued to the insulation material using adhesives.

All insulation must be installed to manufacturers instructions and recommendations.

On ducts up to 375mm wide, insulation shall be held in place by sealing strips glued over the

longitudinal joints and no fixings to the ducts are required.

On horizontal ducts 375-750mm width insulation shall be fastened on the bottom surface only

using standard stud weld steel pins, along the centreline at 375mm spacings and held with speed

clips not less than 25mm diameter.

INSULATION



On ducts 750mm and larger insulation shall be fastened with pins and speed clips at maximum

380mm spacings.

On riser ducts, sufficient pins and clips shall be used to support the insulation vertically. On

sides larger than 600mm, pins and clips shall be used at maximum 380mm spacings.

Insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted up against flanges and adjoining insulation.

Joints between pieces of insulation shall be made by gluing a 100mm wide sealing strip of

Sisalation 450 centrally over the joint onto the vapour barrier except at flange joints where a

150mm wide sealing strip shall be used. A minimum of 50mm lap shall be achieved in every

case.

Wherever possible, insulation shall be applied to ducts prior to them being lifted up into

position, particularly where they are installed hard against walls or slabs.

Banding of insulation is not acceptable.

23.08.04 FIRE RATED DUCTWORK

Fire rated ductwork shall be of a proprietary manufacturer such as ‘VICUCLAD’ or approved

equal to Civil Defence Approval. Alternatively, a spray-on “non-asbestos” material may be

installed on sheetmetal ducts. The final finish shall not exceed 120mm, for a 2 hour fire rating,

for combustion from the outside in and the inside out. Spray-on rating shall be trowel finished

where exposed to view. Duct mountings must take into account the wet weight of the duct and

fire rating.

23.08.05 REFRIGERATION SUCTION GAS PIPEWORK

Refrigeration suction gas pipework shall be insulated using moulded section self-extinguishing

grade expanded polystyrene foam insulated with two coats of thick bitumen base vapour sealing

mastic such that the vapour seal has a permeance of not more than 0.000572 ugNs. The vapour

seal shall be reinforced with a layer of open weave No. 10 fibreglass cloth between coats. The

vapour seal coating shall be suitable for use on the styrene foam insulation.

In plantrooms and other exposed areas insulation shall be faced and vapour sealed with

Sisalation 450 and then sheathed in 0.4mm zincanneal formed to suit.

Pipework inside conditioner units, inside riser shafts, inside masonry ducts and return air

chambers shall be deemed to be concealed.

Insulation at bends etc. shall be cut and mitred to fit neatly and tight. Insulation o straight pipes

shall be butted together tightly.

On straight pipe the longitudinal joints shall be staggered axially and shall not form a

continuous straight line.

Insulation shall be stopped square at each side of valves, unions and flanges clear of bolts.

Zincanneal sheathing shall be held in position using not less than three galvanised steel bands on

each section. Sheathing at bends shall be neatly cut and formed in "lobsterback" sections and

pre-drilled and fastened using pop rivets or straps so that the vapour barrier underneath is not

penetrated.

INSULATION



Pipe hangers shall be 'D' clamps or circumferential clamps over wood or cork blocks of the

same diameter as the insulation in which case the insulation shall be butted up each side and the

vapour seal (and sheathing if exposed) shall be carried through between the clamp and the wood

or cork block to give a continuous vapour barrier.

Alternatively hangers may be 'D' clamps or circumferential clamps around sections of pre-

formed polystyrene foam insulation with rolled 1.6mm galvanised sheet steel half round

supports 500mm long under the insulation in which case the vapour seal (and sheathing if

exposed) shall be carried through under the 1.6mm support and the clamp to give a continuous

vapour barrier.

Where expanded polystyrene foam insulation is used the styrene shall be stopped short 300mm

on each side where pipes penetrate fire barriers. The section of pipe through the fire barrier

shall be insulated with rockwool or fibreglass moulded section pipe insulation with aluminium

foil facing the vapour seal.

23.08.06 SMALL REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK

Refrigerant suction pipework under 25mm diameter may be insulated with a Superlon,

Armaflex or Bradflex based insulation system, subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Minimum thickness shall be 9.5 mm and thermal conductivity of not greater than 0.039 W/mK

@ 24°C.

Wherever refrigerant suction and liquid lines are run in contact with each other they may share

common insulation formed to match the cross-section of the two (2) pipes or be insulated

separately.

Insulation shall be vapour sealed against condensation on the suction line only with unsplit

insulation, slipped over the work as it progresses. Insulation shall be on cork blocks and vapour

sealed over. All joints in the insulation shall be glued with an approved waterproof adhesive

and taped.

23.08.07 CHILLED WATER PIPEWORK

Pipework insulation shall be preformed pipe sections manufactured by a recognized

manufacturer as further detailed:

. Chilled water - Closed cell polyethylene foam, density = 50 kg/m³, not greater

than 0.034W/mK @ 20°C or high density mineral wool,

density = 80kg/m³, not greater than 0.035 W/mK @ 20°C.

- Noise reduction up to 32 db(A)

Chilled water pipework shall be installed with a suitable vapour seal.

Insulation shall be stopped square at each side of valves, unions and flanges clear of bolts.

Insulated pipework installed exposed in plantrooms and elsewhere subject to mechanical

damage, shall be sheathed.

Zincanneal or Aluminum sheathing shall be held in position using not less than three galvanised

steel bands on each section. Sheathing at bends shall be neatly cut and formed in “lobsterback”

INSULATION



sections and pre-drilled and fastened using pop rivets or straps so that the vapour barrier

underneath is not penetrated.

. 0.7 mm cladding for piping up to 65 mm diameter

. 0.9 mm cladding for piping greater than 65 mm diameter.

Pipe hangers shall be ‘D’ clamps or circumferential clamps over phenolic foam blocks of the

same diameter as the insulation in which case the insulation shall be butted up each side and the

vapour seal (and sheathing if exposed) shall be carried through between the clamp and the block

to give a continuous vapour barrier.

The following minimum thicknesses of thermal insulation shall be provided:

. 19 mm for pipe diameter up to 75 mm

. 32 mm for pipe diameters 100 to 250 mm

. 50 mm for pipe diameters 300 and above.

All concealed uPVC condensate drain pipework shall be insulated with 13 mm thick 50 kg/m3

closed cell polyethylene insulation.

Condensate pipework in plantrooms shall be insulated as noted on drawings.

23.08.08 SAMPLES

Submit samples of all types of insulation for approval complete with full technical details.

Approved samples will be retained on site for future reference.



23.09.00 WATER TREATMENT

23.09.01 GENERAL

Water treatment shall be provided as specified in the following clauses.

23.09.02 FLUSHING

The piping of each system shall be thoroughly flushed out before the system is placed into

operation.

Flushing shall:

. remove all foreign materials left or deposited in the piping systems during their erection;

. be carried out using a water, solvent and corrosion inhibitor solution.

The systems shall:

. be filled with flushing solution, the solution circulated for at least 48 hours and then

drained;

. have strainers and filters cleaned as often as necessary during flushing and at the end of

the cycle;

. be refilled with a clean flushing solution, the solution circulated for at least 24 hours and

then drained;

. have strainers and filters cleaned;

. system shall be re-filled with clean water, re-circulated or run through for a further four

(4) hours, and again drained and flushed. The flushing shall continue until the effluent is

clear, colourless, odourless, free from suspended solids and such that the iron level is not

more than 10ppm and the conductivity is no more than 30µs/cm greater than the make-up

water. Test reports to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

If after the third flushing the solution drained is passed as clean by the Engineer the system shall

be left drained until the plant is ready for commissioning. Filling of the system for

commissioning shall not take place until the water treatment is ready for simultaneous

commissioning.

If the engineer does not pass the system as clean, flushing cycles shall be repeated until the

system is passed as being clean.

23.09.03 SYSTEMS OPERATED WITHOUT WATER TREATMENT

If systems are operated without water treatment being provided or if water treatment plant

malfunctions the Mechanical Trade shall drain the system and open for inspection where

instructed by the Engineer.

Any fouling shall be removed and any damaged surfaces replaced all to the approval of the

engineer.

WATER TREATMENT



23.09.03.01 Hydrostatic Pressure Testing

All water for hydrostatic pressure testing of pipework systems, shall be introduced via a contact

head water meter which shall control a chemical dosing pump, so that the required quantity of

chemical can be introduced while the water is being introduced. This chemically treated water

shall remain in each section of the system until all sections have been pressure tested and the

complete system is ready for the cleaning operation. The chemical used shall be of the oxygen

scavenging corrosion inhibitor type.

23.09.04 WATER TREATMENT

An approved expert water treatment company shall be employed to carry out water treatment.

The expert company shall supply all chemicals for system start up of the chilled water and run

around coil water. Chemicals sufficient for contractual maintenance period shall be arranged by

approve suppliers such as Culligan, Metito, NALCO or approved equal.

The expert company shall:

. study the scheduled systems and take note of: materials in the system, water circulation

rates, water make up rates, system operating conditions including idle periods, sources of

water contamination at the site, current regulations governing chemicals in waste water

and all other relevant parameters;

. propose a water treatment programme to control: corrosion, scale, algae, bacteria and

suspended solids in the chilled water system (proposals shall include treatment during

commissioning, operating and idle phases;

. supply all treatment materials required for commissioning and the first year of operation;

. supply all labour necessary to commission the systems and achieve stable operating

conditions;

. supply skilled supervision of the treatment of the systems during the first year’s

operating. This shall include at least twelve (12) site visits at not greater than monthly

intervals (an inspection report shall be submitted to the engineer following each visit).

A microbiological evaluation to assess control of microbiological load in the system shall be

conducted in the first three (3) months of operation.

The system piping shall make provision for a dosing pot, valves and fittings in the plantroom to

facilitate water treatment of the closed system with connections for necessary equipment to

bring the water to acceptable limits as follows:

1) Ph 9.0 – 9.5

2) Fe content <1

3) Chloride Max 800ppm

4) Molybdate 30 to 70

5) Suspended Solids (NTU) <150

6) Total Hardness 80

7) ALk (M) and (P) 100

8) TDS 150

WATER TREATMENT



An appropriate corrosion rack shall be provided by the contractor for the first three (3) months.

The contractor shall conduct 30 day corrosion coupon analysis on carbon steel as per ASTM

Standards and report results to the engineer.



23.10.00 CORROSION PROTECTION, PAINTING & LABELLING

23.10.01 GENERAL

Corrosion protection shall comply with following clauses of this section of the specification.

Where galvanising is mentioned throughout the specification it shall mean hot dip galvanising

complying with the treatment specified in clause 'Galvanising'.

Corrosion protection shall be applied after all cutting, drilling and welding has been completed.

Sheetmetal work is exempted from the clause above except in the case of equipment casings

containing water or having cold surfaces on which condensation could form.

There shall be no pockets anywhere in the system and equipment installed which can collect and

retain water.

There shall be no direct contact between dissimilar metals in other than permanently dry

location. In moist locations l mm thick polychloroprene, PVC or polythene gaskets shall

separate metals.

Treated surfaces shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to the coatings.

The repair of defective or damaged surface coatings shall be at the Mechanical Trade’s expense.

Cleaning and repair shall be in accordance with the treatment originally specified.

23.10.02 PAINTING, GENERAL

All painting shall be performed in a neat, thorough and workmanlike manner.

All paint shall be mixed, thinned and applied to comply with manufacturer's instructions.

The first coat of paint shall be applied immediately after cleaning and the interval between

subsequent coats shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended period.

Alternate coats shall be of different shades to facilitate application and inspection.

Each coat shall be uniform and shall be free from runs, sags and other imperfections.

Surfaces adjacent to surfaces which are to be cleaned and painted shall be adequately protected

during the cleaning and painting.

Upon completion of painting work the Mechanical Trade or their representative shall remove

any paint spilt on adjacent surfaces leaving their finish in a clean and acceptable condition.

Wherever practicable, metal work shall be painted in the factory before dispatch to the site of

the work. Metal work that requires blast cleaning shall be fully primed before leaving the

factory.

Surfaces to be painted that will be inaccessible after installation shall be completely painted

prior to installation.

Paint that is loose, weakly bonded, blistered, abraded or otherwise defective shall be removed

and the surface re-cleaned and repainted.

CORROSION PROTECTION, PAINTING & LABELLING



Before applying subsequent coats of paint the Mechanical Trade or their representative shall

clean and repair all areas of previous coats which are defective or damaged.

After installation of equipment any damage to finished painted surfaces shall be made good.

After completion of the testing of all components of the plant, all equipment exposed to view,

from floor level, (or catwalks where provided) located in plantrooms, fan rooms, equipment

rooms, car parks, open air areas and similar locations shall be painted.

All painting shall be done by experienced tradesmen with first class quality paints brought to

site in the manufacturer's sealed containers. All coats of paint on any one item shall be of the

same type and manufacture and shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer.

23.10.03 SURFACE PREPARATION

Surface preparation of steel shall comply with the following:

23.10.03.01 Degreasing

All oil, grease and dirt shall be removed from the surface by a suitable solvent.

23.10.03.02 Hand Cleaning

Following degreasing all dust, mill scale and other foreign substances likely to affect the

adherence and uniformity of the finished coating shall be removed to preparation grade.

23.10.03.03 Blast Cleaning

Following degreasing the surface shall be treated to a class 3 standard of surface preparation by

grit or sand blast cleaning. The surface roughness shall be appropriate for the specified

treatment, i.e. painting or metal spraying.

23.10.03.04 Pickling

Following degreasing and hand cleaning to remove heavy deposits of oil, grease, dirt and other

matter not removed by pickling, the surface to be treated shall be cleaned free from scale and

rust.

Surface preparation of non-ferrous metals shall comply with the following:

23.10.03.05 Hand and Machine

As above except that the finished surface shall be uniformly clean and bright.

Surface preparation of concrete shall comply with the following:

. The surface shall be smooth and uniformly textured.

. The concrete shall be cured for the minimum time recommended for the paint applied.

. Surfaces shall be dusted down before application of paint.

Weld, spatters, slag, burrs, casting sand and any other surface irregularities shall be removed

before preparing surfaces.




23.10.04 PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS

23.10.04.01 Galvanising

Surfaces shall be prepared by pickling.

The zinc coating shall:

. be applied to all surfaces;

. be smooth, uniform and free from defects;

. not clog intricate surfaces such as screw threads;

. be applied to give average weight of 750 g/m² and to give a minimum 600 g/m².

Components damaged during galvanising shall be made good to approval or replaced.

23.10.04.02 Painting of Metal (Enamel Finish)

Surfaces shall be prepared by degreasing and hand cleaning.

Galvanised surfaces shall be wash primed, washed and dried.

Surfaces shall be given:

. one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer;

. one undercoat;

. one finishing coat of enamel.

23.10.04.03 Painting of Concrete

Surfaces shall be prepared as specified in clause 'Surface Preparation'.

Surfaces shall be given:

. one coat of cement sealer;

. one undercoat;

. one finishing coat of enamel.

23.10.05 PAINTING MATERIAL

Paint such as Enamel, Enamel Undercoat and Red Oxide Zinc Chromate Primer, shall fully

comply with requirements of the current British Standards:

Paint shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's sealed containers bearing the

manufacturer's label, the date of manufacturer and the batch number.

Where possible all paints used for one painting system shall be supplied by one manufacturer.

23.10.06 PAINTING SCOPE

All visible parts of the specified works shall be painted to approval except where such painting

is specified as being carried out by others. In addition all external parts of the installation

subject to corrosion shall be painted with a suitable protective coating.

Finish painting of the following shall be considered as a minimum requirement:




. Ductwork exposed to weather

. Pipework, valves and fittings exposed to weather

. All plant and equipment exposed to weather.

. MCCs, control panels, conduits, cable trays and ducts exposed to weather.

. All air outlets

. Any minor sundry items

. Car park ductwork

23.10.07 LABELLING

After painting all equipment ducts and pipework shall be identified with Safetyman labels in

accordance with BS1710 “Identification of Pipelines and Services". Labels shall be located at

approximately 3m intervals in plantrooms, and labels shall be provided at each service access

opening into pipe shafts. Where pipes run together the labels shall be grouped together.



23.11.00 PIPED MEDICAL GASES, VACUUM, MEDICAL AIR AND ANAESTHETIC GAS

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS

23.11.01 MEDICAL GAS

23.11.01.01 Extent of Work

The work shall include for a design check and co-ordination, supply, manufacturer’s work

testing and certification, installation, site testing and commissioning the following systems:

. Piped Medical Gases (including oxygen (O2) and Nitrous Oxide (N2O) complete with

manifolds, pipework, valves, fittings and terminal units including cylinders for pressure

testing.

. Piped Medical Vacuum System complete with central plant, piping, valves, fittings and

terminal units.

. Piped Medical Air System 4 bar complete with central plant, piping, valves fittings and

terminal units.

. Piped Surgical Air System 7 bar complete with central plant, piping, valves fittings and

terminal units.

. Alarm panels, essential services power supplies and all associated controls and

interconnecting wiring.

. Dedicated Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging Disposal Systems.

All works shall be carried out by a Medical Gas Specialist registered to BSEN 9001 who has a

minimum of 5 years experience in the Medical Gas field and has dedicated office and

maintenance facilities in the UAE. The specialist shall ensure that all systems are installed as

per the recommendations made in the UK, Health and Technical Memorandum, HTM2022,

C11 and appropriate British Standards and Codes of Practice.

The specialist shall be responsible for preparing detailed design checks, flow rate calculations,

pressure drop calculations, isometric workshop and construction drawings and provide the final

certification of all systems.

The specialist shall supply four (4) sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

23.11.02 ASSOCIATED WORKS

The following work associated with the medical gas installation shall be undertaken and co-

ordinated by the Contractor.

. Provision of openings and core holes through the structure.

. Building in of conduits, wall boxes, wiring access boxes.

. Making good all walls and floors after chasing provided chasing is done before final

finishes are applied.

. Essential services sub-mains from the main switchboard terminated at the central plant.

. Circuit protection units on main switchboard for power circuits serving central pant.

PIPED MEDICAL GASES, VACUUM, MEDICAL AIR AND ANAESTHETIC GAS

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



23.11.03 STANDARDS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS

All equipment supplied and work carried out shall comply with the requirements of the latest

editions of HTM 2022, C11-Model Engineering Specification and EN737, Parts 1-4 and

relevant B.S. Codes of Practice referred therein.

The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the local

Supply Authority.

All equipment shall be “CE” marked under the Medical Devices Directives 93/42/EEC with

approval from notified body No.0301 (BVQI).

23.11.04 EQUIPMENT AND UNIFORMITY

All items of equipment shall be of first grade with regard to design and manufacture and shall be

completely satisfactory for operation, control, safety and maintenance under all conditions of

service.

Uniformity of type and manufacture of switchgear, controlgear, fittings and accessories shall be

preserved throughout the whole of the installation.

23.11.05 PIPEWORK, FLANGES AND SUPPORTS

23.11.05.01 General

The piped distribution system shall use copper pipes manufactured from phosphorous de-

oxidised non-arsenical copper (Grade CWO24A) to EN1412 and be manufactured to metric

outside diameters in accordance with EN1057: 1996 R250 (half hard). Pipes are to be

degreased suitable for oxygen use and cleanliness is to be maintained by filling each pipe with

high purity nitrogen, fitting suitable end caps and protectively wrapping.

Fittings shall be end feed type, manufactured from the same grade of copper as the pipes and be

in accordance with the requirements of BS EN1254-1: 1998 Part 1. Fittings shall be degreased

suitable for oxygen use and supplied sealed in protective polythene bags.

The bags shall be securely fastened and clearly labelled “For use with Piped Medical Gas”.

Copper to Copper joints shall be made on site using a silver-copper-phosphorous brazing alloy

to BS1845 using an oxygen free nitrogen inert gas shield and no flux. Copper to brass or

gunmetal joints shall not be made on site.

Pipework shall be sized and run as shown on drawings or specified. Drawings are schematic

indicating the route, connections and fittings required but may not in all parts show piping in its

true position. This shall not absolve the Contractor from their responsibility for the proper

erection of pipework suitable for the duty intended.

Pipework shall be suitable for the working and test pressures specified.

23.11.05.02 Handling, Preparation, Installation

Piping shall be carefully handled to avoid damage to piping and building surfaces.

Only new, clean and undamaged piping shall be used.


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS




Pipes shall be machine cut by a method giving square ends and undistorted sections.


Pipework shall:

. be neatly installed in locations shown on drawings or specified;

. have risers arranged vertical and horizontal runs either parallel or normal to enclosure

walls;

. have parallel runs neatly grouped;

. not transmit vibration perceptible to human senses nor noise perceptible above the noise

of components for which sound power level limits have been specified;

. be installed with provision for expansion and contraction;

. not interfere with the removal of equipment, coils or other piping, nor restrict access to

doors, hatches or windows;

. pass all specified tests prior to being insulated or otherwise concealed.

23.11.05.03 Brazing

Brazing shall:

. be carried out by skilled tradesmen;

. be carried out on joints which are clean and properly prepared.

. Brazed joints shall be of the spigot and socket type achieved either by use of capillary

joint fittings or machine formed integral sockets in one end of the meeting pipes. Integral

sockets shall have a length of one pipe diameter or 25mm maximum.

. Brazed pipeline jointing for copper to copper joints made on site shall utilize a copper

phosphorous brazing alloy type CPI BS1845 and an inert gas shield and no flux.

. Inert Gas Shielding shall be provided internally for all on site fluxless jointing and hot

forming of bends. The inert gas shall be oxygen free grade nitrogen.

. Each cylinder or group of cylinders shall be fitted with a pressure regulator and a means

of providing and controlling a high flush purge and a low flush purge.

23.11.05.04 Flanges

Flanges shall

. be of a compatible material with the piping joined;

. be brazed to copper piping;

. Match flanges on equipment or valves and be suitable for the temperatures and pressures

of the system in which installed;


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



. have a gasket selected for the duty fitted in the joint;

. be connected by zinc plated bolts, nuts and washers.

23.11.05.05 Change in Diameter

Fittings providing a streamlined change in diameter shall be used to connect pipes of different

diameters.

23.11.05.06 Supports

All piping shall be supported within 150 mm of all change of direction and branches and at

intervals specified in HTM 2022 using a suitable metallic, non-ferrous material or a ferrous

material suitably treated to prevent corrosion and electrolytic action. Non electrical conducting

flexible connections shall not be used as medical gas systems.

Supports shall:

. permit appropriate movement for expansion and contraction in controlled directions;

. be arranged so that stresses or loads due to expansion or contraction pressure reaction,

and the weight of the pipes do not exceed the safe loads for the support, supporting

structure, any pumps or other equipment to which the pipes connect, and the pipes

themselves;

. not bridge any vibration isolation;

. be fixed to structural elements with adequate strength for the duty. Fixings shall not

weaken the supporting structure.

23.11.05.07 Expansion, Contraction

Pipework shall be completed with provision for controlled expansion and contraction.

When possible piping shall be arranged to be sufficiently flexible to expand and contract

without:

. development of excessive stresses in the pipework;

. transferring excessive stresses to connected equipment or the structure supporting

pipework;

. when the inherent flexibility of pipework is inadequate, expansion loops, bellows or

telescopic connectors shall be provided.

23.11.05.08 Sleeves

Sleeves shall:

. be provided at all piping penetrations through floors, walls, roof and equipment casings;

. be fabricated in copper

. be installed flush with the underside of floor slabs and with the upper side projecting

75mm above floor slabs.


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



. project 50mm each side of wall penetrations;

. be 10mm larger in diameter than pipe;

. be sealed at sound barriers, equipment casings, and penetration of masonry air shafts;

. have lock seamed on spot welded joints;

. be supplied and installed by the Contractor.

Sleeves penetrating fire-rated floors and walls shall have the space between piping and the

sleeve packed with a fire resistant packing to the thickness of the fire barrier.

Seals shall be:

. sewn boots fabricated in Wavebar 120 leaded vinyl;

. clipped to piping and pipe sleeves with 'Cheney' worm drive hose clips;

. be airtight;

. installed on both sides of the sleeve at penetrations through plantroom walls and slabs.

23.11.05.09 Escutcheon Plates

Escutcheon plates shall be fitted where exposed pipes pass through walls or ceilings.

Plates shall:

. trim the piping opening;

. be of 1.0mm thick "galvabond" construction;

. be in one piece, slipped over the pipe before joints are made;

. be screw fixed to walls.

23.11.06 PIPELINE SHUT OFF VALVES & ZONE ISOLATION VALVE BOX

(ZIVB)

Valves shall be manufactured of oxygen compatible materials and carry the manufacturers serial

number for identification and size. They should be capable of withdrawal without cutting the

pipework.

Valves shall be of the ball lever type, provided with a means of key locking in either the open or

closed position.

Valves shall open and close with a 90 degree turn of the lever, the valve to be closed when the

lever lies at right angles to the pipe run.

A manufacturer’s certificate shall be supplied for each valve or batch of valves stating that they

have been pressure tested to:

- establish their suitability for the working pressure; and


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



- cleaned and degreased and that any solvents have been completely removed.

Medical gas line ball valve assemblies shall be constructed of a nickel plated brass body, PTFE

seats/seals and a brass chrome plated ball. The valve shall operate by a manual operating lever

selected through 90 deg. All medical gas line ball valves shall provide a full bore flow and shall

be cleaned for oxygen service and fully tested prior to dispatch. Smaller type valve assemblies

(15 to 42 mm inclusive) shall incorporate stainless steel ‘Dowty’ bonded seals and mechanically

sealed connectors. Larger type valve assemblies (54 to 159mm inclusive) shall be flanged,

installed with stainless steel bolts, nuts and spring washers with 3 mm Viton sealing gaskets. In

all cases, the use of PTFE tape or any other thread sealing medium shall not be used during

installation.

Each medical gas line ball valve assembly shall terminate in copper stud pipes to enable brazing

direct into the distribution system using the fluxless brazing technique with N2 purge. A

locking device shall be provided to enable the valve to be locked in either the fully open or fully

closed position.

Do not install valves in any duct or void unless effective ventilation can be guaranteed at all

conditions.

Zone Valve Box (ZVB) shall be as manufactured by Medaes, model Medizone or approved

equal and shall consist of a ball valves, together with the other features detailed below, all

installed within a box, having a key lockable hinged cover which is gas specific when it bears

the gas(es) name, capable of being locked with the valve in the open or closed position.

ZVB shall be flush mounted and shall be provided with a second fix bezel to cover the

plaster/box joint. ZVB shall have the following features:

. Shall contain one or more ball lever valve(s) as indicated on drawings.

. Shall have ease of access for fitting the valve(s) and pipework and for maintenance.

. Shall be ventilated to prevent a build up of gas in the event of a leak and have pipe entries

and other box penetrations sealed with a suitable sealant.

. Shall have means of gaining access in an emergency without the use of the key.

. Shall have means of physically isolating and blanking off the service(s) both upstream

and downstream of the valve(s) by means of removable sections and replacement blank

plates. One blank plate to be provided for each valve(s) shall have NIST connector

bodies, with self sealing check valves upstream and downstream of the blanc plate. Plugs

or caps to be captive.

. Shall have boxes of metallic or substantial plastic construction, capable of withstanding

damage from blows or abrasions, and having no sharp edges.

. Shall have in the case of multi-service boxes either means of introducing a hose assembly

to any one NIST connector while locked, or separate access to any of the NIST

connectors for the purpose of attaching a hose assembly.

. Shall have a separate boss(es) to include pressure gauge(s) /switch(s).

. Bear the product batch number.

. Shall include an “Area Alarm Panel”.


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



The ZVB shall be pre-wired, pre-piped, completely assembled and tested ready for

installation into a finished building.

Medical gas/vacuum services shall be fixed copper piped to and from their respective

ZVB and shall normally terminate in copper stub pipes normally connected at ceiling

level.

The position of the copper stub pipes shall be handed as specified by the customer.

Pressure/vacuum switch assemblies shall be installed as a bank mounted on an internal

mounting frame and connect to their respective gas service downstream of the ZVB and utilize

‘minimum leak’ adaptors.

Electrical cables to the medical gas alarm panels shall be routed and secured clear of the

medical gas/vacuum services, and the complete electrical installation shall conform to current

IEE regulations. All metal components within the assembly shall be electrically bonded and the

installation shall be earthed.

23.11.07 TERMINAL UNITS

Terminal units shall be provided where shown on the drawing and detailed on medical

equipment room data sheets. Each terminal unit for N2O air and oxygen shall be equipped with a

self-sealing valve.

Each terminal unit for N2O and oxygen shall be provided with a secondary shut off valve.

The medical gas terminal units shall conform to BS EN 737-1:1998 and accept probes to

BS5682:1984. The anaesthetic gas scavenging (AGS) terminal unit shall conform to

BS6834:1987.

The wall mounted first fix assembly shall consist of a brass pipeline termination block with

copper stub pipe permanently secured between a back plate and a gas specific plate which

allows limited radial movement of a copper stub to align with the pipeline. The first fix shall

incorporate a maintenance valve and a test plug. The test plug provides an effective blank to

enable carcass pressure testing. The second fix plastic components shall be moulded from fire

retardant polycarbonate with the pin index permanently moulded into the gas specific socket.

The socket assembly retains a sealed capsule assembly containing the check valve and probe

‘O’ ring seal. The replaceable capsule assembly must enable all working parts subject to wear

and tear through usage to be replaced as a factory tested assembly. Medical gas terminal units

shall accommodate a variable plaster depth of up to a maximum of 16mm.

Terminal units shall be gas specific and only accept the correct medical gas probe. Gas specific

components shall be pin-indexed to ensure that a correct gas specific assembly is achieved so

that in normal course of dismantling for repair or maintenance, parts from other gasses cannot

inadvertently be used. Wall mounted terminal units shall incorporate an anti-rotation pin to

engage with connected downstream medical equipment ensuring correct orientation.

Terminal units installed in booms, bed head units or pendants shall be attached to their

respective flexible gas hose by a gas specific NIST fitting and anti rotation pins shall not be

fitted. Terminal units located in a rigid installation shall be capable of single-handed insertion

and removal of the correct BS5682: 1984 medical gas probe.

The terminal units shall have a three-year warranty, subject to the recommended minimum

routine maintenance operations and shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices Directive

93/42/EEC with approval from notified body no.0301 (BVQI).


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



23.11.08 PRESSURE GAUGE, SWITCHES, REGULATIONS AND SAFETY

VALVES

23.11.08.01 Pressure Gauge

Pressure gauges shall be a minimum of 30 mm diameter. The face shall have coloured sectors

clearly indicating the acceptable working range.

A gauge having a minimum diameter of 100 mm shall be installed adjacent to the plant to

indicate available suction on vacuum Plants.

23.11.08.02 Pressure Switches

Pressure switches shall be provided in the medical vacuum system to indicate low vacuum and

vacuum failure. The low vacuum switch shall sense the vacuum in the receiver and a vacuum

failure switch shall be located between the zone isolation valve box and the first terminal unit.

Pressure switches shall be provided in the medical breathing air system to indicate pre filter air

pressure and air supply failure. The pre filter pressure switch shall sense the pressure in the

receiver and an air supply failure switch shall be located between the zone isolation valve box

and the first terminal unit.

Pressure switches shall be provided in the oxygen system to indicate emergency cylinder supply

low pressure, emergency supply operation and oxygen supply failure. The cylinder supply low

pressure switch shall sense the pressure in the emergency bottle supply manifold, the emergency

supply operation switch shall sense when the emergency supply is in operation i.e. main supply

has failed and an oxygen supply failure shall be located between the zone isolation valve box

and the first terminal unit.

23.11.08.03 Pressure Control Regulators

Pressure control regulators shall be provided throughout the medical gas systems to maintain a

set pressure and ensure correct operating pressure at the terminal unit.

23.11.08.04 Pressure Safety Valve

Pressure safety valves shall be installed within the systems to prevent over pressurisation.

23.11.09 MEDICAL VACUUM PLANT

23.11.09.01 General

The medical suction plant shall be as manufactured by Medaes VC series or approved equal and

shall comprise two (2) identical suction pumps each capable of supplying the design flow rate

on its own. The suction pumps shall be air cooled and mounted on a common vacuum receiver

vessel together with the control panel. The requirements of UKNHS – Model Engineering

Specification C11 and Health Technical Memorandum 2022 (HTM 2022) shall be complied

with. The Medical Vacuum Plant shall ensure the minimum pipeline vacuum level of 450mm

Hg is maintained at the plant service connection point at the rated volumetric ‘free air’ flow rate.

23.11.09.02 Vacuum Pumps


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



Each vacuum pump shall be of the oil lubricated rotary vane type complete with direct

connected electric motor, non return valve on the inlet side of the pump, inlet screen and oil mist

separator all capable of continuous operation over the entire working pressure range.

Each pump shall be equipped with an oil drain valve. Oil shall be isolated in the pump from the

rest of the system by way on an anti suckback valves. Each pump shall include an oil sight

glass for easy checking of the oil level. The pump inlet shall be protected by means of two inlet

screens, one coarse and one fine. Each pump will include an intake filter along with an

individual inlet isolating valve.

The Pump unit coupled to an electric motor shall form a complete assembly. All motors shall

comply with Model Specification C51, with the addition of class F insulation and Class B

Temperature rise.

Each unit shall be capable of producing a higher vacuum than that required in the pipeline so

that the resistance of traps, filters etc. and back pressure are overcome.

The plant shall be capable of providing a vacuum of not less than 650mm Hg.

The plant shall have a minimum capacity as indicated on drawings when the pump has

equilibrated at nominal operating temperature whilst maintaining a pipeline pressure of 450mm

Hg.

Noise from the plant shall not exceed a free field noise level measured at 1m from the plant of

75dBA up to 5HW and 82 dBA above.

23.11.09.03 Vacuum Receiver

The receiver capacity shall be such that the operating pump does not start more than 10 times

per hour during normal working conditions and have a minimum water capacity equal to the

ACD capability in litres per minute of the plant at 450 mmHg

The quality of materials, welding and general construction of the vacuum receiver shall be in

accordance with EN286 or BS5169/1975 Class 3 Grade E. Handholes shall be provided in the

vessel. A 100 mm diameter vacuum gauge shall be fitted on the receiver. The external shell

shall be sand blasted, coated with one coat of primer and one coat of enamel.

23.11.09.04 Control Panel

An electrical panel and electric installation shall be supplied for the operation and control of the

suction pumps. The panel shall have an IP 55 rating and be mounted on the receiver.

The controls shall be such that the standby pump shall start automatically on failure of the duty

pump or in the event that the duty pump fails to maintain adequate vacuum. The pumps shall be

automatically changed from duty to standby to even wear on each pump.

The control panel equipment and controls shall include but not be limited to the following :

. main power isolating switch

. motor contactor for each pump

. motor protection circuit breaker for each pump

. hour run meter for each pump

. test/on/off auto select switch for each pump

. service due light with reset key switch

. pump fault light for each pump

. low vacuum light


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



. vacuum failure light

. voltage free contacts for remote indication of duty/standby pump operation, service due

and faults.

. Conform to IEE

The vacuum plant shall have three stages of alarm conditions inputting to the alarm system and

follows:

1) Plant faults caused by:

Control circuit failure

Activation of any other safety device

Failure of a selected pump to run up to speed on time.

2) Plant Emergency caused by:

Low receiver vacuum (50mmHg above cut in pressure of lag pump(s)

3) Pressure fault caused by:

Pipeline vacuum less than 360mmHg

Building Management System contacts shall also be provided for:

(Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts);

Plant fault;

Plant Emergency;

Pipeline Pressure fault.

23.11.09.05 Bacterial Filters/Drainage Trap Assembly

Bacterial filters shall comprise two independent subassemblies either of which may be selected

by the use of manual valves as “primary” whilst retaining the second assembly as “secondary”.

Each sub-assembly shall comprise a bacterial filter assembly with drainage trap, rated at the

plant capacity. The assembly being located between the reservoir(s) and the plant/pipeline

interface.

The assembly shall be marked distinctly with the words “BIO HAZARD” and have a filter

efficiency when tested by the sodium flame test in accordance with BS 3928, not exceeding 0-

005% penetration at the design flow.

The pressure drop through a clean filter shall not exceed 25mmHg at a vacuum of 475 mmHg at

full design flaw.

23.11.09.06 Exhaust System

The vacuum pump exhaust system shall be sized, routed and terminated outside at high level

with a clearly identified weather proof notice stating “MEDICAL VACUUM DISCHARGE

POINT – DO NOT DISTURB”.

23.11.10 MEDICAL COMPRESSED AIR PLANT (4 BAR)

23.11.10.01 General

The Medical Compressed Air Plant shall be as manufactured by Medaes, model MA series or

approved equal. The plant shall be capable of providing the total flow rate with one compressor

not running shall be provided for medical air (4 bar) supply system.


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



A standby manifold shall be provided for the medical air (4 bar). The plant shall be complete

with compressors, after coolers, air receivers, filtration/dryers, pressure regulator and relief

valves, non return valves, isolating valves; gauges and pressure switches, control panel and

indication systems all to fully conform to the requirements of UK NHS – Model Engineering

Specification C11 and Health Technical Memorandum No 2022 (HTM 2022)

23.11.10.02 Air Compressors

A minimum of two identical screw compressors shall be provided each directly driven by

electric motors of Class F type noise levels tested to BS4999 and designed to operate at high

ambient temperatures up to 52oC. Air intake filter and silencer shall be provided for each

compressor.

The package shall include Intercooler and aftercooler with moisture separator and automatic

condensate drains and a sound attenuating enclosure with quick latch-panels for easy

accessibility.

23.11.10.03 Air Receivers

Cylindrical air receivers shall be vertical or horizontal for a working pressure of 10.30 bar (1030

kpa) abs unless otherwise indicated on drawings and shall be fitted with access panel to enable

full internal inspection; gate valves, in line non return valves, pressure gauge, automatic drain

trap with manual bypass, flexible plug and safety valve. The receiver shall have a minimum

water capacity as per HTM 2022 standard. Air receivers shall be fabricated inspected, tested

and certified in accordance with BS5169 Class 3 Grade E and EN286 or equivalent Test

Certificates shall be provided with the equipment.

23.11.10.04 Air Dryers, Filter Dryer Assembly & After Coolers

Air delivery is via duplexed sets of filters, pre-filter, oil filter, dust filter, activated carbon filter

and bacterial filter. Each filter shall be fitted with differential pressure gauges to monitor filter

performance.

The air at the outlet shall contain no more than:

Water 115 mg/m3

Dry particulate 0.01 mg/m3

Oil mist 0.01 mg/m3

Oil vapour 0.03 mg/m3

Carbon monoxide 5.0 mg/m3 5 ppm v/v

Carbon dioxide 450 mg/m3 500 ppm v/v

Duplex desiccant dryers shall be used and controlled by a separate control panel and incorporate

a dew point alarm system.

Air Dryers

Duplicate air dryers shall be provided. Each dryer shall be capable of dealing with the

continuous full load capacity. A separator and filter-assembly shall be installed upstream of the

air dryers and filters shall be installed downstream of the air dryers.

Dryers shall be of the activated alumina heatless type having two columns, used and regenerated

alternatively. The bleed air from the column type dryer shall be controlled by a readily

accessible valve and the outlet shall be fitted with a silencer discharging over a tundish.


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



Each dryer shall be designed to provide a desiccant bed life of not less than two years on

continuous full load and each should be fitted with a safety valve and pressure gauge.

Filtration/Dryer System

Filtration/dryer system shall comprise two (2) independent sub-assemblies either of which may

be selected as “DUTY” whilst retaining the second assembly as “STANDBY” and each

assembly to comprise the following:

a) Separator/pre-filter – providing maximum remaining oil content of 0.5 mg/m3, particle

removal down to 1 micron and DOP penetration of less than 0.03%.

b) Coalescing filter – providing maximum remaining oil content of 0.01 mg/m3, particle

removal to 0.01 micron and DOP penetration of less than 0.0001%.

c) Pair of dryer columns

d) Dust filter – providing particle removal down to 1 micron and DOP penetration of less

than 0.03%.

e) Activated carbon filter – providing removal of hydrocarbon odours and vapours.

f) Dryer control/timing mechanism which ensures that the use of purge air for the

regeneration proves is related to the pipeline demand by methods such as:

i) Interrupting process timers in accordance with compressor operation, or the

pressure fluctuations in the receiver.

ii) Monitoring dewpoint

iii) Monitoring bed saturation

g) Isolation and safety valves.

h) Filtration/Dryer systems shall be rated at the total through put of the compressor(s).

i) The system shall satisfy the air quality specification given in Table 1 of HTM 2022

quality specifications for medical air.

j) The system shall be provided with purge discharge silencers.

k) The system shall bear clear identification for each major component.

Pressure Regulator/Filter Assembly

This shall comprise a duplex sub-assembly with:

a) Duplexed ‘bacterial’ filter assembly providing particle removal down to 0.01 micron (no

particles > 0.01 microns) and DOP penetration of less than 0.0001%.

b) Duplex, non-relieving pressure regulator assembly designed to have a static pressure

under NO flow conditions of 478 Kpa and a minimum delivery pressure of 440 Kpa.

After Coolers


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



After coolers shall be provided for each compressor and shall be air cooled. The compressed air

shall be of sufficient dryness that precipitation shall not occur if an equivalent amount of air is

reduced to minus 18 deg C at 7.0 bar (690 Kpa) gauge.

Air discharge temperature shall not exceed 15oC above the cooling air inlet.

Each cooler shall be fitted with an automatic drain trap and a manual by-pass valve for draining

the condensed moisture from the air side. Thermometers shall be provided on the compressed

air inlet, compressed air outlet and cooling water inlet points.

Noise shall not exceed 76 DBA according to CAGI pneurop test code measured at 1M distance.

23.11.10.05 Control Panels

A dedicated control panel shall be provided, for air compressor, to house the isolating switch,

starter, MCB, ammeter, hours run meter, lead compressor selector switch, pressure switch,

alarm and BMS contacts. The capacity of the plant shall be 100% system design flow with one

compressor not running. A pressure transducer shall sense the pressure and operate logic

circuits within the control panel to switch the lead compressor on or off, maintaining the design

pressure. A digital readout of vessel pressure shall be located on the central control panel door

capable of being switched to show pressure in kPa, or bar. During period of peak demand the

lag compressor shall automatically be activated to operate in addition to the lead compressor.

The compressor(s) shall automatically shut down once pressure levels have been restored. In

the event of a lead compressor failure, the lag compressor shall take over the first stage of the

remote alarm system and shall be activated by control panel.

Should the primary control circuit fail, an independent system with a separate mechanical

backup switch will operate the compressors and also initiate a plant fault alarm. The air plant

shall have four (4) stages of alarm conditions inputting to the alarm system as follows:

1) Plant Faults caused by:

Control circuit failure.

Activation of any other safety device.

Failure of a selected compressor to run up to speed on time.


Low receiver pressure fault (0.5 bar below cut-in pressure of the lag compressor(s) or 0.5

bar above cut-out pressure of the lead compressor).

Dew point above -26oC at atmospheric pressure.

3) Reserve Fault caused by:

Reserve manifold pressure less than 50%.

4) Pressure Fault caused by:

High or low pipeline pressure.

Building Management System contacts shall be:-

(Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts)

Plant fault,

Plant Emergency,

Reserve Fault,

Pipeline Pressure Fault


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



23.11.10.06 Duplex Pressure Reducing Station

There shall be a duplex pressure reducing station to reduce the pressure from 7 bar to 4 bar.

23.11.11 SURGICAL COMPRESSED AIR PLANT (7 BAR)

23.11.11.01 General

The Surgical Compressed Air Plant shall be as manufactured by Medaes, model SA series or

approved equal. The plant shall be capable of providing the total flow rate with one compressor

not running shall be provided for medical air (4 bar) supply system.

A standby manifold shall be provided for the surgical air (7 bar). The plant shall be complete

with compressors, after coolers, air receivers, filtration/dryers, pressure regulator and relief

valves, non return valves, isolating valves; gauges and pressure switches, control panel and

indication systems all to fully conform to the requirements of UK NHS – Model Engineering

Specification C11 and Health Technical Memorandum No 2022 (HTM 2022)

23.11.11.02 Air Compressors

A minimum of two identical screw compressors shall be provided each directly driven by

electric motors of Class F type noise levels tested to BS4999 and designed to operate at high

ambient temperatures up to 52oC. Air intake filter and silencer shall be provided for each

compressor.

The package shall include Intercooler and aftercooler with moisture separator and automatic

condensate drains and a sound attenuating enclosure with quick latch-panels for easy

accessibility.

23.11.11.03 Air Receivers

Cylindrical air receivers shall be vertical or horizontal for a working pressure of 10.30 bar (1030

kpa) abs unless otherwise indicated on drawings and shall be fitted with access panel to enable

full internal inspection; gate valves, in line non return valves, pressure gauge, automatic drain

trap with manual bypass, flexible plug and safety valve. The receiver shall have a minimum

water capacity as per HTM 2022 standard. Air receivers shall be fabricated inspected, tested

and certified in accordance with BS5169 Class 3 Grade E and EN286 or equivalent Test

Certificates shall be provided with the equipment.

23.11.11.04 Air Dryers, Filter Dryer Assembly & After Coolers

Air delivery is via duplexed sets of filters, pre-filter, oil filter, dust filter, activated carbon filter

and bacterial filter. Each filter shall be fitted with differential pressure gauges to monitor filter

performance.

The air at the outlet shall contain no more than:

Water 115 mg/m3

Dry particulate 0.01 mg/m3

Oil mist 0.01 mg/m3

Oil vapour 0.03 mg/m3

Carbon monoxide 5.0 mg/m3 5 ppm v/v

Carbon dioxide 450 mg/m3 500 ppm v/v


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



Duplex desiccant dryers shall be used and controlled by a separate control panel and incorporate

a dew point alarm system.

Air Dryers

Duplicate air dryers shall be provided. Each dryer shall be capable of dealing with the

continuous full load capacity. A separator and filter-assembly shall be installed upstream of the

air dryers and filters shall be installed downstream of the air dryers.

Dryers shall be of the activated alumina heatless type having two columns, used and regenerated

alternatively. The bleed air from the column type dryer shall be controlled by a readily

accessible valve and the outlet shall be fitted with a silencer discharging over a tundish.

Each dryer shall be designed to provide a desiccant bed life of not less than two years on

continuous full load and each should be fitted with a safety valve and pressure gauge.

Filtration/Dryer System

Filtration/dryer system shall comprise two (2) independent sub-assemblies either of which may

be selected as “DUTY” whilst retaining the second assembly as “STANDBY” and each

assembly to comprise the following:

a) Separator/pre-filter – providing maximum remaining oil content of 0.5 mg/m3, particle

removal down to 1 micron and DOP penetration of less than 0.03%.

b) Coalescing filter – providing maximum remaining oil content of 0.01 mg/m3, particle

removal to 0.01 micron and DOP penetration of less than 0.0001%.

c) Pair of dryer columns

d) Dust filter – providing particle removal down to 1 micron and DOP penetration of less

than 0.03%.

e) Activated carbon filter – providing removal of hydrocarbon odours and vapours.

f) Dryer control/timing mechanism which ensures that the use of purge air for the

regeneration proves is related to the pipeline demand by methods such as:

iv) Interrupting process timers in accordance with compressor operation, or the

pressure fluctuations in the receiver.

v) Monitoring dewpoint

vi) Monitoring bed saturation

g) Isolation and safety valves.

h) Filtration/Dryer systems shall be rated at the total through put of the compressor(s).

i) The system shall satisfy the air quality specification given in Table 1 of HTM 2022

quality specifications for medical air.

j) The system shall be provided with purge discharge silencers.

k) The system shall bear clear identification for each major component.

Pressure Regulator/Filter Assembly


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



This shall comprise a duplex sub-assembly with:

a) Duplexed ‘bacterial’ filter assembly providing particle removal down to 0.01 micron (no

particles > 0.01 microns) and DOP penetration of less than 0.0001%.

b) Duplex, non-relieving pressure regulator assembly designed to have a static pressure

under NO flow conditions of 778 Kpa and a minimum delivery pressure of 740 Kpa.

After Coolers

After coolers shall be provided for each compressor and shall be air cooled. The compressed air

shall be of sufficient dryness that precipitation shall not occur if an equivalent amount of air is

reduced to minus 18 deg C at 7.0 bar (690 Kpa) gauge.

Air discharge temperature shall not exceed 15oC above the cooling air inlet.

Each cooler shall be fitted with an automatic drain trap and a manual by-pass valve for draining

the condensed moisture from the air side. Thermometers shall be provided on the compressed

air inlet, compressed air outlet and cooling water inlet points.

Noise shall not exceed 76 DBA according to CAGI pneurop test code measured at 1M distance.

23.11.11.05 Control Panels

A dedicated control panel shall be provided, for air compressor, to house the isolating switch,

starter, MCB, ammeter, hours run meter, lead compressor selector switch, pressure switch,

alarm and BMS contacts. The capacity of the plant shall be 100% system design flow with one

compressor not running. A pressure transducer shall sense the pressure and operate logic

circuits within the control panel to switch the lead compressor on or off, maintaining the design

pressure. A digital readout of vessel pressure shall be located on the central control panel door

capable of being switched to show pressure in kPa, or bar. During period of peak demand the

lag compressor shall automatically be activated to operate in addition to the lead compressor.

The compressor(s) shall automatically shut down once pressure levels have been restored. In

the event of a lead compressor failure, the lag compressor shall take over the first stage of the

remote alarm system and shall be activated by control panel.

Should the primary control circuit fail, an independent system with a separate mechanical

backup switch will operate the compressors and also initiate a plant fault alarm. The air plant

shall have four (4) stages of alarm conditions inputting to the alarm system as follows:

1) Plant Faults caused by:

Control circuit failure.

Activation of any other safety device.

Failure of a selected compressor to run up to speed on time.


Low receiver pressure fault (0.5 bar below cut-in pressure of the lag compressor(s) or 0.5

bar above cut-out pressure of the lead compressor).

Dew point above -26oC at atmospheric pressure.

3) Reserve Fault caused by:

Reserve manifold pressure less than 50%.

4) Pressure Fault caused by:


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



High or low pipeline pressure.

Building Management System contacts shall be:-

(Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts)

Plant fault,

Plant Emergency,

Reserve Fault,

Pipeline Pressure Fault

23.11.12 ANAESTHETIC GAS SCAVENGING DISPOSAL SYSTEM

The Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging Disposal System shall be as manufactured by Medaes model

series SAH or approved equal. A dedicated, specifically designed active extraction and disposal

system for waste anaesthetic gas. The system shall conform to the requirements of British

Standard 6834:1987 and shall be capable of providing a flow rate between a maximum of 130

L/min with a 1 kPa resistance to flow and a minimum of 80 L/min. with a 4 kPa resistance to

flow at each terminal unit, irrespective of the number of terminal units in use.

To ensure that maximum patient safety is achieved, the terminal unit shall be designed with a

choked-oriface to prevent a flow rate exceeding 150L/min.

The AGS plant shall be skid mounted and included o the skid shall be exhauster units, a motor

control unit with starter/isolator, moisture drain flask and flexible connectors to connect the

plant to the pipeline. Exhauster units are electrically driven with a three phase motor.

All remote start switch panels shall incorporate a green indicator light, which illuminates when

the exhauster unit is selected and operating.

The system shall be activated by remote switches that indicate the system is running and the

system shall be static when not in use.

AGS disposal systems and terminal units shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices

Directive 93/42/eec with approval from notified body no 0301 (BVQI).

23.11.13 ALARM SYSTEM

23.11.13.01 General

Indicator panel for alarms shall be sited where indicated on the drawings and be in accordance

with UK NHS HTM 2022.

The alarm system shall be powered from the emergency services switchboard.

The alarm panel shall provide visual and audible indication. The audible indication shall be

provided with a mute switch.

The panel shall be appropriately labelled and a clear description of each function shall be

indicated. The lettering shall be permanent and of a contrasting colour to the background.

Instructions detailing the action required in the event of an alarm shall be prominently displayed

next to the panel.

The function shall be clearly visible under all lighting conditions, including no light.


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



A drawing of the panel facia shall be provided by the contractor for approval before the panel is

manufactured.

The panel shall provide details of the status of the systems which shall include:

. All systems normal signal – visual only.

. Systems not operating normally signal – visual and audible eg. reserve gas supply being

used.

. Emergency signal – visual and audible eg. emergency supply being used.

. Supply failure alarm – visual and audible eg. gas pressure or vacuum below normal

working value.

23.11.13.02 Area Alarm Panels

The medical gas area alarm panels shall be as manufactured by Medaes model Medipoint 26 or

approved equal shall be capable of monitoring a maximum of 6 medical gas services by means

of pressure sensors, which detect deviations from the normal operating limits of either pressure

or medical vacuum.

Each pressure gas service shall be displayed by coloured LED’s to show “Normal (green),

‘Low’ and ‘High’ pressure (red) conditions. Medical vacuum systems, shall be displayed in the

“Normal (green) and “Low” vacuum (red) conditions only. Failure indicators shall be displayed

by flashing lights and normal indication shall be steady. Each LED block indicator shall be a

plug in component with individual long life LED’s connected in parallel in 2 banks to provide

duplex circuits.

An audible warning shall sound simultaneously, should a further alarm condition occur. A

maintenance ‘Mute’ switch shall be provided internally to the panel for use during maintenance

which results in prolonged pipeline or plant shut down. This facility shall automatically reset

when the gas service returns to normal.

The alarm panel shall have a ‘test’ facility to prove the integrity of the internal circuits, LED’s

and audible warning. The alarm panel shall incorporate volt free normally closed relay contacts

to allow for inter-connection to the medical gas central alarm system an event recording circuit

of a building management system.

Each alarm shall provide green LED indicating that electrical power is available at the panel and

a red LED to indicate ‘System Alarm’. In the event of an electrical power supply failure the

‘System Alarm’ LED shall illuminate (flashing) and the audible shall be delayed for 20 seconds

to enable standby generator start up.

Line contact monitoring circuits shall be provided to constantly monitor the integrity of the

pressure sensors and interconnecting wiring. In the event of any fault, the line contact

monitoring circuits shall initiate the specific gas service failure indication, a ‘system alarm’

indication and the audible warning. Further aids to fault diagnosis shall be provided by means

of varying flashing rates whilst operating the ‘test’ switch.

Area alarm panels shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC with

approval from notified body no.0301 (BVQI). Under this directive, the specified products are

classified as Class IIb Medical Devices.

23.11.13.03 Medical Gas Central Plantrooms Alarms.


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



The medical gas area alarm panels shall be, as manufactured by Medaes model: Medipoint 125

or approved equal, capable of monitoring a maximum of 5 medical gas services by means of

input sensors from the specific plant or point alarms. The medical gas central alarms shall fully

satisfy the UK National Health Service – Model Engineering Specification C11 and Health

Technical Memorandum No.2022 (HTM2022)

Each gas service shall be displayed by coloured LED’s to show “Normal (green), and ‘4 stage’

alarm conditions (yellow/red) only. Failure indicators shall be displayed by flashing lights and

normal indication shall be steady. Each LED block indicator shall be a plug in component with

individual long life LED’s connected in parallel in 2 banks to provide duplex circuits.

An audible warning shall sound simultaneously with any failure indication and a mute facility

shall be provided. Following a mute selection the audible will resound after approximately 15

minutes, or shall operate simultaneously should a further alarm condition occur. A maintenance

‘Mute’ switch shall be provided internally to the panel for use during maintenance which results

in prolonged pipeline or plant shut down. This facility shall automatically reset when the gas

service returns to normal.

The alarm panel shall have a ‘test’ facility to prove the integrity of the internal circuits, LED’s

and audible warning. The alarm panel shall incorporate volt free normally closed relays to

allow for inter-connection to an event recording circuit of the building management system.

Each alarm shall provide green LED indicating that electrical power is available at the panel and

a red LED to indicate ‘System Alarm’. In the event of an electrical power supply failure the

‘System Alarm’ LED shall illuminate (flashing) and the audible warning shall be delayed for 20

seconds to enable standby generator start up.

Line contact monitoring circuits shall be provided to constantly monitor the integrity of the

input sensors and interconnecting wiring. In the event of any fault, the line contact monitoring

circuits shall initiate the specific gas service failure indication, a ‘system alarm’ indication and

an audible warning. Further aids to fault diagnosis shall be provided by means of varying

flashing rates whilst operating the ‘test’ switch.

The central alarm system must be interconnected to the area alarm power using specific data

cable on a “radial” circuit. Signals must be transmitted around the system in a “multiplexed”

form. The central alarm system must be capable of operating a Central Mute facility as

described in HTM2022.

Medical Gas Central Alarm Panel shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices Directive

93/42/EEC with approval from notified body no. 0301 (BVQI).

23.11.14 MODULAR MANIFOLD SUPPLY SYSTEM & MANIFOLD CONTROL

PANEL

23.11.14.01 General

Modular Manifold Supply Systems, as manufactured by Medaes model: MCS2 or approved

equal, shall be used to provide medical gases to a piped distribution system. All manifolds shall

fully comply with HTM2022/C11.

Modular Manifold Headers and Emergency Standby Manifolds shall be ‘CE’ marked under the

Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC with approval from notified body no.0301 (BVQI).

The modular manifold supply system shall comprise 7 basic components.


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



1. Primary header

2. Secondary header

3. 2 cylinder rack

4. 1 cylinder rack

5. Non-return valve

6. Blanking plug

7. Corner connector

The primary header, mounted on a 2-cylinder rack, shall always be connected to the left and

right hand inlets of the manifold. The secondary header mounted on either a 2-cylinder or 1-

cylinder rack shall be used to make up the required size of manifold for either an odd or even

number of cylinders.

Flexible copper tailpipes shall be used to connect the gas cylinders to the header assemblies.

Tailpipes shall be fully gas specific at both cylinder and manifold header connection points for

all gases.

Non-return valves shall be incorporated into the header assembly to protect the system in the

event of a tailpipe fracture. Each non-return valve shall have a hard seat with ceramic ball. For

better access and increased safety the non-return valve block shall be positioned on the header

rack midway between the cylinder positions.

23.11.14.02 Oxygen and N2O Manifold Control Panel

The Manifold Control System shall supply medical gas from both left and right hand manifold

banks. The operation and performance criteria shall fully satisfy the requirements of

HTM2022/C11. The Manifold Control System shall supply a flow of 1000 L/min. to a 400 kPa

(4 bar) distribution system.

Either the left or right hand manifold bank may be designated “Duty” and the MCP shall

automatically changeover to supply the distribution system from the “standby” bank when

pressure in the “Duty” bank falls to a pre-determined level.

There shall be a 2 stage duplex system to provide a high flow rate. Each side of the MCP shall

be capable of being fully isolated, via a full flow ball valve, in order to change any regulator

without a cessation of supply. The inlet of the 1st stage regulator shall be protected from the

particular matter by a moulded bronze filter.

All regulators shall be protected from over-pressurisation by relief valves which are vented to

atmosphere. There shall be a bypass valve fitted to the 2nd stage regulators to allow nitrous

oxide to be vented outside the manifold room during the commissioning stage.

There shall be a fail safe system in the event of power failure so that solenoid valves open and

there is full continuity of supply pressure flow. Upon power restoration the unit shall revert

back to the original bank of cylinders being used. To avoid inadvertent resetting of the change

cylinder alarm the solenoid valves shall be latched to that once changeover has occurred and the

cylinders replaced a reset button must be operated to cancel the alarm condition.

To aid maintenance the copper connections within the panel shall be flat face/’O’ ring design

and facilitate easy removal of the regulators and pressure switches. There shall be manual

changeover buttons so that servicing either side of the system can be simply achieved. The

PCB’s shall be linked with plug and socket connectors for easy removal.

MCP manifold control systems shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices Directive

93/42/EEC with approval from notified body no 0301 (BVQI).


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



The number of cylinders in each bank of oxygen and N2O manifold shall be as noted on the

drawings.

23.11.14.03 Emergency Supply Manifolds (ESM)

An Emergency Supply Manifold (ESM), as manufactured by Medaes model: MCS2 or

approved equal, shall be used to support the main Manifold and connected downstream of the

Manifold control panel. The assembly consists of two gas cylinder connections supplying a

manually adjusted regulator via a common header assembly. The delivery system is isolated

from the main system by an isolation valve and protected by a pressure relief valve. Pressure

gauges indicate cylinder and delivery pressure. A pressure switch is used to signal a low

cylinder pressure to the medical gas alarm. There shall be an Emergency Supply Manifold for:

. Oxygen

. N2O

. Medical Air

The number of cylinders shall be as per medical gas drawings. All Emergency Supply

Manifolds shall be complete with cylinders. The Contractor shall also provide spare racks of 1

bank capacity for each gas cylinder.

23.11.15 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

23.11.15.01 General

Each pipework system shall be tested as a whole or in sections as the work proceeds in

accordance with the following requirements; UK-NHS:HTM 2022.

Written test and completion certification must be provided throughout the period of the work.

Tests shall include but not be limited to zone isolation valves and cross connections, pipework

pressure testing, medical breathing air and medical vacuum plant function, purity of medical

breathing air and handover instructions. A contract completion certificate shall be provided at

the end of the works. Practical completion shall not be given until the certification is completed

and submitted.

These tests shall form part of the acceptance tests to be witnessed by the Engineer and Client.

Test pressures shall be applied during the construction period and prior to the pipelines being

painted with each section being blanked until further tests are made.

Component test pressure shall be certified as tested to 1.5 times working pressure.

All equipment, material and labour necessary for testing shall be provided and all necessary

“blanking-off” shall be done to prevent excessive pressures to equipment, seals or other similar

parts of the system.

Leaking joints in brazed pipes shall be remade in accordance with HTM 2022 Guidelines and

the relevant Code for the system being used. Leaking joints in screwed fittings and “0” ring

fittings shall be fully re-made; caulking of leaks will not be permitted. All faulty joints shall be

re-tested after rectification and repeated until entire systems are satisfactory.

Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant Australian Standard taking care that

the pressures stated do not over stress any part of the system due to working pressure or static

head. If such is likely to occur permission shall be requested to vary the test condition.


SCAVENGING SYSTEMS



23.11.15.02 Testing of Pipework Systems

All pipework shall be pressure tested using carbon dioxide. The test pressure for medical

breathing air and oxygen shall be 620 kPa and for medical vacuum 140 kPa 650 mmHg gap

(110 mmHg abs) recorded by an approved gauge placed at the highest point in the system.

Test pressures shall be maintained for a minimum of 4 hours without loss of pressure, with

corrections made for ambient temperature change when necessary. Vacuum shall be maintained

for a period of 20 hrs and pressure rise should not exceed 30mmHg per hour

After sections of pipework have been satisfactorily pressure tested they shall be tested for

correct operation and flow rates at operating pressures. Cylinder medical breathing air shall be

used for testing the oxygen system, the medical breathing air plant for the medical breathing air

system and the medical suction plant for the medical suction system.

Final testing shall be carried out using the proper gases. Each system shall be purged with own

designated gas and all items of equipment tested to ensure correct operation including the

system pressure alarms.

23.11.16 IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODING AND LABELLING

All new pipework shall be identified, labeled and colour coded to match the colour coding of

the relevant codes and standards.

All new valves, regulators, filters, etc. shall be identified and labeled.



23.12.00 ELECTRICAL ASSOCIATED WITH HVAC WORKS

23.12.01 EXTENT OF WORK

Supply, install, adjust, test and maintain the complete mechanical electrical system associated

with the Mechanical Works.

Specifically the mechanical electrical system shall comprise:

. Switchboards complete with all switchgear and controlgear and all power and control

wiring within the switchboard.

. All power wiring from the mechanical switchboard to all motors and equipment.

. Power wiring from all local control panels/local starters to the associated motors and

equipment.

. All control wiring as detailed herein and/or shown on the drawings for the control and

operation of all equipment served from the switchboard, local control panel, local

starters.

All control wiring associated with the controls system as detailed under clause Controls.

23.12.02 WORK BY BUILDER

The following work associated with the mechanical electrical installation shall be carried out by

the Builder as referred to in clause Work by Builder.

. Provision of openings and core holes through the structure provided that details are

provided by the Mechanical Trade prior to commencement of work in the respective

areas.

. Building in of conduits, wall boxes, wiring access boxes.

. Making good all walls and floors after chasing provided chasing is done before final

finishes are applied.

23.12.02.01 Electrical Trade

. Sub-mains from the consumer’s distribution board to the mechanical switchboards.

. Connection to main mechanical boards in roof and basement (floor sub mechanical

boards from main board by mechanical/electrical).

. Circuit protection units on consumer’s distribution sub-boards for power circuits serving

mechanical switchboards.

. Lighting in plantrooms other than inside air handling units.

23.12.02.02 Fire Trade

Fire trip control circuits run from the fire control panel to the mechanical services essential sub

boards.

ELECTRICAL ASSOCIATED WITH HVAC WORKS



23.12.03 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCAL RULES

All equipment supplied and work carried out shall comply with the requirements of BS7671.

The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the local

Supply Authority.

23.12.04 EQUIPMENT AND UNIFORMITY

All items of equipment shall be of first grade with regard to design and manufacture and shall

be completely satisfactory for operation, control, safety and maintenance under all conditions of

service.

Uniformity of type and manufacture of switchgear, controlgear, fittings and accessories shall be

preserved throughout the whole of the installation.

23.12.05 CONTINUITY OF SUPPLY

Where electrical facilities exist on the sit, during the staging of the building programme, these

facilities shall be maintained to suit the convenience of the consumer and no interruption shall

be made to the electricity supply without the consent of the Officer in Charge.

23.12.06 BALANCE OF LOAD

As far as is possible, the load shall be balanced between the individual phases of supply.

23.12.07 TESTS

Tests shall include insulation and continuity tests, current measurements on all motors, heaters

and other loads, tests of operation and settings of motor overload protection devices (thermal

overload relays, thermistors and thermistor relays), tests of functions of control wiring circuits

and interlock systems.

These tests shall form part of the acceptance tests to be witnessed by the Engineer as referred to

in clause Testing.

23.12.08 IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODES, LABELLING AND WIRING

DIAGRAMS

Sub-mains shall be colour coded at terminations to match the colour coding of the Supply

Authority mains. Sub-mains shall be labelled at their origin and termination with details of size,

number and material of conductors.

Individual power circuits shall be phase colour coded and taped together (A, B, C phase + N) at

approximately 0.6m intervals when run through switchboard cable zones and in cable ducts.

Controls wiring shall be colour coded as appropriate to the system (E.G. active, common,

signal).

Controls wiring shall be numbered where joining switchboard terminal strips for systems having

20 or more control circuits, using slip-on neoprene rubber, coloured ferrules with printed

numbers, or crimp on plastic ferrules with engraved or moulded numbers, or self adhesive




plastic tags with printed numbers, except that all control wiring to be terminated in control

panels or switchboards provided by others shall be numbered at their origin and termination.

All terminal strips shall be numbered for each wiring connection.

Wiring diagrams shall show all circuit and corresponding terminal strip connection numbers.

Labels shall be provided for all switchboard equipment and all local isolating switches and

control switches. Labels shall be machine engraved traffolyte plastic laminate with bevelled

edges fixed adjacent the item using nickel plated round head screws. Lettering shall be 5mm

minimum height black characters on white background except that white characters on red

background shall be used for danger or fire services labels. Labels in switchboards shall not be

fastened to cable duct lids.

All control switches shall be labelled to indicate “ON-OFF” or other positions.

Labels shall be provided on each switchboard to indicate the origin of the sub-mains and the

switchboard number.

Conduits and pipes for future wiring shall be labelled with stamped metal tags wired to the

conduit indicating the intended purpose and the location the conduit runs to.

Prepare wiring diagrams and switchboard drawings for all equipment and wiring installed and

submit four prints of each to the Engineer for approval prior to commencing work.

A non-fade print of the wiring diagrams shall be mounted adjacent the appropriate switchboards

in a suitable plywood backed glass face frames. Diagrams shall be reduced scale prints where

appropriate.

23.12.09 FORM OF ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

The electrical supply to the installation shall be a single supply 400/220 volts, 3 phase and

neutral, 4 wire, 50 Hz.

23.12.10 EARTHING

All metal parts of switchboard enclosures, cable trays, trunking, equipment and appliances shall

be effectively earthed.

Earthing throughout the installation shall comply with the current British Standard and the

Supply Authority.

23.12.11 WIRING METHODS

Power and control wiring for the electrical installation associated with the Mechanical Services

shall be by the following methods:

In Plantrooms:

. TPI conductors in galvanised steel cable ducts and galvanised steel conduit run overhead

and on the surface;

. TPI conductors in galvanised steel conduits cast into the concrete slab;




. large conductors XLPE/SWA/PVC run overhead on cable trays fastened to the underside

of the slab/roof.

In Riser Shafts:

. TPI conductors in steel cable ducts and/or steel conduits.

Through false ceiling spaces or roof spaces:

. TPI conductors in metal cable ducts or PVC or steel conduits.

Low voltage control wiring:

. TPI conductors in steel cable ducts or steel conduits for low voltage control circuits only,

separate from line voltage power and control circuits.

Control wiring to thermocouple, resistance bulb and solid state electronic sensors:

. TPI insulated, metal braded and TPI sheathed conductors in steel ducts or steel conduits,

with other power and control wiring, or TPI conductors in steel conduits or ducts for

sensor circuits only.

(N.B. Motor thermistor sensor wiring may be run in TPI with other power and control wiring

for relatively short runs (not more than 20m) provided the sensor wires are twisted together).

Down columns or walls in occupied areas:

. TPI conductors in steel conduit cast in concrete columns and walls, or chased into

masonry walls if to be rendered or faced, or run concealed behind timber of other surface

finishes.

Each wiring method shall comply with the relevant clause of the Specification.

Minimum size of conductors shall be 2.5mm for power and 1.5mm for control wiring.

All wiring in TPI and TPS shall be by loop in method.

Flexible conductors shall be used where connecting to equipment mounted on hinged

switchboard doors or in other positions subject to movement and groups of wires shall be

loomed together and arranged so that the door can open and close without fouling the wires.

23.12.12 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

All conduit shall:

. be installed using the loop in system;

. be free from conduit fittings other than junction boxes, wall boxes, bends or couplings;

. be 20mm minimum diameter;

. be installed so that conductors are only drawn into conduit at outlet positions, switch

positions, draw-in boxes and switchboards;




. be installed complete with fittings and draw wires before wiring of a particular section is

commenced;

. be concealed from view by running in ceiling spaces, concrete slabs, air space of stud or

double brick (or block) walls or chased into rendered masonry walls unless otherwise

specified or agreed by the Engineer;

. contain a maximum of two power circuits;

. be placed above the bottom reinforcing bars where run in concrete slabs;

. be set at all changes of direction where concealed within the structure;

. be set using approved type conduit benders which prevent flattening of the conduit.

(Application of heat in bending conduit will not be permitted);

. be enclosed within the concrete and not in contact with the fill where installed in slabs

poured on filling;

. be installed in a manner which will not necessitate penetration of damp courses or

influence the entry of moisture into the building;

. be located below the thermal insulation where installed in ceiling spaces;

. be provided with draw-in boxes at 20m (maximum) intervals;

. terminate at deep pattern junction boxes for ceiling outlets embedded in concrete;

. standard depth junction boxes for outlets above false ceilings, and

. steel wall boxes for all flush wall outlets and switches;

. be provided with a 2.2mm diameter (minimum) galvanised steel draw-wire where

installed for future wiring or wiring by others;

. be clear of all moisture before installation of wiring;

. be fitted with a sealed cap to prevent the ingress of moisture or obstructions entering the

conduit;

. be erected with a maximum of two right angle bends or sets without a draw-in box being

interposed;

. be equipped with flexible couplings for 600mm on either side where runs cross

constructional joints;

. be spaced not closer than 25mm where located within concrete;

. be positioned within concrete walls or columns with a minimum of 25mm of cover;

Conduit exposed to view shall:

. be installed in straight runs which are parallel or normal to the building structure;

. be installed over routes as agreed by the Engineer;




. be erected to avoid the formation of moisture traps, but where U sections cannot be

avoided the lowest point in the run shall be drilled (3mm diameter) to form a drain;

. be secured by spacer bar type saddles grouped in symmetrical positions providing 3mm

clearance of the fixing surface;

Flexible conduit shall:

. be provided between fixed conduit and equipment which is likely to be moved or subject

to vibration;

. fitted with brass glands;

. be “Kopex”;

. be connected to concealed fixed conduit via a flush mounted junction box with a conduit

nipple secured by locknuts to the coverplate;

Steel conduit shall:

. be provided with heavy protection to where installed in exterior or damp situations and in

plantrooms;

. be cut square, threaded with the minimum number of threads being cut consistent with

the union, painted over the threads with conductive paint, reamed to remove burrs and

adequately terminated into threaded connections or locknuts with no threads showing

after assembly;

. be fixed at 1200mm (minimum) centres where surface run;

Conduit for underground wiring shall:

. comprise galvanised water pipe, or heavy duty rigid PVC conduit.

. be fitted with corrosion proof fittings;

. installed over routes as approved by the Engineer;

Conduit in coolrooms and refrigerated chambers shall be heavy duty rigid PVC drilled for

condensate drainage at low points.

Rigid PVC conduit shall:

. be of light duty;

. be jointed together and to fittings with an approved cement;

. be coloured orange;

. be provided with one approved expansion joint for each straight section exceeding 6

metres in length;

. be secured in position by approved saddles spaced at 600mm (maximum) apart;

. be secured with galvanised or PVC saddles where installed in exterior locations or

exposed to view;




. be fastened to the side of a timber batten where installed across rafters or joists.

Where rigid PVC conduit is installed within poured concrete provide adequate supervision

during the pouring of concrete to ensure that conduits are not damaged or dislodged;

rectification of such defects shall be performed as part of these works without cost to the

Proprietor.

Rigid PVC conduit shall not be used in the following locations:

. where exposed to mechanical damage.

. where subject to ambient or contact temperature in excess of 50ΕC.

. for surface runs exposed to view.

. in hazardous locations.

23.12.13 CABLE DUCTS

23.12.13.01 Metal

Metal cable ducts shall be manufactured from galvanised steel. All cut ends and bends shall be

neatly made and filed free of sharp edges. All ducts shall have lift off lids. Joints between

sections of duct shall be bolted. Hangers and supports shall be spaced at regular intervals to

avoid sagging of the duct. A minimum clearance of 150mm above and 600mm to one side shall

be provided for access.

23.12.13.02 Plastic

Moulded plastic cable ducts shall be used inside switchboards only.

Plastic cable ducts shall be slotted both sides for cable entry and for ventilation and shall have

clip on lids. Ducts shall be sized such that when the switchboard is completely wired the ducts

are not more than half full of cables.

23.12.13.03 Cable Trays

Cable trays shall be slotted and folded 1.2mm thick galvanised steel up to 200mm wide and

shall be galvanised steel slotted and folded 1.5mm or galvanised steel folded section rung type

in 300mm wide size and larger.

Cable trays shall be installed:

. fixing flush to ceilings, slabs or walls;

. suspending by hangers from roof structure, ceilings, slabs or on angle brackets out from

walls.

Slotted galvanised steel trays 150mm and wider shall be supported on both sides over their full

length by 25 x 25 x 3mm MS angle where necessary to prevent sagging.

Cable trays shall be supported at regular intervals to avoid sagging between supports.




A minimum clearance distance of 150mm shall be left above the tray and 600mm on the side of

the tray for access.

23.12.14 TPS CONDUCTORS INSTALLATION

TPS conductors shall:

. not be installed in locations where they cannot easily be withdrawn for rewiring

purposes;

. be enclosed within concealed conduit where run in rendered walls or concrete;

. be installed through suitably sized access holes positioned vertically or horizontally in

line where run within stud partitions;

. be secured in position where installed in accessible locations;

. not be secured or clipped where installed in inaccessible locations such as cavities and

stud partitions;

. be protected by conduits where installed in locations which are liable to mechanical

damage;

. be used for all wiring inside refrigerated rooms, installed in conduit.

23.12.15 TPI CONDUCTORS

TPI conductors shall be:

. PVC insulated .6/1.0 kV grade type V75 copper conductors enclosed in conduit or ducts;

. fitted with approved lugs or terminal clips where terminated in bolted connections;

. terminated by baring, twisting together and inserting in minimum 30 amp rating tunnel

type clamp terminal strips for cable sizes up to 19/1.78;

. terminated using suitable lugs or ferrules soldered or crimped on using suitable tools for

cable sizes larger than 19/1.78;

. supported using plastic clips for single circuits run inside switchboards.

Where PVC insulated 6/1.0 kV V75 grade copper conductors are wired through switchboards

and connected direct to switchgear then the cable shall be sized so that it shall not be loaded

above 80% of its rated current. Alternatively which case they may be sized for 100% of their

rated current.

23.12.16 SHIELDED CABLES

Shielded cables shall be thermoplastic insulated, metal braided or metal wound and

thermoplastic sheathed.

Metal shielding shall be earthed at each termination.

The type of shielded cable used shall be suitable for the particular controls application.




23.12.17 MOTORS

Motors and starters shall have ample capacity and suitable characteristics to perform the

specified duties without overheating under all possible starting and running conditions.

All motors shall be capable of carrying overload torques for 15 seconds in accordance with BS

2613.

Motors 0.37 kW and over shall be 1450 RPM drip proof squirrel cage induction type except

where specified otherwise in the Schedule of Motors and Starters and shall be designed and

rated for continuous full load operation on 415 volt, 3 phase, 50 cycle power supply and shall

comply with current Australian Standards.

Motors shall be foot mounted.

Motors less than 0.37 kW shall be single phase, rated for continuous full load operation on 240

volt 50 cycle power supply and shall comply with current Australian Standards.

All motors shall have grease packed ball or roller bearings installed in housings. Motors with

frame size D160 and larger shall have grease nipples and grease relief openings.

Bearings for motors driving refrigeration compressors shall be maximum capacity deep groove

ball type.

All motors supplied shall be backed by local service organisations able to provide rewinding

and all other servicing.

Motors installed in damp locations or exposed to weather shall be TEFC and weatherproof.

Insulation class shall be Class E.

Motors 37 kW and more shall have p.t.c. thermistor sensors installed in pockets wound into

each of the starter windings during manufacture with each thermistor wired separately back to

the motor terminal box.

Kilowatt and current ratings of motors, are given for tendering purposes only and shall be

adjusted as required to suit the particular equipment supplied.

All belt driven or variable pitch fan motor kilowatts shall be sufficient to supply 10% more air

than specified against the resultant resistance of the system. Fan kilowatts in any case shall be

not less than the nominated kilowatt figures given in the schedule.

23.12.18 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR TO BE USED

23.12.18.01 Switchboards

General

Switchboards shall:

. comply with the requirements of DEWA and current British Standard;

. be complete in every respect, fully wired and factory tested;




. be of overall dimensions suitable for the space allocated;

. be designed to facilitate easy access to and removal of component parts;

. constructed and contain equipment to the approval of the local Supply Authority.

Manufacture

Switchboards shall be manufactured by an approved company, experienced in mechanical

services switchboard manufacture.

Switchboard Types to be Used

Switchboard shall be of the type, form and shall be constructed to withstand prospective short-

circuit currents as follows:

Form 2

The switchboard shall:

. be fully enclosed, front access type for mounting against a wall;

. have removable panels along the top front for access to bus duct behind;

. have hinged lockable doors at the front of all equipment mounting cubicles;

. have removable covers at the side where necessary for access to incoming mains, mains

connections and busbars from the main isolator unit.

All stop-start switches, pilot lights and meters shall be mounted on the upper section of the

hinged doors to the equipment mounting enclosures.

All equipment in the panel shall be front connected. Wiring shall be run in moulded plastic

cable ducts arranged at the sides, top, bottom and between rows of equipment.

Busbars shall be run in the busbar chamber at the top and bus droppers shall be in front of the

equipment mounting panels

Where busbar droppers are used to fuse carriers then the busbars shall be run in front of the

equipment mounting panel and the sheetmetal mounting panel shall be covered with 1.6mm

thick insulating material.

Main isolating units shall be frame mounted behind a separate hinged door through which the

operating handle or toggle protrudes and the on-off indication is visible. Where possible the

mains connections and busbar connections to the unit shall be fully accessible when the door is

open.

23.12.18.02 Schedule of Switchboard Equipment

Switchboards shall be complete with all switchgear, controlgear and equipment as specified and

necessary to perform the functions specified and shown on the drawings.

The following equipment shall be mounted on the face of the switchboards in addition to

isolator units as specified elsewhere:

. stop-start switches as shown on the drawings;




. pilot lights as shown on the drawings;

. sequence selector switches as shown on the drawings.

Test-Off-Auto switches may be mounted on the face or inside the equipment cubicles.

If a building automation system is specified then controls stop-start switches, pilot lights, Test-

Off-Auto switches shall be provided on the controls interface panel adjacent each switchboard.

Sequence selection shall be provided by the building automation programme and sequence

switches are not required on the switchboards.

23.12.18.03 Cabinet Construction

All switchboards shall:

. be of unitary welded and bolted construction of folded section minimum 1.6mm bright

steel sheet;

. have all joints welded with continuous seam welds which shall be ground flush after

fabrication;

. have all corners rounded;

. be provided with suitable means of securing the complete assembly to floors and/or

walls;

. be fitted with approved means of supporting all cabling with bushed holes between

compartments;

. contain a separate compartment for Supply Authority equipment which is provided with a

means of fitting the Supply Authority’s seals.

. be arranged so that the distance between floor level and top of switchboard does not

exceed 2250 mm.

. have 100 mm (minimum) wiring space on each side and 150 mm (minimum) wiring

space at top and bottom, the wiring space being increased to suit the quantities and types

of cables entering and leaving the switchboards;

. contain cable entries and/or gland plates, sized to suit the cables specified and positioned

to suit site conditions;

. contain louvred vents at the top and bottom with fine bronze wire mesh welded inside for

switchboards larger than 0.3 cubic metres in volume;

. be fitted with gaskets to render the switchboard drip and vermin proof and preventing the

ingress of dust and insects.

Free standing switchboards shall be constructed in sections to allow handling which can be

bolted together on site. Removable lifting eyebolts shall be fitted to each section.

Front access wall or floor mounted switchboards shall have a clear space at the bottom of the

panel for access to cables and/or conduits which pass through the base and for wiring between

cubicles which runs along the bottom of the panel.

Doors and hinged panels shall:




. be fabricated from 1.6mm (minimum) folded bright mild steel;

. be fitted with a heavy duty brass latch complete with two keys which are common to all

switchboard locks;

. be provided with folded metal stiffeners and bracing to achieve rigidity and prevent

warping or sagging;

. have edges folded back and gasketted so that the door stands proud of the cabinet by

approximately 20mm;

. be hung on chromium plated lift-off pintle type hinges;

. be provided with latching bars on large doors;

. be fitted with chromium plated lifting handles;

. where installed on the back of switchboards, be secured in the closed position by means

of not less than two 6mm diameter studs with acorn nuts.

Removable panels shall be constructed as for doors except that they shall be fastened and

located with not less than four 6mm diameter studs placed near each corner with acorn nuts in

place of hinges.

Coverplates shall:

. be fabricated from 2mm (minimum) flat bright mild steel;

. be not larger than 1 metre in height and in no case exceed 0.6m2 in area;

. be provided with two plated lifting handles;

. be located and secured by means of 4 (minimum) 6mm diameter studs with acorn nuts.

23.12.18.04 Finishes

Ferrous metal shall:

. be cleaned free from rust, corrosion, grease and scale;

. have rough surfaces filled and rubbed smooth;

. be painted using at least one coat of rust inhibiting self etching primer, an undercoat of

zinc enriched paint and two coats of gloss enamel.

. have external surfaces finished in gloss white colour;

. have external surfaces finished in Light Orange No. 557 to BS 381 Colours for Specific

Purposes.

Non-ferrous parts shall be cadmium plated or tinned.

External handles, bolt heads, catches, locks, nuts and screws shall be stainless steel or chromium

plated.




23.12.18.05 Busbars

Busbars within the switchboard shall:

. be manufactured from high conductivity hard drawn copper bar with radiused edges;

. be of sufficient cross sectional area to supply the capacity of the switchboard when all

space on the switchboard is filled;

. be rated and sized for busbars in duct;

. be of minimum size 12mm x 3mm except for tee offs to Quicklag/ACB’s;

. be arranged so that all joints, terminations and fixings are fully accessible;

. be disposed and supported so that under short circuit conditions no busbar material is

stressed to more than 25% of its breaking load or 33% of its elastic limit (whichever is

the lesser).

. be arranged so that they can safely withstand the stresses caused by the prospective

maximum fault current as specified herein for a period of one second;

. have joints finished, electro-tinned, coated with acid free vaseline and bolted together

with Cadmium plated steel bolts, washers, nuts and locknuts;

. be arranged for future extensions to adjacent switchboards;

. be provided with a removable section for the mounting of current transformers so that

they may be removed or replaced without disturbing the remainder of the switchboard;

. be supported on synthetic resin moulded type insulators, panels, and cleats;

. pass through 12mm (minimum) thick close fitting insulated panels through a single hole

in metalwork where installed from one compartment to another;

. be fully insulated by either

- PVC dipping with a minimum of two coats;

- shrink-on PVC sleeving with taped joints;

- be phase coloured as follows:

A phase B phase C phase Neutral Earth

Red White Blue Black Green / Yellow

23.12.18.06 Links

Links for terminating neutral and earthing connections shall be:

. of brass or copper and square or rectangular section;

. fitted with tunnel type terminals for cables up to 6mm2 and stud type terminals to accept

cable lugs for larger cables;

. fully accessible.

Where two or more neutral links are provided they shall be joined with busbar of the same size

as the main neutral link to the switchboard.




Where two or more earth links are provided they shall be joined with not less than 12mm x

3mm busbar.

23.12.18.07 Hardware

All bolts, screws and nuts shall:

. Have metric threads; . have hexagonal shaped heads;

. be of non-ferrous metal or alternatively cadmium

plated steel;

. be fitted with flat and spring

washers;

be chromium plated where exposed to view.

Self tapping screws will not be accepted.

23.12.18.08 Mounting of Equipment

The layout and spacing of equipment, wiring, ducts, busbars, terminal strips shall be such that

all equipment can be removed for replacement or service without dismantling adjacent

equipment or busbars, and reasonable access space shall be available for wiring connections to

equipment and terminal strips.

Cable ducts shall be sized so that when the panel is fully wired they are not more than half full

of wires.

All terminal connections and terminal strips shall be fully accessible.

Circuit breakers rated above 100 amps:

. shall be arranged for back connection where installed within free standing cubicle type

switchboards;

. shall be arranged for front connection where installed within front access switchboards;

. shall be arranged so that the toggles operate in a vertical direction;

“FB” frame circuit breakers:

. shall be arranged for front connection only;

. shall be secured on to insulating mounting strips by means of brass screws with flat and

spring washers on brass studs with flat washers, nuts and locknuts;

. the screws or studs shall screw into tapped holes in metal;

. the screws or studs for circuit breakers up to 55 amps rating shall be 5mm diameter.

Circuit breakers above 55 amps rating shall be fixed with 6mm diameter screws or studs;

. the mounting arrangement shall be such that a broken stripped or damaged securing stud

or screw may be readily replaced from the front of the switchboard without disturbing

adjacent circuit breakers;

. shall be mounted on a lift out chassis assembly.

Quicklag circuit breakers:




. shall be secured by separate clip-in type fixings as provided by the circuit breaker

manufacturer;

. shall be mounted on a lift out chassis assembly.

CFS units shall be flush mounted so that the front covers provided with the unit can be opened

or removed without removing the coverplates from the switchboard.

23.12.18.09 Installation of Switchboards

All switchboards shall be secured in position with masonry anchors and screws or bolts.

Explosive powered fixings are not acceptable.

Cubicle type switchboards shall be levelled with approved packing.

Entry holes into switchboard enclosures shall be cut only by means of hole saw or hack saw.

Flame equipment for making entry holes is not acceptable.

23.12.18.10 Switcgear and Controlgear to be used

This clause applies to equipment in the mechanical switchboard. Where packaged air

conditioning units or fan coil units are specified then these shall be fitted with the standard

electrical panel complete with switchgear and controlgear as normally supplied standard with

the particular brand of equipment.

Form 1 and 2 Switchboards

(a) main CFS + ACB sub-circuit protection

(b) main isolator s/w + HRC fault limiting fuses + ACB sub-circuit protection.

(c) main isolator s/w + HRC fuse sub-circuit protection up to 100A, CFS units 100A and

above

Each type of switchgear and controlgear shall comply with the relevant clause of the

Specification.

All circuit protection equipment shall be suitable for the fault level of the installation and the

discrimination shall be selected for the proper operation of other circuit protection equipment.

23.12.18.11 Switchgear and Controlgear

Circuit Breakers

All circuit breakers shall:

. be of the same manufacture selected from one of the following:

Email General Electric F.P.E. or approved equal

. incorporate the following features:

Arc interrupting device; Inverse time current characteristic;

Visual indication in the tripped position; Trip to operate when breaker is locked on;

Thermal and magnetic tripping mechanism; Non-welding contacts.

. be interchangeable for single and multi pole units used on final sub-circuits.




. have an interrupting capacity adequate for the maximum prospective fault current to

which they may be subjected.

. incorporate similar features and uniformity of style for all frame sizes and ratings.

For motor drive circuits the magnetic trip shall be selected to hold the maximum starting

currents applicable to the installation; the thermal trip shall be selected to hold 115% of the

motor full load current for continuous operation and shall hold the maximum motor starting

currents under warm/repetitive start conditions for not less than 10 seconds; the thermal trip

shall break the circuit in not more than 150 seconds under cold start conditions at the maximum

starting current for the motor.

23.12.18.12 Switches and Isolators (Switchboard Mounted)

All switches and isolators

. shall comply with current British Standard.

. shall be fault making and load breaking.

. may be c.f.s. units fitted with solid links or non-auto circuit breakers as specified herein.

. shall be spring assisted manual closing.

. shall be suitable for the prospective fault current specified herein.

. shall be selected from the following manufacturers:

Hazemeyer

or approved equal

. shall have double make and break contacts.

. shall include a mechanical :”on” and “off” indicator.

. shall have magnetic arc chutes on each pole.

23.12.18.13 Combination Fuse Switches (CFS UNITS)

CFS units shall:

. comply with BS 3185


Century G.E.C./English Electric Nilsen or approved equal

. be fitted with zoning barriers.

. incorporate the following features:

Double make and break contacts door interlock mechanism

silver plated contacts removable fuse assembly

mechanical “on” and “off” indicators lockable in either “on” or “off” position

facilities for fitting auxiliary control switch or

interlock key system




. have covers finished in the same colour as the switchboard cabinet.

. have fully shrouded contacts.

23.12.18.14 HRC Fuses

HRC fuses shall:

. have a moulded plastic insulated fuse carrier

. have a fuse indicator which is visible without having to remove the fuse.

. have fully shrouded base contacts.


G.E.C./English Electric Federal or approved equal

.

23.12.18.15 HRC Fuse Cartridges

HRC fuse cartridges shall:

. be certified for a fusing factor of Class Q1.

. be G.E.C./English Electric Type T, or approved equal.

Three (3) spare HRC fuse cartridges of each rating and type used, (including fault current

limiting fuses regardless of whether they are incorporated within a circuit breaker or not), shall

be provided on a labelled panel inside the door of each switchboard.

23.12.18.16 Contactors

Contactors shall:

. comply with BS 775 Part 1

. be suitable for AC3 utilisation category

. have a minimum resistive current rating of that specified in the schedules.

. be of the same manufacture selected from the following:

Fanal Nilsen Email

Sprecher & Schuh Siemens Schuckert or approved equal

. have renewable type main contacts, auxiliary contacts and operating coils.

23.12.18.17 Overload Protection

Thermal Overload Relays - Block Type

Thermal overload relays shall be fitted to all motors.

Thermal overload relays shall have the following features:




. block type for mounting direct to the contactor up to 37kW range and for separate

mounting above that size;

. same manufacture as contactor;

. rated to suit contactor sizes;

. fitted with interchangeable heaters to suit motor current rating and with adjustment dial to

select actual setting required;

. ambient temperature compensated;

. tunnel type clamp terminals;

. single phasing protection, by way of differential trip action between bimetal heater

elements on each phase;

. shall be used in conjunction with thermistors in motor windings for 37 kW rating and

above;

. manual reset.

Thermistors and Thermistor Relays

Thermistors shall be provided in all motors 37 kW and larger in addition to thermal overload

protection fitted to the starter.

Thermistors shall have positive temperature co-efficient and shall be installed during motor

manufacture into pockets wound into the motor winding using a suitable non-setting thermal

putty.

Three thermistors shall be installed in each motor, one in each winding and each wired

separately back to the motor terminal box by the motor manufacturer.

Thermistors shall be wired in series to a suitable matched thermistor control unit to with manual

reset button.

The active circuit to the thermistor relay shall be from a source which is not interrupted by

normal stop-start operations.

Motor Sentinels

All single phase motors shall be protected by motor sentinel thermal overload switches except

where inherent overheat protection devices are built into the motors by the motor manufacturer.

Inherent Overheat Devices

When fitted, these shall have a manual reset.

Magnetic Overload Relays

Magnetic overload relays shall be provided on D.O.L. starters for motors 110 kW and larger in

applications where high starting torques are required and for chiller motor starters when

required by the chiller manufacturer and for auto-transformer and star-delta starters as specified.

Magnetic overloads shall be dashpot type fitted to all three phases with adjustment for 115-




125% FLC for the motor, with manual reset, and complying with BS 587. Magnetic overload

relays shall be Cutler-Hammer, square-D or equal.

23.12.18.18 Local Isolating Switches

Isolating switches installed adjacent motors shall be rated for not less than the locked rotor

current of the motor.

Switches shall have shockproof, dustproof plastic enclosures except where exposed to weather

or in damp locations where weatherproof enclosures shall be used and all conduit entries sealed

weatherproof.

23.12.18.19 Time Switches

Time switches shall incorporate the following features:

. 365 day digital; . 20 amp contacts;

. push button daylight saving

adjustment.

. day omitting device;

. external manual operation; . plug-in type;

. 16 hour minimum battery reserve; . be provided with an electrically connected by-

pass switch wire to the time switched circuit

for “Manual-Off-Auto” operation.

. be of Warburton Franki

manufacture type 61/0 or equal

Time switches for seven day operation shall be Horsttmann type B/SRS as supplied by NHP.

23.12.18.20 Current Transformers

Current transformers for Supply Authority equipment shall be provided in accordance with their

requirements.

Current transformers for other usages shall:

. be Class 1.0 for metering, Class 2.0 for maximum demand metering and Class 10.0 for

protection;

. be of the resin encapsulated type;

. have 5 amp secondary windings;

. be suitable to withstand the maximum fault current as specified herein;

. be sized to allow for an additional 25% load burden for future loads.

23.12.18.21 Meters

All meters shall:

. be of the flush mounted type, square fronted of dimensions 96mm x 96mm with a

quadrant scale.

. be provided with a means of zero adjustment without the need for any dismantling;

. be within - 3% accuracy;




. have a deflection of approximately 80% full scale range with a 5 amp load;

. be suitable for continuous duty.

. have direct reading scales graduated to suit each application and with black characters on

a white background;

Maximum demand indicators shall be integrated to maximum demand over a minute period.

Voltmeters shall be connected to a transfer switch so that phase to phase and phase to neutral

readings can be obtained.

Kilowatt hour meters shall be polyphase type incorporating direct reading cyclometer register.

23.12.18.22 Auxiliary and Control Switches

Auxiliary and control switches shall:

. have contacts of minimum 10

amp rating;

. be of Kraus and Naimer manufacturer or equal.

. be rotary snap action type;

23.12.18.23 Indicator Lights

Indicator lights shall:

. comply with BS 1050;

. be of the encapsulated transformer type with 12 volt secondary windings.;

. have domed coloured lenses of 25mm diameter;

. have 2 watt minimum lamps.

3 spare lamps of each size and type used shall be provided on a labelled panel inside the door of

each switchboard.

23.12.18.24 Control Relays

Control relays shall:

. have 10 amp minimum contact rating;

. be continuously rated;

. have silver contacts.

Time delay relays shall be synchronous motor drive or solid state electronic type. Pneumatic or

dash-pot operated devices are unacceptable.

23.12.18.25 Auto-Transformer Starters

Auto-transformer starters shall be Korndorfer or equivalent connected closed transition type and

shall incorporate thermal overload and single phasing protection.




Transformers shall be two winding type up to 75 kW and three winding type for larger ratings

with 50%, 65% and 80% tappings on each winding and rated for not less than 4 starts per hour.

Transformers shall be fitted with thermistor or thermostat type over temperature protection

inserted in pockets embedded in each winding.

23.12.18.26 Star-Delta Starters (Closed Transition)

Star-delta starters shall have resistance bank closed transition and shall incorporate thermal

overload and single phasing protection. Magnetic overload and under-voltage protection shall

be provided on motors 75 kW and larger. Starters shall be rated for not less than 4 starts per

hour.

Over temperature protection shall be provided on resistor banks. Resistance banks shall be

mounted in a well ventilated enclosure separate from the starter cubicle.

23.12.19 SPEED CONTROLLERS

23.12.19.01 General

Nominal Voltage Operation

The controller shall be of the type suitable for operation on a 3 phase, 400V supply. Single

phase input, 3 phase output units will not be accepted.

The controller approved as fully compliant is the VLT6000 series for subsequent generation as

manufactured by Danfoss.

Alternative controllers, fully compliant with the specification, may be considered. Any

alternative controller offered, must be submitted with a completed “Variable Speed Drives

Compliance Criteria” form and include the type and model offered.

Voltage Tolerance

The controller shall be capable of operating continuously at nominated full load rating with

expected variations of + 10% in the supply voltage and + 2% in the supply frequency.

Maximum Ambient Operation

The controller shall be suitable for operation at full load in an ambient temperature of 40°C.

Any derating applied to meet this specification shall be stated. Care shall be taken during

installation to ensure that the controller is protected from direct sunlight and weather.

Enclosure Rating

Where the controllers are separately wall mounted, the enclosure protection rating shall comply

to the following guidelines.

. In clean areas where no dust and moisture are present the rating shall be minimum IP20.

. In areas where moisture or harsh environmental conditions are present the controller shall

be protected to IP54 rating. Suitable deratings to comply with the ambient temperature

requirements shall be applied and stated where necessary.

. Controllers mounted in the supply air chamber where low temperature saturated air is

normally encountered shall be protected to IP54.




Clearances and Air Flows

The Tenderer shall state the clearances and air flows required for adequate cooling of the

inverters.

Single Series

Preference will be given to Tenders offering a single series of controller over the whole power

range to ensure a common user interface, common circuit requirements and common spare

parts.

Quality Assurance Standards

The controller shall be manufactured to quality assurance and manufacturing standards

according to ISO 9001.

23.12.19.02 Performance

Load Torque Requirement

The controllers shall be specifically designed to HVAC operation. The output waveform shall

ensure that maximum total efficiency is obtained from the motor and controller at all loads and

speeds. The output voltage and frequency shall be formed to control the quadratic load torques

produced by pumps and fans at maximum efficiency.

However, the controller shall still be capable of providing 160% torque for 0.5 sec and 110%

torque for 1 min at starting.

Motor Derating

The controller shall be of the type utilizing advanced digital PWM technology. Preference shall

be given to systems where the output waveform is sinusoidal at all frequencies, such that the

motor power is fully utilized at the motors rated speed and no motor derating is necessary.

Suppliers that can show a test of the motors temperature rise on controller operation, where the

motor is operated at full load and speed, shall be seen to be suitable proof. The test shall be

based on a Class B temperature rise in Class F winding insulation.

If derating is applicable the Tenderer shall supply curves showing the necessary derating of the

motor.

Mains Voltage Compensation

The controller shall automatically correct the output voltage during main’s variations of + 10%

to prevent loss of torque and speed variations occurring during motor operation.

Automatic Energy Optimisation

The controller shall incorporate an “Automatic Energy Optimiser” function which continually

adjusts the output voltage to a reduced level to give maximum motor efficiency at any given

partial load.

Fixed or manually adjustable voltage to frequency ratio curves are not acceptable.

Speed Control – Open Loop




The controller shall automatically adjust the output frequency and voltage to maintain a stable

motor speed of + 0.5% of the motor’s rated speed. The accuracy shall be maintained over a

speed range of 1% to 100% without the use of a closed feedback loop.

Radio Frequency Interference Emission

Tenderers are reminded that the building contains equipment sensitive to RFI interference. Full

compliance to the standards is requested.

Controllers shall be marked as being C-tick compliant in accordance with the Radio

Communications Act.

The controllers shall be fitted with RFI filters in accordance with their C-tick certification and

the standards for electromagnetic interference Group 1 Class A or Group 1 Class B as

determined by the type of installation. The Tenderer shall nominate which class will be

complied with and the length of motor cable at which the compliance testing was conducted.

Preference shall be given to controllers that use their own dedicated RFI filters, and are

integrated into the controller’s design.

Where controllers are designed with external RFI filters, they shall be assembled by the

manufacturer and supplied as a complete unit tested to C-Tick compliance.

The separate RFI filters, if needed, shall be mounted in metal enclosures to the same protection

rating as the controller and located as close to the mains connection terminals of the controller

as possible.

The Tenderer shall nominate the installation methods required to maintain C-tick compliance

including the maximum cable length for which compliance can be maintained.

Controllers must have metal enclosures designed to prevent the radiated radio frequency

interference noise (RFI) from affecting the operation of other equipment. The metal enclosures

must be earthed with a loc impedance connection to the main earthing system either via a large

cross section earthing conductor or by direct mounting on an unpainted earthed mounting plate.

Note: The minimum earth conductor sizes specified by current British Standard may not be

sufficient to provide good earthing at the frequencies in question.

EMC effective terminations for power, control and communication cable screens must be

provided.

Preference shall be given to controllers designed with earth/cable screen clamps that fit over the

cable and offer the largest cross-sectional area.

Radio Frequency Interference Immunity

The controllers shall be immune to interference from other RFI producing equipment.

In addition, the controllers shall be suitable to operate on an electrical network containing UPS

equipment that may contain active harmonic filters.

The controllers shall be immune to interference frequencies greater than 800Hz.

Harmonics and Power Factor




Tenderers are reminded that the building contains a high portion of harmonic producing loads.

The information requested in this section of the specification is important for the evaluation of

the total building’s harmonic distortion limits.

The harmonic voltage distortion of the installation must be assessed and the Tenderer shall

include a harmonic voltage distortion calculation based on the loads and network data given

elsewhere in the specification.

The harmonic current distortion produced by the controllers shall comply with IEC 1000-3-2

and IEC 1000-3-4 respectively according to the current ratings.

Mains Harmonic currents generated by the controller must be limited by mains reactors or

reactors in the DC bus of the controller. Preference shall be given to controllers that include

reactors in the DC. Bus circuit.

Controllers that do not include internal reactors shall be supplied with external three phase

reactors connected on the mains side of the controller. The reactors shall be fitted to each phase

and shall have a minimum impedance of 5%. The reactors shall be mounted in steel enclosures

to a rating equivalent to the controller.

When external three phase reactors are supplied, Tenderers shall include the amount of voltage

drop that will occur over the reactors at full load and advise how the controller will respond to

the lower voltage. The Tenderer shall state the amount of expected derating which will occur

on the motor when running at rated speed and load.

Tenderers shall include a spectrum of harmonic generating currents in the 1st-19th harmonic

range and shall state both the fundamental and the total power factor of the controller at 100%

load.

Calculation of the total power factor must be based on the ratio of the input power determined

by the fundamental current and the total input kVA determined by the RMS current which

includes all harmonic currents up to and including the 19th.

The fundamental power being the displacement between the fundamental current and the

voltage will not be accepted as power factor, as it only applies to power factor in loads which

draw a sinusoidal current.

Switching on the Input

The controller shall be sized to allow for a minimum of 1 start/min. on mains operation.

Start/stop operation using electronic operation shall be unlimited.

Switching on the Output

The controller shall be suitably protected to allow for unlimited switching to take place on the

output via, a contactor or isolating switch without damage to the inverter transistors or the

switching device.

Motor Voltage Rise Time and Peak Voltages

The controller shall include features which limit the rate of the output voltage rise over time

(dV/dt) and prevent peak voltages from occurring. Preference shall be given to controllers that

integrate these features into the design of the unit. Rise times and peak voltages shall be within

the limits specified in IEC34-17 and shall be stated in the Tender for 50mts of motor cable.

Motor Noise




It shall be possible to reduce the motor noise by increasing the inverter switching frequency.

Any derating required when this feature is used shall be stated. The controller shall be able to

monitor the load to maintain low noise operation over the whole speed range unless the load

becomes high enough to require derating. It will then automatically reduced the switching

frequency to enable the output to be maintained.

The controller will also monitor the heatsink temperature and on high temperature will lower the

switching frequency to avoid any derating unless it is absolutely necessary.

It shall be possible to fit an LC filter to the output of the inverter to give a sinusoidal voltage as

well as the usual sinusoidal current to completely eliminate the inverter driven noise.

Cable Length

Controllers shall be capable of allowing cable runs of up to 300 metres using unscreened cables

and 150 metres for screened cables. If the controller cannot allow this cable length, the

Tenderer shall state the maximum cable length allowed and the motor coil reactance value

intended to be used to increase the cable length. The Tenderer shall state clearly the voltage

drop and additional motor derating that will occur when motor reactors are fitted.

Auto Tuning of Motor Parameters

The controllers which incorporate automatic tuning and setting of the main motor parameters

are preferred. The tuning shall be based on measurements of the motors inductance and

resistance.

The automatic tuning shall stop and register an alarm condition if the automatic tuning detects

an out of balance in the motor windings, or cannot set the correct parameters for the motor.

Systems that do not require the motor to turn during tuning are considered to be beneficial

The Tenderer shall state whether auto tuning is included and whether auto tuning requires the

motor to turn.

Flying Start

The controller shall be suitable for control of high inertia loads and be able to catch a rotating

motor under any operating condition without tripping.

The function shall also ensure that a motor on a high inertia load already pre-rotating, even in

the reverse direction, can be switched onto, braked to zero speed by DC injection braking

incorporated in the controller and then accelerated to the preset speed in the correct direction.

Skip Frequencies

In order to eliminate any system resonance occurring within the motor’s operating frequency

range, the controller shall be provided with four bypass frequency adjustments. The bandwidth

of the frequency bypass shall be adjustable.

PID Regulator

The controller shall incorporate a PID regulator to enable closed loop control of the process.

The regulator shall operate in conjunction with the ramp adjustments to allow smooth

acceleration into regulation. It shall respect the controller’s minimum and maximum limits and

shall include an anti windup function.




The PID regulator shall be directly programmed in process units such as m³/h or kPa.

The PID regulator shall be able to operate in the normal or inverse modes.

Remote monitoring of the feed back signal via an 0/4 – 20mA signal from the controller is

required.

Feedback Calculation

The PID controller shall be able to accept up to 2 sensor feedbacks. It shall be able to calculate

the Minimum, Maximum, Sum, Difference and Average of the 2 signals.

In addition it shall have a 2 zone Minimum or Maximum selection where the zones have

independent setpoints.

Feedback Conversion

To allow a pressure transmitter to be used as a flow measuring device the controller shall be

able to perform a square root conversion on the feedback signal.

Sleep Mode

The controller shall incorporate a sleep mode function which can automatically shutdown the

motor when the speed drops below a set value. Provision shall also be made to configure the

wake up conditions under which the motor will restart. The sleep mode shall include a boost

function to extend the interval between starting and stopping and to reduce cycling.

Run Permissive

The controller should include a Run Permissive function which allows control land interlocking

of other mechanical equipment such as dampers.

Motor Preheat

To prevent condensation build up in the stator the controller shall incorporate a pre-heat

function. When the motor is stopped it shall receive a low DC voltage from the controller.

Fire Mode

Under fire mode operation when the Building Management System (BMS) has shutdown, the

controller shall automatically default to run at a preset speed with the controllers inbuilt motor

protection inhibited.

Access to DC Bus Connection

Provision shall be made for accessing the DC bus of the inverter so that an external 12 pulse

rectifier or active front end can be fitted.

23.12.19.03 Control and Monitoring

Galvanic Isolation

All analogue and digital control inputs and outputs shall be galvanically isolated from the mains

supply and shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage of 2.5 kV dc for 1 sec. The




controllers galvanic isolation shall meet the requirements of EN50178. For safety reasons, only

controllers that have galvanic isolation as an integral part of the controller will be accepted.

Digital Inputs

Digital inputs shall have freely programmable functions and shall have a scan time less than 3

ms.

Noise Immunity On Digital Inputs

For maximum noise immunity on the digital inputs the sink current shall be minimum 10 mA at

24 V for each input.

Relay Outputs

Two programmable relays shall be provided for remote monitoring of the controller. The

programmable options shall include as a minimum ready, run, and alarm.

The run relay function shall initiate a run signal only when the frequency output from the

controller is greater than 0.5 Hz.

Analogue Inputs

The controller shall accept voltage (max 10V) and current (max 20mA) inputs. The inputs shall

have provision for scaling both the minimum and maximum values including their respective

inverted signals. Analogue inputs shall have freely programmable functions and shall have at

least 10 bit plus sign resolution.

Thermistor Input

The inverter shall be capable of accepting direct input from a thermistor, without the need for

thermistor modules.

Pulse Input

The inverter shall be able to accept a pulse train the frequency of which gives an analogue

reference of feedback.

External I/O Power Supply

It shall be possible to supply the digital inputs from an external power supply with full isolation

from the inverter’s internal supply if desired.

Sensor Power Supply

The controller shall have an internal power supply to provide a sensor supply for the digital

inputs and any loop powered analogue sensors.

This internal power supply shall have a minimum capacity of 200 mA at 24V.

Analogue Outputs

Two programmable analogue outputs shall be provided for monitoring. A choice of 0-20 mA

and 4-20 mA shall be provided. The programmable options shall include as a minimum Hz,

Amps and Torque. The resolution shall be at least 8 bit.




Pulse Output

The inverter shall be able to generate a pulse train output the frequency of which is proportional

to the signal being transmitted.

Local Control Panel

The controller shall have local control panel with an alpha-numeric display which shall provide

comprehensive information on the controller and the motor’s condition. The following is

considered as minimum requirements:

. Reference % of control signal

. Frequency Hz

. Display of feedback signal

. Current A

. Torque %

. Power kW

. Energy kWh

. Output voltage V

. DC link voltage V

. Motor thermal reserve %

. Inverter thermal reserve %\

. Input status

The Tenderer shall state clearly which displays are available, in particular whether the controller

can display energy kWh and torque, and what alternative methods can be used if the controller

cannot display these parameters.

It shall be possible to remote mount the display with an IP65 degree of protection.

The local control panel shall be used for setting parameters and tuning the controller.

Preference shall be given to multi-level menu structures which give a simplified setup procedure

for the most common applications.

The display shall include a non-volatile memory for storing drive parameters to enable

uploading and downloading parameters to different drives.

Fault Display

The controller shall display all faults in clear English text. The following is considered as

minimum requirements:

. Mains phase loss

. Over voltage

. Under voltage

. Inverter overload

. Motor thermal overload (thermal model)

. Motor thermistor

. Electronic shear pin

. Over current

. Earth fault

. Switch mode power supply fault

. Output short circuit

. RS485 communications timeout

. High performance communications bus timeout

. Brake resistor fault




. Heat sink over temperature

. Motor phase missing

. Inverter fault

The Tenderer shall state whether the controller can provide clear English text or if the faults are

distinguishable only through a code system.

Hand/Off/Auto Control

The controller shall provide for Hand/Off/Auto control to allow for local by hand control or

remote Auto control by the BMS. This function shall be selectable via the Local Control Panel

or via digital I/O.

Totalisers

The controller shall incorporate the following totalisers.

. Hour Run Meter

. Kilowatt Hours

Serial Communication – RS485

The controller shall be fitted with an RS485 serial port. This port may use a proprietary

protocol but a strong preference will be given to controllers which can directly communicate

with the protocol of the BMS supplier with no need for additional hardware or software.

Examples of this are the Metasys N2 protocol from Johnson Controls and the FLN protocol

from Landis & Steafa.

Serial Communication – Option Cards

The controller shall have provision to accept an option card for serial communication with a

BMS using protocols demanding specific hardware. PROFIBUS OR LonWorks are examples

of fieldbus standards which require special chips to handle the protocols. The Tenderer shall list

the available protocols.

Serial Communication – PC Package

Suitable software utilising a Windows environment to display all monitoring, fault, alarm and

status signals shall be provided for communication over the inbuilt RS485 serial port. The

software shall allow parameter changes to be made to the controller’s settings by uploading the

data from the controller, changing the parameters and then downloading the data to the

controller again. Storage of each controllers operating and set-up parameters shall be able to be

stored on diskette. Provision for trending of values against time will be considered favourably.

23.12.19.04 Protection And Monitoring

Local Repair Facilities

The Tenderer shall state whether full repair facilities are available and in which States they are

located. The Tenderer shall also nominate the hours that service is available, i.e. normal

working hours or 24 hours 7 days a week.

Controller Shutdown

The controller shall shutdown safely under the following conditions and operate the alarm relay.

The controller display shall indicate the nature of the fault in clear English text.




. Mains phase loss

. Over voltage

. Under voltage

. Inverter overload

. Motor thermal overload (thermal model)

. Motor thermistor

. Electronic shear pin

. Over current

. Earth fault

. Switch mode power supply fault

. Output short circuit

. RS485 communications timeout

. High performance communications bus timeout

. Brake resistor fault

. Heat sink over temperature

. Motor phase missing

. Inverter fault

Manual and Auto Reset

The controller shall provide for both automatic and manual reset operation. Automatic reset

shall only operate on over current and over and under voltage. In automatic mode there shall be

a programmable choice of up to 10 reset attempts per fault before the controller shuts down

making manual reset necessary to restart the system. The restart time after a trip in automatic

mode shall be adjustable.

In manual reset mode the reset shall be accomplished from both the keypad on the controller

and by remote signal.

Data Log of Faults

The controller shall be equipped with a data log menu that will allow storage of the type of

faults that have occurred. Last fault memory shall be required in the event of power failures.

The log will also contain trending data over time to indicate the status of the main inverter

control signals prior and subsequent to the fault.

Input Protection

The Tenderer shall state the type input protection devices such as circuit breakers or fuses that

need to be fitted upstream of the inverter. It shall be particularly highlighted if the protection is

of a special type such as high speed semi conductor fuses.

Autoderating

The controller shall maintain operation as long as possible under fault conditions. For example

the controller should automatically derate itself and reduce the speed to a safe level on high

temperature or a phase loss to maintain some control of the process rather than shutting down

due to a trip.

Electronic Thermal Overload Protection

The controller shall include electronic motor thermal overload protection where the trip time is

based on the motors running frequency, actual motor current, operating time and the motors

rated current. The device shall automatically modify the trip time to take into account operation

at low speed. On trip the controller shall indicate that the fault is a motor thermal trip.




Thermistor Protection

The controller shall include a motor PTC thermistor input for use when motors are fitted with

thermistors and shutdown the motor when the PTC resistance value increases above its safe

operating value. On trip the controller shall indicate that the fault is a motor thermistor trip.



23.13.00 CONTROLS

23.13.01.01 GENERAL

The Mechanical Trade and their BMCS Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply,

installation, testing and commissioning of a complete controls system to achieve safe functional

operation of the plant as further described in the Schedules and elsewhere in this Specification.

Controls for the mechanical plant shall be provided by the following:

. the DDC/BMCS system;

. direct from the FFCP/FIB.

The Building Management System (BMCS) shall be supplied, installed and commissioned to provide

the control functions to achieve the required automatic control of space conditions, monitoring and

control operation of plant within the tolerances specified in both normal and after hours mode as

detailed in the control operation clauses.

Separate electric/electronic control systems shall be supplied, installed and commissioned to provide

the control function required in fire mode and as detailed in the control operation clauses.

The two control systems shall be interfaced to facilitate normal and override fire functions as further

detailed in the Schedules.

Control systems shall be:

. Automated Logic

. Honeywell

. Johnson

or approved equal.

Electronic controls shall be of the same manufacture and where this is not practical, details on the

proposed makes of control components shall be submitted for approval. Alternative systems may be

offered provided they:

. incorporate the specified interlocks and protective devices;

. have at least equal reliability;

. are fully described in the tender submission.

Unless otherwise specified, all DDC/BMCS control equipment shall be selected, supplied, tested and

commissioned by a DDC/BMCS controls' manufacturer and installation shall be by tradesmen

regularly engaged in the installation of automatic controls.

The setting and commissioning of controls shall be undertaken in conjunction with the testing and

balancing of the mechanical services installations and these two activities shall be fully co-ordinated.

All controls shall preferably be of the same manufacture and where this is not practicable details on

the proposed makes of controls should be submitted for approval.

All controls shall be open protocol, using native BACNet. The provider shall have a minimum of

3 years local experience with the system provided.

The client access shall be through thin client web interface. The provider shall have a minimum of 3

years local experience with the system provided.

CONTROLS



Where any deviation from the specified (either hardware or software) is proposed, this shall be

clearly described in the tender and shall be subject to approval. If no such qualification is made at the

time of tender then it will be assumed that the DDC/BMCS System offered conforms entirely with

the specification.

Detailed control diagrams for each system shall be submitted for approval by the engineer before

commencing installation.

It is the intent of this specification to describe the basic architecture and performance requirements of

the Building Management System (BMCS). The BMCS shall be based on a distribution system of

fully intelligent, standalone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on a

true peer-to-peer, token passing Local Area Network (LAN), called the Controller LAN. All

“primary” equipment shall be served by standalone controllers residing directly on this Controller

LAN. System architectures with primary equipment controllers residing on master/slave (polling)

networks or sub-networks will not be acceptable. The Building Management System shall include

all work station software and hardware, Distributed Control Units (DCUs), Local Area Networks

(LANs) sensors, control devices, actuators, installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments and

fine tuning necessary for a complete and fully operational system.

The man/machine interface (terminal) with the system shall be a personal computer (PC) and shall be

capable of being connected to the system at any node on the network.

The system shall be capable of being addressed by multiple terminals simultaneously.

The complete system shall incorporate excess capacity for the purpose of future expansion, as further

specified.

23.13.02 EXTENT OF WORK

The following services shall be provided with automatic control and monitoring :

. Mechanical, electrical, hydraulic and fire services.

. Lift services shall interface with the BMCS.

The works shall include all necessary minor and incidental works required to implement the intent

and meaning of this specification but not limited to the following:

. Provision of all mechanical services switchboards as necessary for the control of the

mechanical and electrical equipment and as shown in the drawings.

. Provision of all controllers, routers and ancilliary devices for a complete BMCS network.

. Provision of head end network operator interface terminal and outstations.

. Provision of all temperature sensors, humidity sensors, damper and valve actuators, pressure

sensors, pressure transmitters, velocity sensors, relays, analogue input/output transducers and

other field devices for the complete control system.

. Provision of all the necessary software for the proper functioning of the control system.

. Provision of high level MODBUS interface to be provided by BMS contractor to enable the

monitoring and recording functions of the energy meter monitoring system to be provided by

the Electrical Trade.

. Provision of all the necessary cabling and wiring including the installation of conduits, cable

trays for the system.

. Training of the Client's operation team.

CONTROLS



. Testing and commissioning of the complete system including both the factory witness test and

site witness test of the software.

. Provision of all operation and maintenance manuals, "as fitted" drawings for the system. The

operation and maintenance manual shall incorporate the design philosophy of the system.

. Provision of BACnet based web server running Microsoft server 2003.

. Provision of UPS for server and all jBMS controllers providing 30 minutes operation.

. Connection to ADSL line provided by client.

. All plant as further nominated in the Schedule shall be complete with run/fault lights together

with auto-off-test control on the respective switchboards. Indication of manual override of

plant shall be provided at the DDC/BMCS. Hours run indication shall be provided for all plant

in the DDC/BMCS for plant controlled by DDC.

. A magnehelic shall be provided to display pressure measured across the filters of each air

conditioner.

A return functional specification complete with detailed control diagrams and operation philosophy

for each system shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer before commencing installation.

23.13.02.01 Associated Works

Electrical Services

. Supply and installation of the BMCS demarcation terminal box.

. Supply, installation and commissioning of high and low level inputs within electrical

equipment connected to the BMCS.

. Supply and installation of cabling from the demarcation terminal box to low level outputs

within electrical equipment.

Hydraulic Services

. Supply, installation and commissioning of high and low level inputs within hydraulic



within hydraulic services equipment.

Fire Services

. Supply, installation and commissioning of high and low level inputs within fire equipment

connected to the BMCS.


within fire services equipment.

Security Services

. Supply, installation and commissioning of high and low level inputs within security


. Supply and installation of cabling from the demarcation terminal box to the challenger system.

CONTROLS



. Termination of cables installed.

. Programming and commissioning of all circuits connected to the challenger system.

23.13.03 FUNCTIONAL BUILDING MANAGEMENT CONTROL SPECIFICATION

23.13.03.01 General

The BMCS will monitor and control the following mechanical systems:

a) Emergency chilled water plant

b) Building (secondary) chilled water pumps.

c) Air handling units for preconditioning of outside air including heat recovery system

d) Operating theatre air handling units including heat recovery system

e) Fan coil units

f) Air conditioning to the Ground floor Computer room by CRAC units

g) Air conditioning to the Building A, Level 5 UPS room

h) Kitchen exhaust system

i) Car park ventilation system

j) Various ventilation exhaust systems

The BMCS will monitor items of the hydraulic, lift, fire and electrical systems as summarised in the

BMCS point list.

23.13.03.02 Emergency Chilled Water Pant

System Overview

Emergency chilled water plant comprises one off air-cooled screw chillers (CH-B/5-1), one chilled

water pump (PCHWP-B/5-1,2) and five (5) motorised valves.

Emergency chiller and associated pumps are located on the Level 5 of building B. Motorised

“change over” valves are located in the Empower Transfer station on Basement B1

Chilled Water Plant Start / Stop

Chilled water plant shall be enabled by the BMCS when “call for emergency chiller” is active.

Call for emergency chiller is generated by the Empower loss of chilled water.

On a “call for emergency chiller” from the BMCS system operation of the emergency chiller plant

shall be as follows:

. Motorised “OPEN / CLOSED” valve type “A” shall close and motorized “OPEN / CLOSED”

valve type “B” shall open.

. After an adjustable time delay (10-30 seconds, set initially at 10s), primary chilled water

pump shall start.

. After sensing chilled water flow and adjustable time delay (60-600 seconds, set initially at

60s), the chiller shall start. The chiller shall modulate under its own controls between

minimum run down load to 100% load to maintain leaving water temperature at set point

(initially set to 5.5 C)

. If cooling load drops below chiller’s minimum run down load chiller shall stop. Chilled water

pump shall continue to operate. When chilled water supply temperature exceeds chilled water

supply temperature by 1.0 C (adjustable) chiller shall re-start.

CONTROLS



. Primary chilled water pump shall be stopped by the BMCS when call for emergency chiller is

ceased and chiller is stopped.

Primary Chilled Water Pump Duty / Standby Control

Chilled water pumps PCHWP-B/5-1 and PCHWP-B/5-2 operate in a duty / stand-by arrangement.

The stand-by pump becomes the duty pump should any of the following conditions occur:

. Duty pump fails (PCHWP mismatch alarm)

. Duty PCHWP not in “auto” (via monitoring of MSB selector switch)

The BMCS automatically changes the duty / stand by sequence whenever duty pump was operating

and stopped.

Special Provisions

. The operation of any chiller set shall only occur providing its associated chilled water pump is

operating. Flows switches shall be vapour and weatherproof manual reset type located in

leaving condenser and chilled water line of each chiller. Flow switches shall be hard-wired to

the chiller set control system to prove water flows, with indication of status provided on the

BMCS system.

. Chiller sets shall start unloading at all times when demand for chilled water ceases and shall

stop on loss of chilled water flow.

. Each compressor set within the chiller shall be capable of independent operation. Should any

compressor be “out of service” or fail to start the BMCS system or chiller control system shall

bypass that compressor in its sequence.

. Each chiller set shall be capable of independent operation. Should either chiller be “out of

service” or fail to start the BMCS system shall bypass that chiller in sequence.

. Provide Auto/Off/Manual switch for each chilled water pump with green run and red fault

pilot lamps.

. Chiller compressor shall be prevented from short cycling by limiting the number of starts per

hour.

23.13.03.03 Building (Secondary) Chilled Water Pumps

System Overview

Building (secondary) chilled water pumps are located in the ETS on Basement B1. Generally there

will be a constant call for chilled water, however this is determined as follows:

The building (secondary) chilled water pumps are enabled whenever there is a call for cooling from

any of the fan coil units, air handling units or CRAC units.

Building (secondary) Chilled Water Pumps Speed Control

Building (secondary) chilled water pumps are staged “on” and “off” and their speed varied to

maintain the required differential pressure between supply and return line at set point (determined at

commissioning) in the building chilled water loop.

Once another pump is staged “on”, all operating pumps will operate at the same speed to maintain

the system pressure.

The switching points for the pumps will be determined, for most efficient operation’ from the pump

curves.

CONTROLS



Pump Lead Lag Change Over

To effect even wear on all pumps, the lead / lag arrangement is changed whenever there is a “stage

down” i.e. the pump with most operating hours is stopped

23..04 Air handling units for pre conditioning of O/A (dedicated outside air units)

System Overview

Outside air for fan coil units is pre-conditioned in the separate air-handling unit. There are two off air

handling units, one serving building A and another serving building B (AHU-A/5-1 and AHU-B/5-

06). Air handling units incorporate heat recovery coil for pre-cooling of outside air by toilet exhaust

via so called “run around coil” heat recovery system. Toilet exhaust air is filtered and before it is

discharged outside the building is passing through “heating” coil of run around heat recovery system.

Heating coil in toilet exhaust system and pre cooling coil in the air handling unit for pre conditioning

of outside air are looped by piping.

Circulating pump enables heat transfer from hot air stream (outside air) to cold air stream (toilet

exhaust)

Air handling units are located on Level 5 in the respective building’s plant room.

Air handling units for pre-conditioning of outside air shall be started and stopped by the BMCS.

These units will operate 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Motorised Dampers Control

When the air handling plant is not operating the outside air damper shall be in full closed position.

When the air handling unit operating outside air damper shall be in full open position.

Air Filter Status

Monitoring of the cleanliness of the air filter(s) shall be provided for each AHU by sensors

measuring the differential pressure across the filter(s).

The BMCS shall warn of a dirty filter when the pressure switch is made / the differential pressure

has risen above 250 Pa (adjustable).

The BMCS shall warn of a dirty filter when the pressure sensors indicate a pressure differential

above the pressure set point which is scheduled to fan speed, being 75 Pa for 1 Volt fan speed control

signal and 150 Pa for a 10 Volts fan speed control signal. The relationship between the limits shall be

linear.

Provide Magnahelic gauge for local indication of filter pressure drop.

Supply Air temperature Reset

Supply air temperature from the dedicated outside air units shall be kept at 14 C. Supply air

temperature will be reset based on critical FCU.

BMCS will monitor chilled water valve position on all fan coil units.

If at least two fan coil units with active operating schedules have chilled water valves 100% closed

supply air temperature from the dedicated outside air units will be reset upwards by 0.2 deg C

(adjustable) every 10min (adjustable) all chilled water valves on fan coil units served by respective

dedicated outside air system are less than 100% closed.

AHU Chilled Water Control Valve

CONTROLS



After the AHU fan has been running for 10 minutes (adjustable) and the AHU supply air temperature

is 2ºC (adjustable) greater than the “AHU supply air set point” (initially set to 14 deg C), then the

AHU chilled water cooling valve shall be enabled.

When enabled the “chilled water cooling valve” shall be modulated to maintain supply air

temperature at set point.

The controller shall be proportion and integral and include a dead band; all these should be

adjustable from the BMCS.

The system shall be such that it operates in a stable manner under start up conditions and all load

requirements.

When the AHU fan is stopped, the chilled water control valve shall be disabled and shall be in the

closed position.

Circulating Water Pump control

Circulating water pump runs whenever air handling unit for pre-cooling of outside air operates,

respective toilet exhaust fan operates and outside air temperature is higher than “heat recovery

critical outside air temperature”.

Heat recovery critical outside air temperature is the temperature at which benefits from run around

heat recovery system are higher than penalties (pump energy consumption). This shall be determined

during the commissioning of the system.

Toilet Exhaust Fan Control

Toilet exhaust fan operation is controlled by the BMCS (initially set to 24/7).

Dedicated outside air unit fan speed control

Speed of the fan in the dedicated outside air unit is modulated to maintain static pressure in the

supply air duct. This will be determined at commissioning to achieve minimum outside air quantity

at each fan coil unit.

Floor Modulating/Isolation Dampers Control

Floor outside air isolation dampers serve a dual purpose, floor isolation and outside air control.

BMCS will monitor the status of each fan coil unit operation.

Fan coil units operating less than 24 hours shall be equipped with motorised isolation damper. When

fan coil unit’s fan is operating outside air motorised isolation damper is open. When fan coil unit’s

fan stop motorised isolation damper is closed.

BMCS will determine total minimum outside air quantity for each Level based on the operating

status of the fan coil unis and minimum outside air design quantity for each operating fan coil unit.

Floor outside air damper(s) will modulate by a P+I control loop to maintain calculated minimum

outside air quantity for all operating fan coil units set point (l/s), relative to an associated duct

velocity sensor.

23.13.03.04 Chilled Water Fan Coil Units

Overview

Fan coil units are cooling only connected to the chilled water system

CONTROLS



Each Fan Coil Unit (FCU) shall be controlled by an independent DDC “Application Specific

Controller” (ASC) linked with the local stand alone unit. FCU shall be programmed to provide a 1.0

deg C (adjustable) dead band between cooling and heating operation.

Start / Stop Control

Fan coil units serving general areas shall be started and stopped by the BMCS.

Fan coil units serving meeting / conference rooms shall be started and stopped by the BMCS at the

facilities manager’s PC or by local “ON” switch. When local switch is pressed “ON”, FCU will start

and operate for 2 hours. If additional operation is required, “ON” switch must be activated again.

Supply Air Temperature Control

Provide a room air temperature sensor/controller or return air temperature sensor/controller (for

FCU serving more than one room) for each fan coil unit.

Supply air temperature shall be modulated to maintain zone (space) or return air temperature at

selected set point by modulating chilled water control valve.

Room temperature set point adjustment shall be carried by a qualified technician only.

The room air set point and dead band between cooling operation and heating operation shall be fully

adjustable.

Fan coil units operating 8:00 to 18:00 shall be equipped with motorized outside air damper. This

damper shall open when respective fan coil unit’s fan operate and shall close when respective fan

coil unit’s fan stop.

23.13.03.05 Computer Room Air Conditioning System

Overview

Computer Room is air conditioned by two off (1 duty and 1 stand-by) chilled water Computer Room

Air Conditioning Units (CRAC).

Each CRAC unit shall be fitted with its own control system. No DDC control of CRAC units

operation is required.

Provide monitoring a DDC room air temperature sensor and room relative humidity sensors for

monitoring of Computer Room conditions.

Arrange for an alarm condition to register in the event of temperature and relative humidity

exceeding preset limit.

Standby-Function

With applications involving more than one unit, a standby-module can be configured, which is

sequenced over all present units. In case of failure on one of the units in operation, the automatic

inbuilt changeover in the controllers activates the standby-module and an alarm is generated. No

external devices shall be used for this operation to take place.

Peak Load Operation with Standby Unit

In case of temporary high room heat loads the controller can activate the standby module for a short

period of time to increase the cooling capacity. The standby unit is switched off automatically as

soon as the heat load has reached its normal size. No external devices shall be used for this operation

to take place.

CONTROLS



In applications, where two units are operating in duty-standby mode, the controller in the standby

unit shall remain active (with unit off) continually sensing conditions in the room. This ensures that

if conditions in the room rise to a certain level, the standby unit will automatically switch on to assist

in the cooling without the need to rely on the duty unit.

Unit Sequencing, Standby Functions for Units

The i/o controller enables a sequencing function with time-based and failure-based switch-over for

up to 31 units by data bus connection. The number of standby-units is variable. A peak load

operation can also be configured. No external devices shall be used for this operation to take place.

Depending on the number of units, the temperature and humidity sensors can be connected for the

calculation of average control values to ensure the environment is controlled simultaneously

avoiding units working against each other.

23.13.03.06 Kitchen Exhaust System

Kitchen Exhaust Fans (KEF-A/5-1) shall be started and stopped by the local on / off switch with

neon indicator light. The switch is to be surface mounted IP56 type. Final location to be agreed with

kitchen fit out contractor.

23.13.03.07 Garbage Room Exhaust Fan

This fan shall operate continuously.

23.13.03.08 Car Park Ventilation

The car park ventilation system shall have a user selectable, common 0-20mA or 4-20mA output(s)

per zone. The option to provide additional analogue outputs, up to one analogue output per channel,

shall be available. All analogue output signals shall be essentially linear. Alarm set-point levels shall

be fully field adjustable within the measuring range of the instrument and shall be initially set as

follows:

Two alarm levels shall be provided for each channel;

- 1st Alarm Level – 8 PPM

- 2nd

Alarm Level – 25 PPM

Below 8ppm the output from the control panel shall be 4mA = 25% ventilation flow rate; between 8

and 25ppm the analogue outputs shall rise linearly from 0 or 4mA to a maximum 20mA at 25ppm =

100% ventilation flow rate. Above the second alarm level the output(s) shall remain at a maximum

of 20mA.

23.13.03.09 Operating Sequence

Fan logic control shall be incorporated to control the various fan operation at the various speeds.

Interface with the variable speed controllers for the fans shall be included.

Operating Sequence shall be as follows:

System minimum ventilation rate shall be 25% of total flow rate. If CO level remains below 8ppm

for 2 hours between 8.00pm and 5.00am, the ventilation system will shut down.

When the CO level rises above 8ppm for more than 4 minute the associated system shall be operated

at low speed.

For systems with analogue outputs; between 8 and 25ppm the analogue output shall increase linearly

between 0 or 4mA and 20mA. At maximum analogue output = 100% total flow rate.

If the CO levels rise above 25ppm, analogue outputs shall be at a maximum of 20mA for analogue

output systems.

CONTROLS



For analogue output systems, when the levels fall below 25ppm and above 8ppm, the analogue

output shall reduce linearly. For systems operating low/high speed fans, the high alarm relays shall

open to operate the fans at low speed, subject to the minimum run time having expired.

All time delays in the system shall be easily field programmable and the logic system required to

control the fans in the above sequence shall be mounted in the gas detection control cabinet located

adjacent to the associated motor control centres as indicated.

All signals, etc shall be interfaced back to the BMS system.

In fire mode, the car park ventilation fans are to operate at the rated maximums whilst maintaining a

negative operation pressure in the space to extract smoke.

23.13.03.10 Fire Mode

The complete air supply system shall shutdown during the fire mode operation.

Control of the fire mode operation shall be fail safe.

23.13.03.11 Run and Fault Lights

All drives for fans, air conditioning units etc shall be provided with run and fault lights.

23.13.03.12 After Hours Air Conditioning Requests

The BMCS shall be equipped with an after hours air conditioning call system.

The system shall:

Tenant Access

. Allow the tenant to override normal operating hours for a nominated area in their tenancy.

. Confirm the selection to the tenant at the time of order.

. Register the caller identification and actual run on a database.

. Provide access for the tenant to start, stop, user identification and total run time data base

information for their tenancy.

. Accept multiple after hours calls.

Operator Access

. Allow high level access to the BMCS including equipment status, space temperatures,

equipment on/off, set point alteration.

23.13.03.13 Other Mechanical Ventilation Systems

All mechanical ventilation systems shall be interlocked with their corresponding systems.

23.13.04 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY

Provide Microsoft Windows based building graphics display of alarms and monitoring of system

performance. The graphic l display shall include as a minimum:

. Building overview as “introduction” view

CONTROLS



. Minimum of one graphic per floor to indicate single floor plan overview, alarm points, sensor

locations, space temperature set point and actual temperatures

. Graphic for each dedicated outside air unit including heat recovery system

. Graphics for each operating theatre air handling system including heat recovery system

. Graphics for each air handling unit and fan coil unit

. Graphics for each CRAC unit

. Emergency chilled water system

. Building (secondary) chilled water pumps

. Each ventilation system (supply and exhaust)

. Fire alarm interface

. Lighting control interface

. Hydraulic plant interface

. Electric plant interface

. Security system interface

All graphic displays shall dynamically indicate all status points, sensor settings, actual temperatures,

pressure settings, damper positions, valve positions etc., to allow review of system operation and

performance.

Data stored and monitored within the BMCS shall be dynamically shown on the appropriate page

and include information relevant to the Operators role in maintaining correct operation of the system

as follows:

. AHU summary sheet

. FCU summary sheet

. CRAC summary sheet

. Ventilation systems summary sheet

. Mechanical switchboards summary sheet

. Valve positions

. Damper positions

. Miscellaneous energy and interface status

Dynamic information shall be updated at a maximum interval of 5 seconds.

Management reports will be generated from the FEP including total energy and all energy sub-

metering, monitoring, calculations, including graphical representation.

23.13.05 BMCS POINT SCHEDULE

Legend

DI - Digital In

DO - Digital Out

AI - Analogue In

AO - Analogue Out

HLI - High Level Interface (Software)

The following table indicates typical points to be controlled and monitored for each equipment type.

For multiple areas or multiple items of equipment, the points shall apply to each individual area or

item of equipment.

A minimum of 20% spare points shall be allowed for future connection.

23.13.05.01 Mechanical Services

POINT FUNCTION / DESCRIPTION TYPE No. OFF FIELD DEVICE / COMMENTS

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Emergency chilled water system (CH-1, PCHWP-1, motorised valves – 5off))

Call for emergency chiller to start DI 1 From EMPOWER

CONTROLS



Emergency Chiller S/S DO 1 Relay

Chiller Status DI 1 Aux Contact

Chiller LCHW Temp. AI 1 Temp. Sensor

Chiller Return CHW Temp. AI 1 Temp Sensor

CW Entering Temp. AI 1 Temp. Sensor

CW Leaving Temp AI 1 Temp Sensor

Chiller Current AI 1 Current Transducer

Chiller Load Reset AO 1 Chiller Control Panel

Chiller Common Fault DI 1 Aux. Contact

Motorised Valves AO 5 Valve Actuator

Pump Start/Stop (PCHWP-B/5-1) DO 1 Relay

Pump Status (PCHWP-B/5-1) DI 1 Flow Switch

Secondary loop CHW Supply Temp AI 1 Temp. Sensor

Secondary loop CHW Return Temp. AI 1 Temp. Sensor

By pass chilled water temperature AI 1 Temp. Sensor

CHW Differential Pressure AI 2 Differential Press. Transducer


SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): AHU’s

OA Temp AI 5 Temp Sensor

SA Fan Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact

SA Fan Status DI 5 Aux Contact

SA Fan Speed Control AO 5 VSD

VSD Fault DI 5 VSD

Air Filter Status DI 5 Differential Pressure Transducer

SA Temp AI 5 Duct Temp. Sensor

Chilled Water Valve AO 5 Valve Actuator

Toilet Exhaust Fan Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact

Toilet Exhaust Fan Status DI 5 Pressure Switch

OA Damper AO 5 Damper Actuator

Exhaust Air Damper AO 5 Damper Actuator

HEPA Filter Status AI 1 Differential Pressure Transducer


SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Operating Theatre Air Handling Systems:

(AHU-B/5-1,2,3,4,5; EAF-B/5-1,2,3,4,5; HRP-B/5-1,2,3,4,5)

OA Temp AI 5 Temp Sensor

OH Humidity AI 5 Humidity Sensor

Room Temperature AI 5 Temp Sensor

Room Humidity AI 5 Humidity Sensor

Air Filter Status AI 5 Differential Pressure Sensor

SA Fan Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact

SA Fan Status DI 5 Aux. Contact

VSD Fault DI 5 VSD

Heat Recovery Pump Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact

Heat Recovery Pump Fault DI 5 Relay Contact


CONTROLS



EDH Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact

EDH Status (Fault) DI 5 Relay Contact

EDH Heater Staging - - 3-Stage Heating

Leaving Air Temp. AI 5 Temp Sensor

HEPA Diff. Pressure AI 5 Differential Pressure Sensor

Room Diff. Pressure AI 5 Differential Pressure Sensor

EA Fan Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact

EA Fan Status DI 5 Relay Contact

VSD Fault DI 5 VSD

Motorised Damper DO 5 Damper Actuator


SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Fan Coil Units (FCU) with room temperature sensor / controller (Building A – …. off)

FCU Start / Stop DO 114 Control Relay

FCU Status DI 114 Volt free contact

Room temperature AI 114 Room Temperature Sensor

Supply Air Temperature AI 114 Duct Temperature Sensor

Return Air Temperature AI 114 Duct Temperature Sensor

Chilled Water Control Valve AO 114 Valve Actuator


SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Fan Coil Units (FCU) with room temperature sensor / controller (Building B - ….off)

FCU Start / Stop DO 81 Control Relay

FCU Status DI 81 Volt free contact

Room temperature AI 81 Room Temperature Sensor

Supply Air Temperature AI 81 Duct Temperature Sensor

Return Air Temperature AI 81 Duct Temperature Sensor

Chilled Water Control Valve AO 81 Valve Actuator


SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Computer Room Units (CRAC-B/1-1, CRAC-B/1-2)

Temperature AI 1 HLI

Humidity AI 1 HLI

Water Under Floor DI 2 HLI

Room High/Low Temperature Alarm DI 2 Room Tem. Sensor

Room High/Low Humidity Alarm DI 2 Room Humid. Sensor


CRAC Unit Common Fault DI 2


SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Car park Ventilation Fans

Fan start / stop DO 4 Control Relay

Fan Status DI 4 Voltage Free Contact

Fan fault DI 4

SA Fan Speed Control AO 4

VSD Fault DI 4

CONTROLS



23.13.05.02 Electrical Services

POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE NO. OFF COMMENTS

UPS Unit and Batteries, Building A Roof

UPS on Batteries DI 1

UPS Low Battery DI 1

UPS on Static By-pass DI 1

UPS System Fault DI 1

Battery Monitoring Fault DI 1

UPS Unit & Batteries, Building B Ground Floor IT Room

UPS on Batteries DI 1

UPS Low Battery DI 1

UPS on Static By-pass DI 1

UPS System Fault DI 1

Battery Monitoring Fault DI 1

MSB1

Essential Service DI 1

Emergency Service DI 1

General Light & Power DI 1

MSB2

Unmetered Tenancy DI 1

Medical Equipment DI 1

Mechanical Plant DI 1

Emergency Service DI 1

Diesel Generator

DB-DG DI 1

Generator Status (Auto/Manual) DI 1

High Water Temperature Alarm DI 1

High Water Temperature Shutdown DI 1

Low Oil Pressure Alarm DI 1

Low Oil Pressure Shutdown DI 1

Fail to Start Shutdown DI 1

Overspeed Shutdown DI 1

System Diagnostic Shutdown DI 1

Battery Status DI 1

Generator on Line DI 1

Fuel Tank

Bulk Tank High Fuel Alarm DI 1

Bulk Tank Extreme Low Level Alarm DI 1

Bulk Tank Leak Alarm DI 1

Day Tank Low Level Alarm DI 1

Day Tank High Level Alarm DI 1

Pump-1 Tripped DI 1

Pump-2 Tripped DI 1

Pump-1 Running DI 1

Pump-2 Running DI 1

CONTROLS



23.13.05.03 Fire Services


SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): FIRE SERVICES

Fire Alarm Data

Smoke detector in alarm DI 1

Isolation Data

Any isolation of the system DI 1

Tamper switch activated (sprinkler / hydrant

system) DI 1

Plant Data

Building plant in fire trip mode (general fire

trip) DI 1

Inergen discharged alarm DI 1

Electric sprinkler/hydrant pump run/fail DI 1

Diesel sprinkler/hydrant pump run/fault DI 1

Sprinkler tank high/low level / temp. DI 1

Fault and Maintenance Data

Smoke detector in fault DI 1

Fire Indicator Panel in fault DI 1

EWIS in fault DI 1

23.13.05.04 Hydraulic Services

POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE NO. OFF COMMENTS

LPG

Shut Off DI 1

Gas Detector (Main Kitchen) DI 1

Stormwater / Sewer Pumps

High Level Alarm DI 2

Low Level Alarm DI 2

Low Level Tank Alarm DI 7

High Level Chilled Water Tank DI 2

23.13.06 RETURN FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

Prior to the installation of controls, a return functional specification complete with control diagrams

and operation philosophy shall be prepared and submitted for approval showing full details of the

control systems proposed including the type of the various components, the electrical connections

thereto and any devices which are required for the correct operation of the control system. These

drawings shall show the interface between the DDC/BMCS and the electric/electronic control system

and to other services.

At the conclusion of the contract, final control diagrams shall be prepared showing all details of

components and control settings for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.



23.14.00 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMCS)

23.14.01 GENERAL

The Mechanical Trade and their BMCS Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply,

installation, testing and commissioning of a complete controls system to achieve safe functional

operation of the plant as further described in the Schedules and elsewhere in this Specification.

Controls for the mechanical plant shall be provided by the following:

. the DDC/BMCS system (refer points list);

. direct from the FFCP/FIB (refer schedule of plant operable in fire mode).

The Building Management System (BMCS) shall be supplied, installed and commissioned to provide

the control functions to achieve the required automatic control of space conditions, monitoring and

control operation of plant within the tolerances specified in both normal and after hours mode as

detailed in the control operation clauses.

Separate electric/electronic control systems shall be supplied, installed and commissioned to provide

the control function required in fire mode and as detailed in the control operation clauses.

The two control systems shall be interfaced to facilitate normal and override fire functions as further

detailed in the Schedules.

Control systems shall be Control Systems International, Automated Logic, Honeywell or approval

equal.

Electronic controls shall be of the same manufacture and where this is not practical, details on the

proposed makes of control components shall be submitted for approval. Alternative systems may be

offered provided they:

. incorporate the specified interlocks and protective devices;

. have at least equal reliability;

. are fully described in the tender submission.

Unless otherwise specified, all DDC/BMCS control equipment shall be selected, supplied, tested and

commissioned by a DDC/BMCS controls' manufacturer and installation shall be by tradesmen

regularly engaged in the installation of automatic controls.

The setting and commissioning of controls shall be undertaken in conjunction with the testing and

balancing of the mechanical services installations and these two activities shall be fully co-ordinated.

All controls shall preferably be of the same manufacture and where this is not practicable details on

the proposed makes of controls should be submitted for approval.

All controls shall be LON compatible, the provider shall have a minimum of 5 years local experience

with this type of system.

Where any deviation from the specified (either hardware or software) is proposed, this shall be

clearly described in the tender and shall be subject to approval. If no such qualification is made at the

time of tender then it will be assumed that the DDC/BMCS System offered conforms entirely with

the specification.

Detailed control diagrams for each system shall be submitted for approval by the engineer before

commencing installation.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMCS)



It is the intent of this specification to describe the basic architecture and performance requirements of

the Building Management System (BMCS). The BMCS shall be based on a distribution system of

fully intelligent, standalone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on a

true peer-to-peer, token passing Local Area Network (LAN), called the Controller LAN. All

“primary” equipment shall be served by standalone controllers residing directly on this Controller

LAN. System architectures with primary equipment controllers residing on master/slave (polling)

networks or sub-networks will not be acceptable. The Building Management System shall include

all work station software and hardware, Distributed Control Units (DCUs), Local Area Networks

(LANs) sensors, control devices, actuators, installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments and

fine tuning necessary for a complete and fully operational system.

The man/machine interface (terminal) with the system shall be a personal computer (PC) and shall be

capable of being connected to the system at any node on the network.

The system shall be capable of being addressed by multiple terminals simultaneously.

The complete system shall incorporate excess capacity for the purpose of future expansion, as further

specified.

23.14.02 OPERATOR INTERFACE

23.14.02.01 General

A personal computer (PC) shall be provided for high level user interface with the system.

The PC shall be provided located in the BMCS office indicated on the Tender drawings.

The terminal shall be capable of providing the user with the facility for remote system interrogation,

the storage of logged and alarm data and the annunciation of alarms and reports, the analysis of

recorded data from logging and alarms and the formatting of management reports.

The terminal shall also provide a backup record of outstation configuration and database.

The terminal shall support the automatic recovery of field controllers in the event of the loss of local

data.

The operation interface shall incorporate sufficient excess capacity to allow an increase of 10% in

the total number of each defined type of inputs/outputs.

The PC provided for the users terminal shall be 100% IBM compatible. The minimum hardware

requirements are as follows:

. The unit supplied shall have a minimum of 32 Mbytes of random access memory and 1.2

Gbytes of fixed disk storage, video cache of not less than 2 Mbytes, 2 serial (RS232) ports and

where applicable network connection cards. The processor used shall be Pentium 200MHZ

minimum.

. The monitor provided shall be an energy star compliant 17 inch model supporting a resolution

of not less than 1024 x 768 pixels, 256 colour and be provided with tilt and swivel facilities.

. A 3 button mouse shall be provided as a pointing device for day to day system interrogation.

A mouse mat shall also be provided.

. The keyboard shall be a 101/102 Enhanced QWERTY keyboard.

. A standard parallel (centronics) interface printer type Epson FX870 shall be provided local to

the users terminal or where an IT network exists, a printer shall be connected by the use of a

netport for utilisation by other PC's on the network. This shall be used for the printing of all




assigned alarms, reports etc., together with any user-requesting printing. Alarm routing may

be defined by priority level and time of day. Print preview functions shall be incorporated.

. A V32bis modem shall be provided to allow remote interrogation of the entire system for

remote support. The PSTN line will be provided by others.

. A separate portable plug-in keyboard and display shall be provided for the accessing of UNCs.

23.14.02.02 Printer(s)

Provide an 80-column hard copy printer which will support full graphic features and is rated at no

less than 100 cps. The printers shall use standard form fold paper with tractor feed and shall be

provided with two (2) boxes of paper. The printer shall be an Epson Model FX-870 or equivalent.

23.14.02.03 Modem

For PC work stations connected to the Controller LAN remotely via telephone lines, provide an

autodial/autoanswer modem with all cables and all communication interfaces required to provide the

specified functions.

23.14.03 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (LAN)

23.14.03.01 Controller LAN

The BMCS shall provide communication between the DCU's over a Local Area Network (LAN).

The Controller LAN shall be a high speed "bus type" network over which information is transmitted

in a "global" fashion between all the nodes on the network.

The Controller LAN shall have the capacity to contain not less than 64 nodes as a minimum. Each

workstation, DCU, or "gateway" device shall represent a node to the network.

The Controller LAN shall connect the nodes in a fully distributed environment, each DCU operating

autonomously while communicating with all other nodes on the network. Controller LANs requiring

a communication controller (for any reason) will not be acceptable. LAN lengths in excess of

24,000 ft. shall be supported.

A break in the communication path of the Controller LAN shall be announced as an alarm and shall

automatically initiate a Controller LAN reconfiguration such that the resulting sections of the

Controller LAN continue to function as separate LANs. No loss of control shall result from such a

break in the Controller LAN.

23.14.03.02 Commercial LAN

Workstations on the Controller LAN may also reside on a higher tier "commercial" LAN. This

"commercial" LAN shall be based on Ethernet, and comply with IEEE 802.3 standards. Where a

"commercial" LAN is implemented, it shall be possible to connect multiple Controller LANs

together, with global data sharing across this commercial LAN.

Data speed shall not be less than 10 Megabaud.

The "commercial" LAN shall support up to 63 work stations, including as many as 8 dedicated

backup work stations serving to continuously backup the database on the other work stations. A

single workstation shall be able to be backed up by more than one backup workstation.

An operator at a workstation on the "commercial" LAN may connect to any other workstation on the

"commercial" LAN as if the operator were sitting at the other workstation.




Alarms and special event notices shall be routed to different work stations on the "commercial" LAN

based on time of day, and day of the week.

Operator password assignment shall be available on both a system-wide basis and a workstation-by-

workstation basis.

23.14.04 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

The BMCS shall utilize the above LAN architecture to allow all of the Distributed Control Units to

share data as well as to globalise alarms. The Controller LAN shall be based on a peer-to-peer,

token passing technique with a data speed of not less than 19.2 Kb. Systems which require a

"master" communications controller or network manager for the Controller LAN are not acceptable.

23.14.04.01 Communication Techniques

The Controller LAN shall support node interface devices for the workstations which shall function as

a "gateway" to convert, buffer, and filter the Controller LAN data to the RS-232 data port of the PC

work station. These "gateway" devices shall support local hardwired workstations as well as auto-

answer/auto-dial modems and remote pagers. The "gateways" shall allow PC workstations to

interface to the Controller LAN at any point on the network directly or via telephone lines without

having to be connected to a DCU in order to communicate with the system. Communication over

telephone lines must be supported utilizing either external Bell 103 type modems or proprietary data

modems. Where external commercial modems are used, a Hayes Smartmodem shall be provided as

specified. Telephone lines will be provided by the owner. The system supplier shall include a

Controller LAN resident auto-dial/auto-answer modem and "gateway" to allow remote

communication with the system.

To ensure high throughput, data transmission shall use "packetised" communication techniques, such

that dozens of "messages" are contained in each "packet".

When one PC work station is connected to a remote site via a telephone line, additional PC work

stations at the same “service centre” location shall be able to share the same telephone line.

Allow remote sites to autodial PC workstations based on regularly scheduled intervals or after a

predetermined number of messages have been stored (operator selectable).

23.14.04.02 Network Support

The "turnaround time" for a global point to be received by any node, including operator stations,

shall be less than 3 seconds. The Controller LAN shall provide for automatic reconfiguration if any

station (Distributed Control Unit, PC work station, gateway, etc.) is added or lost. Should the

transmission cable be cut, the two sections shall reconfigure with no disruption to the system's

operation and without any operator intervention.

23.14.04.03 Network Trees & Summaries

Provide automatic, on-line configuration summaries listing each device or node on each tier of a

multi-tiered BMCS system architecture. Separate summaries shall exist for: Controller LAN,

Commercial LAN (if used), and MicroController (MC) network (if used). Each summary shall list

the point address/name, the device type, the device name, the revision level, and the revision date.

23.14.04.04 Fibre Optic Pathways

Fibre Optic media shall be used between buildings for the Controller LANs. Wherever the optical

fibre enters or leaves the building, provide a fibre to hard copper interface device. This Fibre Optic

Interface (FOI) shall be provided in a wall mounted enclosure. The FOI shall regenerate data prior

to transmitting this data to either the fibre or hard copper channels, so as not to result in the

degradation of signal and to minimise the accumulation of errors between multiple FOIs. The FOI

shall include "jabber" protection, such that continuous data from a defective component will not




destroy communications on the LAN. Provide visual indication of receiving and transmitting data

activity on the hardwired drop. Provide visual indication of data transmission on the fibre media,

jabber presence on fibre and hard copper channels, and bad signal quality on the hard copper

channel.

The fibre optic media shall consist of at least two fibres between each FOI, each transmitting in a

different direction, and connected in a ring architecture. Each FOI shall have two fibre transmit

ports and two fibre receive ports. Provide sensing and switching in the FOI so that in the event of a

fault on the fibre media, the LAN communication data will have an alternate path to maintain

communications with all other FOIs. Provide visual indication of data on the alternate fibre media as

well as loss of the primary path and loss of the alternate path.

Each FOI shall report a fault in its connected fibre path to the nearest DCU, for alarm notification

and failure mode activation.

23.14.05 FIELD HARDWARE

Distributed Control Units (DCU): All points in the system shall be monitored and/or controlled

through "intelligent" Distributed Control Units (DCU's). Each DCU in the system shall contain its

own microprocessor and memory with a minimum 300 hours battery backup. Each DCU in the

system shall be a completely independent stand-alone "master" with its own hardware clock calendar

and all firmware and software to maintain complete control on an independent basis. Each DCU

shall include the following capabilities:

. Acquire, process, and transfer information to the PC operator workstations or other DCU's on

the network.

. Accept, process, and execute commands from the other DCU's or other input devices, or

multiple PC work stations.

. Allow access to both data base and control functions by multiple workstations at the same

time.

. Record, evaluate, and report the changes of state and/or value that occur among points

associated with the DCU. If any operator work station or transmission network fails, but the

power to the DCU does not, the DCU shall continue to perform all control functions

associated with the points to which the DCU remains connected.

. Specifically, a DCU shall contain memory and processing capability to perform in a stand-

alone mode:

- Scheduled start/stop

- Adaptive optimised start/stop

- Duty cycling

- Automatic temperature Control

- Demand control via a sliding window, predictive algorithm

- Event initiated control

- Calculated point

- Scanning and alarm processing

- Full Direct Digital Control

- Trend logging

- Global communications

- Maintenance scheduling.

23.14.05.01 DCU Global Communications

Each DCU shall have the ability to transmit any or all I/O points as global points onto the network

for use by other DCU's and to utilize data from other panels as part of its database. To maximize

system throughput, and minimise unnecessary network traffic, analog inputs shall be transmitted




only after an operator specified change of value has occurred since the last broadcast value. This

change of value threshold shall be operator selectable on a per point basis.

23.14.05.02 DCU Field Input/Output Capability

The following point types must be supported by the DCU's.

. Discrete/digital input (contact status).

. Discrete/digital output (maintained, momentary, dual momentary, floating).

. Analog input (0-20 mA, or 0-5 VDC or 0-10VDC with 12-bit A/D conversion resolution

minimum).

. Analog output (0-10 VDC with 8-bit D/A resolution minimum).

. Pulse input capable of accepting 10 pulses/second and accumulating total.

. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) output capable of producing a pulse anywhere between 0-

655 seconds in duration with 0.01 second resolution.

Every discrete/digital output and PWM output shall have an HOA switch with individual feedback as

to the position of the switch, unless the DCU has an integral keypad/display device.

Each DCU shall have the ability to monitor, control or address not less than 300 data points.

23.14.05.03 DCU Point Scanning

It shall be possible to independently set the scan or execution speed for each point in the DCU to an

operator selected time from 1 to 254 seconds.

23.14.05.04 DCU Upload/Download Capability

Each DCU shall be able to download from or upload to any PC operator’s workstation. All point

data shall be modifiable from any authorized PC operators workstation and downloaded to the DCU

over the Controller LAN. It shall not be necessary to enter parameters locally at the DCU for control

programs to take effect. This upload/download shall be readily performed on a regular basis without

interrupting the control functions in the DCU. All upload/downloads shall be performed without the

operator workstation being taken "off-line", and shall be completed in no more than 15 seconds.

23.14.05.05 DCU Diagnostics

Provide diagnostics which support the following dynamic (one second refresh) parameters:

. Processor loading

. LAN Loading

. Memory data

23.14.05.06 DCU Test Mode Operation

Each DCU shall have the ability to place input/output points in a test mode. The test mode shall

allow control algorithms to be tested and developed on line without disrupting the field hardware and

controlled environment. The treatment of all I/O points in the test mode shall be as follows:

Scanning and calculation of all input points in test mode shall be inhibited. Manual control of input

points in test mode will allow setting the analog or digital input point to an operator determined test

value, which can be issued from any fixed or portable operator console.

It shall be possible to control all output points, but only the data base state/value shall be changed -

the external field hardware is left unchanged. Failure to provide test mode capability will preclude

acceptance.

23.14.05.07 DCU Local Operator Console




Furnish at each DCU location provisions for connection of a local operator's console. If the console

is not of the portable type, a permanent door mount type with display shall be provided at each DCU.

The console shall be capable of full global communications with all DCU's on the Controller LAN

when connected to any DCU on the Controller LAN. Systems not offering this global

communication capability shall be unacceptable under this specification. It shall be possible to

perform as a minimum the following functions through the local operator console:

. Set/display date.

. Set/display time.

. Display the status or value of all points connected to the DCU or any other DCU on the

Controller LAN.

. Control the outputs connected to the DCU or any other DCU on the Controller LAN.

. Enable/disable any or all automatic control outputs.

. Perform DCU diagnostic testing.

. Place any or all points in "Test" mode.

. Display DCU CPU "percentage processing time" so that system and DCU processor loading

may be determined. Also, display the amount of DCU programming memory available and

the amount currently used.

Where a portable, laptop, or notebook PC is provided as the local operator console, the operator

interface shall be identical to the primary PC work station, and require no additional training to

operate.

23.14.05.08 MicroController Interface

Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) shall be connected to the Controller LAN via a Micro

Controller Interface (MCI). The MCI shall be a DCU without any directly connected points. ASCs

shall be connected to the MCI via a high speed, RS-485 sub-network. For system reliability,

distribution of risk, and high throughput, not more than 64 ASCs shall be connected to any single

MCI, and this MCI shall not share processors or Controller LAN interfaces with a DCU that is

hardwired to primary equipment.

The MCI shall provide common, and memory intensive functions for locally connected ASCs,

including: time scheduling, custom or global calculations, and historical data collection. The

operator interface for all MCI database entry and application programs shall be fully integrated and

consistent with other DCUs.

The MCI shall support sub-networks consisting of counter-scanning loops for increased system

availability. Upon a single break (i.e., severed wire) the MCI shall scan the loop in both the primary

and secondary directions and maintain communications with all ASCs - not just those located

between the MCI and the fault.

23.14.05.09 Application Specific Controllers

Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) shall be utilized for zone or terminal equipment only.

Applications include:

. Fan coils, unit ventilators, small packaged AHUs, split system AHUs, rooftop AHUs

. Heat pumps

. VAV boxes

Application Specific Controllers shall function standalone for the local loop functions of the terminal

unit. Complete PID algorithms or fuzzy logic shall reside and execute at the ASC level.

23.14.05.10 Micro Controller Field Input/Output Capability

The following point types must be supported by the ASCs:

. Discrete/digital input (contact status).

. Discrete/digital output (maintained, floating).




. Analog input (temperature sensors with 8-bit A/D conversion resolution minimum).

. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) output capable of producing a pulse anywhere between 0-

655 seconds in duration with 0.01 second resolution.

No Potentiometers, batteries, filters, or other maintenance items shall be present on the ASC. The

database entry and personality assignment of the ASC shall be fully integrated and consistent with all

other points in the system, whether resident in a DCU or an ASC. All programs shall be contained

on the ASC in firmware, and all databases shall be contained on the ASC in non-volatile NOVRAM.

All input and output points in the ASC shall be available for display, command, and on-line editing

at the primary PC work stations. Points unused by the local terminal unit application, may function

as a system point.

Triple set points shall reside in each ASC for both heating and cooling: Occupied, Unoccupied, and

Economy. Occupied and Unoccupied shall follow the time schedule, or other event initiator in the

MCI. Economy set points shall be activated to widen the Occupied deadband during periods of high

electrical demand, in lieu of duty cycling or load shedding the terminal equipment.

To ensure "tight" integration between all system hardware and software, as well as long term

component availability, the MCI, ASC, and ASC sensors shall be originally manufactured by the

same manufacturer who supplies the DCUs, Controller LAN, and workstation application software.

Private labelling of these components does not fulfill this requirement.

23.14.05.11 Distributed Lighting Control Panel

The Distributed Lighting Control Panel(s) (DLCUs) shall reside on the Controller LAN. Each

DLCU shall support up to 64 split coil lighting contactors, rated 277 Vac, 20 amp each. Software

shall allow up to 32 groups, or zones of lighting circuits for each DLCU. Each circuit shall be

operator assignable to any or all of the 32 groups. Circuits assigned to lighting groups shall not be

limited to circuits in the DLCU, but may include any circuits on the Controller LAN.

Provide a "wink" feature to any or all of the circuits (operator selectable), to warn occupants of

impending unoccupied (lights off) conditions.

Provide local switches for "all on" and "all off". Provide a minimum of six points which may be

wired for local override switches, people sensors, or photocells.

23.14.05.12 ViewCon

Where shown on the plans and at all remote sites, provide a wall mounted keypad display device

with the ability to view and control points. The ViewCon shall contain a liquid crystal display with a

minimum of 4 lines of 40 characters and a membrane keypad consisting of no less than eight “soft”

keys whose functions are defined by the display. This display shall be oriented to a casual user (i.e.

janitor, receptionist), who does not require the sophistication of a PC workstation, not the complexity

of a programmer’s or technician’s tool.

From the ViewCon an operator with an authorized password (user defined, 1000 available), shall be

able to:

. Obtain point status

. Command a point to change state

. Command a point into “test“ or “manual”

. View and acknowledge alarms

. Change set points

The ViewCon shall support standard (pre-defined) and custom (user-defined) pages, where a page is

a list of points in a Controller LAN controller. A scrolling feature shall be available to view a long

list of points. Custom pages shall be developed from a local or remote PC workstation using

standard editors. Provide for user-defined names for custom pages and assignment of any or all

points in a Controller LAN controller (i.e., DCU, MCI) to a custom page. The ViewCon shall

support a minimum of 50 custom pages. Any controller on the Controller LAN shall have its points




available for inclusion in a ViewCon’s custom page. The names of points as resident in the

controller’s database (i.e., up to 16 characters) shall be displayed in point summaries. As a minimum

provide the following pages on the ViewCon:

. All space temperatures

. All points in each Controller LAN controller

. All points in alarm in each Controller LAN controller

When not in use, the ViewCon shall display the time and date.

The ViewCon may be integral to a controller. When integral to a controller the following password

protected edit functions shall also be available to points in that controller only:

. Override time schedules

. Edit time schedules

. Establish Holidays and other “special days”

. Set alarm limits

23.14.05.13 Temperature Sensors

Provide thermistor or thin film silicon sensors for all temperature applications, except differential

chilled water for BTU calculation, where precision matched Platinum RTDs shall be used. Solid

state sensors shall be linear, drift free, and require only a one time calibration. Thermistors, or

similar non-linear temperature devices shall be linearized by a look-up table in the connected

controller. Resolution shall be better than .5 degrees F for zone or terminal equipment applications,

and better than .2 degrees F for DCU applications.

23.14.05.14 Intelligent Sensors

Where shown on the plans, provide “intelligent” space sensors for Application Specific Controllers

which have the following features:

. 3 digit (plus decimal) alphanumeric display

. A means to locally controller analog or digital points in the connected controller

. Local override and setpoint adjustment (within software limits)

. Occupancy status LED and On/Off push-button

. A “call” push-button that can be linked to an Event Initiated Program anywhere in the system

. Display of all local input and output points in the service mode for ASCs

. Display of up to 4 user defined “global” or system points (e.g., outside air temperature,

outside air RH, fan status)

. Password protection of access to service mode, with a selection of up to 1000 passwords for

ASC.

Space sensors shall have an integral port for connection of a portable “intelligent” sensor to

communicate with its ASC. This port and portable “intelligent” sensor may be used for initiating the

"test mode" locally to verify all ASC control sequences, and perform test and balancing functions.

To eliminate the downtime associated with rechargeable batteries, the portable “intelligent” sensor

shall receive its power from the sensor port.

23.14.06 BMCS SOFTWARE

23.14.06.01 General

This Trade shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the automatic system

functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in

expansion or revision of the system. It is the intent of this specification to require provisions of a

system which can be fully utilized by individuals with no, or limited, previous exposure to PC's and

programming techniques and languages. If the system to be provided requires the use of any

modified BASIC, "C", PASCAL, or DRUM Language program, or writing "line" programming




statements to modify operation or strategy in the system, the vendor shall provide unlimited, no

charge, software modification and support for a period of five (5) years after the completion of the

project in addition to the warranty period specified elsewhere. Systems which are factory

programmed are unacceptable.

The software shall include a General Purpose Operating system, as well as Building Management

System Application software. All available vendor workstation application software shall be

provided with the system, and shall reside in each and every PC. "Unbundled" software packages

where the vendor can charge the user extra fees, or require dedicated workstations, or require system

rebooting for access, are unacceptable.

The software in the system shall consist of both "firmware" resident in the DCU's and "software"

resident in the operator workstations. The architecture of the system, and the application

software/firmware shall be distributed with no single system component responsible for a control

function for the entire Controller LAN. Each DCU shall contain the necessary firmware and I/O

capability to function independently in case of a network failure. No active energy management or

environmental control sequences shall be resident in the PC workstations. All PC workstations shall

be removable from the system without loss of control function - only alarm monitoring, long-term

history collection, and operator monitor/command/edit functions would be lost.

The primary operator interface to the system shall be through a graphical, "object oriented",

interactive presentation using a mouse and cursor for object selection and commands.

The system shall support an operator definable “default” system page. The default system page shall

be displayed upon system startup, operator activity time-outs, and when the system is not in use. This

default system page may be any one of the standard dynamic graphic pages, or may be a custom

display developed for this purpose. The operator shall be able to display their corporate logo,

emergency information, an index of all graphic pages, etc. as the default system page.

The cursor shall be a "floating arrow".

The system shall support "pop-up" windows for point commands. On selecting an object with the

cursor, a window shall open up to present the operator with choices corresponding to the operator's

password authorizations. These point commands shall include state changes, manual override of

application software, test mode activation and test value entry. This window shall include, for

reference, the point's descriptor (name), the point's hardware address, and alarm status.

The system shall support "pop-up" windows for point editing. On selecting an object with the

cursor, a window shall open up to present the operator with a list of active point database editors, if

permitted by the operators password level. Selecting one of these editors shall allow the operator to

modify the basic parameters associated with a point, as well as access any programs assigned to the

point (such as time schedules, calculations, events, etc.).

The system shall be based on interactive prompts and choices, using "dialog boxes" as opposed to

memorization of commands, "syntax", exact spellings, etc. This interactive prompt and choices

approach shall be used in monitoring, issuing commands, and editing. Command choices shall be as

simple as "clicking" the cursor over the correct word choice prompts (i.e., ON OFF), without typing

in the letters. Editing mode choices shall prompt with ranges or options (i.e., 16 CHARACTERS for

point name, or DIRECT/REVERSE for action).

23.14.06.02 Dynamic Graphic Flow Chart Programming

The operator shall have the ability to construct "dynamic" graphic flow charts of system control

sequences, while the system is on-line. This flow chart utility shall be usable both for on-line control

logic development (i.e., programming), and for live displays of the interactive process variables

occurring throughout the sequences of operations. Flow chart elements shall consist of "Icons"

selected from a "toolkit". Discrete Icons shall exist for:

. Each point type (AI, DO, etc.)

. Each DDC Module or Block




. Analog output PID

. Floating output PID

. Two position output (thermostatic control)

. Reset (with secondary input bias)

. High/Low selector (4 input, dual output)

. Relay

. Relay, Delay before break

. Relay, Delay before make

. Relay, Interval timer

. Each Application program appended to a point

. Calculations

. Event sequences

. Time schedules

. Demand control

. Trend

. Runtime

. Consumption

. Alarm inhibit/enable

. Micro control (AHU, Heat Pump, VAV, PID)

. "Lines" (values passed between DDC modules or points)

. Pages.

The cursor and mouse shall be used to place the Icons on the graphic, and to connect the Icons

(where meaningful) with "lines". "Lines" shall display the current state or value of data passing

between Icons, or Modules.

Text may be inserted into the graphic to describe the sequence of operation in sentence format. Once

completed the graphics shall be able to be printed out for permanent records.

During and/or after completing construction of the dynamic graphic flow chart, the cursor may be

placed on the Icon, and by "clicking" the mouse, the Icon may be exploded into the associated

database editor for adding, deleting, or modifying the point, module, or application program.

Similarly, the point may have its "pop-up" window called up to issue point commands, or overrides.

Systems requiring graphic programming languages which are off-line, or require time delays for

compiling, or which are not integrated into the primary operator work station are not acceptable.

23.14.06.03 Zoom

It shall be possible for an operator to locate any system point to monitor status, issue commands, or

edit associated database without knowledge of the point's name, address, or associated controller,

and without having to refer to a "tree" directory. The operator shall be able to zoom in on a building

in a campus graphic, zoom in on a floor in a building graphic, zoom in on a system in a floor plan

graphic, etc.

The system software shall be compiled for faster execution speeds and shall offer all of the following

features and capabilities:

23.14.06.04 Input/Output Capabilities

From any local PC workstation or any remotely connected PC work station, the system operator shall

have the capabilities through the keyboard/mouse to:

. Request dynamic displays of current values or status using a tabular or graphic format. A

global database sort utility shall allow an expanded tabular display of only the points on the

current graphic display. This expanded tabular display shall list point name, hardware address,

dynamic state or value, alarm status, override status, and test mode status.

. Command selected equipment to a specified state.

. Initiate logs and reports




. Change analog limits

. Add, delete, or change points within each DCU or application routine.

. Change point I/O descriptors, status, and alarm descriptors and engineering unit descriptors

while the system is on-line.

. Add new DCUs and MCs to the system while the system is on-line.

. Modify and set up maintenance scheduling parameters.

. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of colorgraphic displays providing dynamic,

animated displays. All development, editing and display work shall be performed with the

system fully on line and in full communications with the Controller LAN.

. Select discrete or analog sample data from the field to be automatically archived in the

assigned workstation.

A comprehensive report writer capability shall be provided in each workstation to sort and extract

data from the archived files and to generate finished custom reports. Reports shall be capable of

manual initiation and/or printout as well as automatic printout. The system will have the capability

to print reports on a daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or scheduled basis. The system will have the

capability to print reports as a result of an “event”. This report writer shall provide the capability for

statistical data manipulation and extraction. As a minimum the custom report writer must provide

the capability to generate four types of reports: 1) Statistical detail reports, 2) Summary reports, 3)

Trend graphic plots for up to four variables, 4) x-y graphic plots.

This report function shall be "on-line" for both development and printout, and shall not require

export to a third party spreadsheet program for execution.

In addition to this "on-line" function, the historical database shall be capable of being converted to

Data Interchange Format (DIF) for use in third party spreadsheet programs such as Lotus 1-2-3, for

off-line manipulation. Transmission to DIF files shall be manual, event driven, or automatic based

on operator selectable parameters including: time of day, frequency (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly),

scheduled days (32 days minimum). File transfer shall support "appending" new data to the existing

file data.

Support two printer operations. The alarm printer will print all alarm annunciation and return to

normal, operator acknowledgments, action messages, system alarms, operator sign-on and sign-off.

All operator control activities shall include the operator’s initials in the printed and disk record.

The data printer will be reserved for printing reports, page prints, and database prints. Both printer

functions shall be available from any PC workstation.

The operator will have the option of selecting daily, weekly or monthly as a scheduled frequency to

synchronize time and date in Distributed Control Units from the PC workstation. This function will

be performed for dial up as well as direct connected locations. This program shall accommodate

automatic daylight savings time adjustments.

The operator may print a selected Distributed Control Unit database whenever desired. The operator

shall be able to select any or all control parameters as needed. A "bindable" printout of the database

of each DCU (including MCs), with a floppy disk backup shall be submitted with "as-builds" as part

of the final acceptance procedure.

The CRT shall have a feature to indicate audibly and visually, Off-Normal conditions and messages

pending, whether in BMCS operating mode or third party software mode.

The operator may request a summary of all points on the Controller LAN currently in the "test"

mode or in an off-normal condition.




23.14.06.05 Operator Access

Operator access to the BMCS shall be via software password at every PC workstation and at each

DCU. Over 1000 passwords/operators shall be supported. The owner will not be constrained to

fixed password levels, but may enable any or all the following functions for any operator:

23.14.06.06 Command Functions

. View graphic pages

. Test-on/Test-off

. Point monitor

. Alarm acknowledgment

. Point control

. Manual override

. View summaries

. Exit from BMCS to DOS

23.14.06.07 Database Functions

. Passwords

. Graphic pages

. Report generator

. Trend sampling

. Message routing

. Off-line database editing

. DCU database save & restore

. On-Line database editing

. Holiday schedules

. DDC control modules

. Time schedules

. Event sequences

. Calculations

. Demand control parameters

. Micro controller parameters

. Runtime parameters

23.14.06.08 Database Creation and Support

The intent of this specification is to provide an BMCS system which will allow the owner to

independently perform his own modifications to the system from any operator work station. All

changes shall be done utilising standard procedures and must be capable of being done while the

system is on-line and operational. The DCU on the Controller LAN shall automatically check a PC

workstation's data base files upon connection to verify a current data base match. A utility shall

inform the operator if the DCU's database files do not match the backup files stored on the PC

workstation, along with the date of last DCU modification and date of last backup. The owner must

have as a minimum, the on line capability to:

. Add and delete points.

. Modify any point parameter.

. Determine which PC work station(s) points will be directed to, on a point by point basis.

. Change, add, or delete English language descriptors (i.e., name). System I/O points may be

identified either by name or by it's logical address. Up to 16 characters shall be available for

the English language descriptor, which shall be used in all control sequences. Use of a second

abbreviated point "name" for control sequences is unacceptable complexity.

. Add, modify, or delete alarm limits.




. Add, modify, or delete points in start/stop programs, trend logs, etc.

. Create custom relationship between points. A general purpose user utility shall be provided,

such that the user can implement software interlocks, calculations, etc.

. Assign application programs to points (as opposed to assigning points to programs).

. Obtain an "audit trail" of which application programs are controlling an individual point, on a

point by point basis.

. Create and/or modify DDC loops and parameters.

. Create and/or modify override parameters.

. Add, modify, and delete any applications program.

. Add, delete, develop and/or modify custom dynamic colour graphic displays utilizing either

custom symbols or system supported library of symbols. Graphics shall support at least

sixteen (16) colours and not less than sixty (60) outputs of real time, live dynamic data per

graphic. The system shall allow this dynamic graphic data to be displayed as an animated

symbol (i.e., when a pump starts the pipe fills up with water), an ASCII set (i.e., on-off), a

decimal (i.e., 96.3F), or as an analog bar graph. Each operator workstation shall support not

less than 1,000 separate graphic pages. This Trade shall include fifteen (15) developed

graphics as approved by the owner's representative for this project. The following graphic

pages shall be provided as a minimum:

. Index page of all graphics, with direct selection

. Floor plan of each floor, with zone temperatures

. Schematic of each unique system, with values and status

. Select a graphic screen refresh rate between 1 second refresh and 60 second refresh rate.

23.14.06.09 Operator Workstation

Any operator workstation shall:

. Accept data from the Controller LAN on an as needed basis without having to scan the entire

network of DCUs or MCs for updated point data.

. Interrogate the Controller LAN for updated point data when requested by the system operator.

. Allow operator command of equipment connected to DCUs and MCs.

. Allow operator to place specific DCUs and MCs in or out of service.

. Allow parameter editing of DCUs, MCs, and "gateway" nodes (limited only by an individual

operator's access assignments).

. Store duplicate data base on file for every DCU and MC and allow this database to be

downloaded to the remote panel while the system is on line.

. Control or modify specific programs on a per DCU, or MC basis.

. Develop, store and modify dynamic colour graphics utilizing system supplied mouse and

mouse supported software. It shall be possible for both mouse supported workstations and

non-mouse supported workstations to coexist on the same Controller LAN.




. Provide data archiving of assigned points throughout the system and to support overlaid

graphing of this data utilizing up to four (4) variables.

. To maintain system integrity, the operator shall have available an automatic DCU save utility.

The database of the DCUs shall be automatically uploaded to a workstation at 02:00 AM, for

backup purposes. This utility will function for both direct connect and dial-up work stations.

. The BMCS shall support not less than 15 operator workstations, each with simultaneous

access to the Local Area Network. Regardless of how the operator workstations are connected

to the Controller LAN (i.e., hardwired or via modem), the network shall support all specified

functions.

23.14.06.10 Alarm Processing

The BMCS shall have the following alarm processing features, all of which shall be owner definable

through the input keyboard:

. Each off normal condition shall cause an alarm and an appropriate message, including the

time of the alarm, system and point descriptor, alarm condition. The operator shall have the

capability to select, at any time, which state/value shall be considered alarms and which

alarms shall cause automatic dial-out to occur.

. Each critical alarm or change-of-state message shall be displayed. All Controller LAN

network alarm messages shall be stored on disk and may be reviewed on the CRT and/or

printed on operator selected printers at any time. It shall be possible to sort this alarm/change-

of-state database by date, time and/or item fields.

. An Alarm Summary shall show all new alarms and indicate which is the "best" graphic page

to select to act upon the alarm condition. Each alarm shall have its “priority” listed and all

alarms shall be displayed with highest priority first, then by reverse chronological order within

a priority.

. Provide an automatic page selection option for alarms. This feature (operator activated)

automatically selects and displays designated “best” graphic page for each alarm, even when

the operator is signed off. In the event of multiple alarms, the page associated with the most

recent highest priority alarm is displayed.

. Automatic user defined time delay of alarms during equipment start-up or shutdown shall be

provided to prevent nuisance and false alarms.

. Unique alarm delays on analog and discrete input points to prevent "flutter" alarms.

. The operator shall have the capability to route specific alarms to specific workstations, and/or

to specific pagers.

. Unacknowledged alarms will continue to blink even if they have "returned to normal". Only

operator acknowledgment can remove the blinking alarm indication. Red will signify points

in alarm while green will signify points in normal condition.

Each operator work station will have the ability to notify an operator of an alarm condition in one or

more points or controllers anywhere in the system. Alarm notification shall consist of:

. Automatic print of the alarm condition as described above.

. Display of an ICON indicating an alarm condition, including while in a third party program.

. Operator selectable audible alarm indication. The audible alarm may sound once, constant or

not at all, at owners option.




. Relay operation at the PC workstation, used to activate notification devices where the operator

will be too far from the PC to see visual indication, or the environment is too noisy to hear the

PC's audible. Provide a strobe light for alarm indication for all PC workstations located in

central plant areas.

23.14.06.11 Event Processing

The BMCS software shall have the ability to automatically initiate commands, user-defined

messages, take specific control actions or change control strategy and application programs as a

result of an event condition.

An event condition may be an analog high or low value crossing an operator defined limit, a change-

of-state, a specified state, or alarm occurrence, a return to normal or logical combinations of the

above. Events shall not be limited to alarm occurrences only but shall also include time, dates, as

specified system results. All event assignments or modifications shall be owner defined through the

input keyboard.

23.14.06.12 Automatic Restart

The DCU shall include a software program to automatically restart field equipment on a restoration

of power following a DCU power failure.

An owner defined time delay between individual equipment restart shall be provided. In addition,

the software program shall allow equipment to be energized or de-energized based upon the time of

day start/stop program in effect at the time of power restoration at the DCU.

23.14.06.13 Messages

The system shall be capable of automatically displaying or printing a user-defined message

subsequent to the occurrence of selected events. Events shall not be limited to alarm occurrences. It

shall be possible for the owner to construct independent messages for each DCU, each with as many

as 60 characters. The operator shall be able to:

. Compose, change, or delete any message

. Display or log any message at any time

. Assign any message to any event

23.14.06.14 Free Form Historical Reports

An operator shall be able to manually request reports from a console keyboard. All reports shall

have time and date and shall not be limited to "canned" or "standard" format. Data shall be gathered

from the field LAN's automatically and archived on owner selected workstations. The systems shall

include a report writer function which supports as a minimum the following functions:

. Long-term data archiving to hard disk

. Automatic directives to download to transportable media such as floppy diskettes or tapes for

storage

. Data selection methods to include data base searches, sorts, and manipulation

. Data extraction shall support mathematical manipulation

. Data reports shall allow development of XY curve plotting, tabular reports (both statistical

and summary), and multi-point timed based plots with not less than four (4) variables

displayed.

. Generating reports either normally at operator direction, or automatically under PC directions.

Both event driven and scheduled automatic reports shall be supported.




23.14.06.15 Prepared Historical Report

Provide an on-line, historical, database sort report utility, with the following features:

. Prompts to select data base sort by time, by date, by point (or range of points) with system

supplied default values of 24 hours, today, all Controller LAN points, respectively.

. Prompts for activating "conditional" sorts, including: changes-of-state, alarms, returns to

normal, operator sign on/off, operator acknowledgments, command errors, program control of

a point, test on/off, manual on/off, program control (ATC, Demand, Event) override, power

restore, LAN reconfiguration, controller off line, time/date modifications, and archive disk

memory 90% full, 95% full, and full.

. Single keystroke retrieval resulting in a report listing the most recent condition first, along

with the time, date, address, name, condition type, and value.

23.14.06.16 Parameter Save/Restore

The most current operating system including the most current parameter changes and modifications

will be stored on disk or diskette.

23.14.06.17 Data Collection

The operator workstation shall have the ability to automatically collect and store in disk files the

following information:

. Daily KWH consumption, peak demand, and time of peak demand for up to 32 KWH meters

over a 2-year period.

. Daily consumption for up to 30 meters over a 2-year period.

. Daily billable exclusive and shared override KWH consumption and billable override time as

well as non-billable exclusive and shared override KWH and non-billable override time for up

to 1024 zones over a 10-year period.

. Provide archiving of stored data for use with system supplied custom reports, (i.e., it shall be

possible to request the status of a temperature between 10/1/95 and 10/3/95 on an hourly

basis).

Archiving to disk shall automatically occur as long as the PC work station is ON and physically

capable of communicating with the Controller LAN(s), regardless of what programs are currently

being executed at the time data is needed to be stored to disk (i.e., an operator can be developing a

financial spread sheet in LOTUS (when the BMCS stores field trending information to disk--the

current LOTUS (program shall not be interrupted or halted) for archiving.

23.14.06.18 Graphic Display

On-Line graphic development shall be supported on all work stations connected to the LAN either as

"hard-wired" direct connect or via remote dial-in. The system shall support any mix of mouse

supported workstations or non-mouse workstations.

The systems graphic software shall provide the following minimum features:

. "Page Linking" such that it is possible to "zoom" into a specific AHU or any other page

through a sequence of graphics without using anything but the system mouse.

. Generate, store, and retrieve library symbols for use in generating graphic pages.

. Single or double height characters.




. Sixty (60) dynamic points of data per graphic page.

. Pixel level resolution. Graphics will be displayed on VGA monitors with a 640 X 480

resolution, minimum. Colour selections will be made from a colour bar consisting of 16

colours, with adjacent text description.

. Animated objects for discrete points (i.e., when a pump starts, the pipe fills with water or

when a damper shuts it goes closed on the screen).

. Analog bar graphs for analog points. The operator shall be able to locate up to 60 bar graphs

per graphic page, with options as to bar graph colour, dimensions, horizontal/vertical

orientation, and limit values.

. The real time value of each input or output from the DCU's DDC control block modules shall

be displayable on the colour graphic.

. An on-line "Draw" utility with a "toolkit" containing the following:

- Library Symbols - Fill

- Page Links - Line

- Undo - Point Values

- Box - Move

- Line Values - Circle

- Delete - Arc

. Provide for import of .PCX file format graphics developed in third party programs such as

Paintbrush. Such imported graphics shall be used as a "backdrop", so that all other dynamic

and animated system features may be superimposed on this graphic. Similarly, it shall be

possible to import CAD type drawings, by first converting the CAD drawing from .DXF

format to .PCX format.

23.14.06.19 Maintenance Management

Each DCU, acting in conjunction with the operator workstation's graphic displays, shall support a

maintenance management program on all specified points. This program as a minimum shall

provide the following:

. Discrete run time monitoring on per point basis. Run time shall be able to be accumulated on

two basis - since the beginning of time, and since last reset.

. Maintenance scheduling targets on specific equipment with auto annunciation, auto

scheduling and auto shutdown.

. Equipment safety targets which generate an alarm or user defined message if the equipment

has not been serviced and cleared in time. The program shall also allow automatic shut down

of the equipment if the safety limit is exceeded.

. CRT display of maintenance material needed including estimated labour.

. Single command reset on a per point basis.

23.14.06.20 Context Sensitive Help Screens

Provide a dedicated function key which will call up a context sensitive help screen associated with

the current keyboard/mouse input.

23.14.06.21 Application Sensitive Help Screens

Provide the capability to develop help screens tailored to job specific applications. These screens

shall be displayed by selecting an Icon from an associated graphic display.




23.14.06.22 Dedicated Function Keys

The system shall include the following dedicated function keys as a minimum:

. Function Key Help - definition of all function keys.

. System Help - context sensitive Help.

. Silence - silences new audible alarms

. Recall - re-enters deleted data during editing

. Alarm Summary - displays alarm summary screen to review or acknowledge alarms.

. Messages Summary - displays events screen to review or acknowledge system messages.

. Page Acknowledge - allows acknowledgment of all alarms that appear on a System Page,

DCU Summary, Page Summary, or Alarm Summary

23.14.07 DCU/MCI APPLICATION ROUTINES

23.14.07.01 General

A DCU shall include various software packages, each of which performs a specialized application

routine. All of the application routines listed shall be inter-active, compatible with and capable of

global operation as necessary. The use of any application routine shall not cause any other software

to malfunction.

23.14.07.02 Demand Monitoring and Load Shedding

Each DCU supports a program designed to control the electrical "demand" due to peaks in electrical

energy consumption.

The Demand program shall operate in a global fashion and shall be able to control outputs in any

DCU or ASC to maintain the Demand setpoint, regardless of which panel the meter is connected to.

Systems using a demand program that does not operate in a global fashion are unacceptable under

this specification. Systems containing multiple Controller LANs shall have this global function

occur between LANs as well.

The input to this program shall be a pulse count from the incoming power meter connected directly

to a pulse accumulator in a DCU.

Forecast demand (KW) shall be predicted by the sliding window method.

The system shall provide a minimum of 3 demand targets per demand meter. The system shall

automatically change targets based upon (1) time, (2) status of pre-selected points, or (3)

temperature.

Each load shall not only be assigned a load shed priority, but will be assigned a minimum "ON" time

and a maximum "OFF" time. All loads in any one priority level will be shed before loads of the next

priority level will be shed. Loads will be shed and restored on a "round-robin" basis. All parameters

shall be operator selectable and displayable via the CRT. The system shall provide for a minimum

of seven priority levels.

Equipment connected to Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) will have their occupied deadbands

widened in lieu of shedding the loads.




Demand forecasting shall be by the "sliding window" technique. "Ideal rate", "instantaneous" or

other non-forecasting demand programs using analog values for KW are not acceptable under this

specification.

To avoid overcorrecting (oscillation) by shedding and restoring loads for minor perturbations, a

control band (upper and lower limit) shall be included so that the load will be shed when the upper

limit is exceeded, and restored when the lower limit is reached.

A printed message shall be generated when the demand target upper limit is exceeded and all priority

loads have been shed. The demand exceeded alarm will also show on the CRT.

Maximum demand and its time of occurrence, and energy consumption for the day shall be stored at

midnight. Monthly consumption shall be stored and reset on a user selected day.

23.14.07.03 Automatic Time Scheduling (ATS)

Each DCU/MCI shall provide self-contained ATS programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling of

building loads. Each ATS program shall support up to seven (7) normal day schedules, seven (7)

"special day" schedules and two (2) temporary day schedules. The special days schedule shall

support up to 30 unique date/duration combinations. Each load shall support an individual time

program, as a minimum.

Each load shall be able to be assigned at least 16 control actions per day with 1 minute resolution.

Operator selectable time schedule operation choices shall include the following: Start, Optimised

Start, Stop, Optimised Stop, Cycle, Optimised Cycle.

A minimum of 30 holiday periods up to 99 days in length may be specified for the year.

It shall be possible to create "temporary" schedules up to a week in advance that will be in operation

only on the day or days specified.

Support a temporary "special day" date and duration to be broadcast to selected or all sites to account

for unusual situations Such as temporary operating hours or "snow days".

In addition to individual load scheduling, provide for group scheduling by designating equipment to

be linked to a "master" time schedule, for quick schedule changes of large groups of equipment

which follow a common schedule. The master schedule shall provide a choice of fixed start and stop

times by day, or plus and minus adjustments to the existing schedule, in minutes. Master schedules

shall provide a choice of immediate activation or activation at a later date and time.

Support control actions to be performed at any operator selectable time of day as well as at "sunrise"

and "sunset". Sunrise and sunset parameters shall be selectable based on time zone, latitude, and

longitude.

23.14.07.04 "Distributed" Start/Stop Time Optimisation (SSTO)

Each controlled point shall include an adaptive, self learning, software program to perform optimised

start-up and/or shutdown of selected equipment. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at

the latest possible time and still allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone conditions by

occupancy time. The SSTO program shall also shut down HVAC equipment at the earliest possible

time before the end of the occupancy period, and still maintain desired comfort conditions.

The SSTO program shall perform optimised start/stop as a function of outside conditions and

individual inside conditions. The SSTO program shall be adaptive, self-tuning with the capability to

adjust to changing conditions unattended. Systems using global optimisation based on

"representative" inside conditions are not acceptable.

The system operator shall be able to, for each point under control of the SSTO program, establish

and modify the following parameters:




. The occupancy period

. The desired temperature at the beginning of the occupancy period

. The desired temperature at the end of the occupancy period

. The maximum earliest start allowed prior to the scheduled start of the occupancy period. The

actual system calculated time to start shall be displayable as a system value.

The Central Plant shall be started as the result of the first zone being activated by its distributed

SSTO program - not by a separate time based or optimised program.

23.14.07.05 Duty Cycle Control (DCC)

Each DCU shall include a software program to perform Temperature Compensated Duty Cycle

Control. The DCC program shall periodically stop and start loads, based on space temperature, and

according to various On/Off patterns. This temperature compensation consists of modifying the off

portion of the cycle based on operator specified comfort parameters. The total cycle time shall be

maintained by increasing the on portion of the cycle by the same amount that the off portion is

reduced. The result should be a net reduction in both the electrical demand and the energy consumed.

The BMCS operator shall be able to set and modify the following parameters for each individual

load.

. Minimum and maximum Off time

. On/Off time in one minute increments

. Time period from beginning of interval until load can be cycled

. Manually override the DCC program and place a load in an On or Off state

. Cooling Target Temperature (degs.) and Differential

. Heating Target Temperature (degs.) and Differential

. Cycle off adjustment (min./deg.) for both cooling and heating target temperatures.

23.14.07.06 Night Setback/Setup Program

Each DCU and MC shall provide software to automatically reduce the heating space temperature

setpoint or raise the cooling space temperature setpoint during unoccupied hours. The night setback

program shall be operated in conjunction and coordinated with the scheduled start/stop and optimum

start/stop programs.

23.14.07.07 Calculated Points

Each DCU/MCI shall provide the operator a means of defining calculations and totalisation

computed from monitored points (analog/digital points), constants, or other calculated points.

Calculations shall be executed at the uniquely assigned point scan rates.

The operator shall be able to employ any of the following arithmetic, algebraic, Boolean and special

function operations to define the computation:

. add . divide . Minute

. square root . not . Hour

. greater than . not equal . minutes past midnight

. subtract . negate . day of week

. and . month . exclusive or

. less than . greater than or equal to . enthalpy

. multiply . day . dewpoint

. or . year . Relative humidity

. equals . less than or equal to

Numeric values generated from the calculations shall be treated like any other analog value in that

alarm limits may be assigned to them. These values may be used in any DCU/MCI on the controller

LAN for any function that a "hardwired point" might be used (i.e., control sequences, set points,

targets, etc).




23.14.07.08 Event Initiated Programming (EIP)

Each DCU/MCI shall provide event initiated programs. An event may be initiated by any data point.

Triggering an EIP shall cause a series of control actions in a sequence, i.e., if point A reaches a Hi

alarm, start pumps 1 through 12. Up to 25 sequences can be defined. Each sequence may cause up

to 16 control actions. Sequences may be chained together.

The time interval between each control action shall be operator definable from between 0 to 3600

seconds. Each motor may lock out associated analog alarms when the motor is Off by programming

each desired analog point for alarm disable.

The output of a sequence may be an analog value.

The programming shall provide for "skip" logic without requiring any programming code or machine

type language input.

The system shall have the ability to verify completion of one action before proceeding to the next

sequential action. If proper states are not verified the EIP shall be able to skip to an operator

specified next action.

23.14.07.09 Direct Digital Control (DDC) Modules

Each DCU shall provide "Block" or "Modular" programming software so that the operator can easily

develop custom control strategies and sequences of operation, without learning a programming

language.

Control loops and sequences shall be defined using "modules" that are analogous to traditional

pneumatic or electric control devices. Modules may be linked together to form more complex control

strategies. The use of mathematical equations, "BASIC", or proprietary programming languages for

defining a DDC control loop is unacceptable.

The following types of modules shall be supported in firmware for each DCU in the system:

. PID controller with analog output or PWM output

. PID controller with floating (paired) output

. Two-position controller

. Primary and secondary reset schedule selector

. Hi/Low signal selector

. Single pole double throw relay

. Single pole double throw time delay relay with delay before break, delay before make and

interval time capabilities

Should a sensor fail or be taken out of service, the DDC program shall execute a user defined fail-

safe output.

The value or state of each of the lines which interconnect DDC modules shall be displayable on the

CRT graphic pages to allow logic diagrams of the DDC strategies to be shown with actual values.

23.14.07.10 Self Tuning PID Loops

Three methods of tuning PID Loops shall be available: Manual, Automatic, and Adaptive. To assist

the operator in tuning a DCU with Direct Digital Control PID or floating loops, a "tuning" utility

shall be provided that will allow the collection of data and tuning of the process in real time.

The tuning utility shall display the following information on the CRT upon operator request:

. Control loop being tuned

. Input (process) variable

. Output (control) variable

. Setpoint of loop




. Proportional band

. Integral (reset) Interval

. Derivative (rate) Interval

The above information shall be displayed on any PC workstation CRT in a graphical format with

automatic scaling such that the input and output variable are superimposed on a graph of "time" vs.

"variable". This program shall allow the operator to affect the output variable by modifying the

setpoint, gain, etc., and view the results on the display. In addition to viewing the results on the CRT,

it shall be possible to print the module parameters being tuned with the graph while it is being tuned.

Automatic Tuning

Provide DCUs with an on-line utility which may be manually turned on to "disturb" the process.

This utility shall then monitor the results and calculate new parameters for sample interval,

Proportional gain, Integral gain, and Derivative gain. This utility shall be usable during the

commissioning process to establish reasonable values, then turned off.

Adaptive Tuning

Provide DCUs with an on-line utility which may run continuously. Adaptive tuning shall be initiated

automatically whenever an operator defined change in the process (input) variable is detected. This

utility shall monitor the process (control loop) after a natural disturbance, and automatically

recalculate the Proportional gain, Integral gain, and Derivative gain. This utility shall be used to

keep a system tuned, as the equipment ages and occupancy and loads change, after commissioning.

Self Tuning Parameters

Provide the following operator selectable self tuning parameters to support automatic and adaptive

tuning:

. Adaptive control enabling point - the system point whose status determines whether adaptive

control is enabled or disabled.

. Maximum bump - output step change required to produce a change in the input, greater than

the noise level, but not so great as to damage equipment.

. Settling time - the time it takes the PID input (process variable) to settle down after a process

disturbance. For automatic tuning, the time interval between setting the PID output to the

control point and the beginning of the tuning cycle. For adaptive tuning, the minimum time

that will be observed between parameter calculations.

. Maximum overshoot - percent allowed

. Target damping - the desired reduction in the process variable overshoot from the first

overshoot (maximum overshoot) to the second, in percent.

. Noise band - the minimum process variable perturbation that will initiate an adaptive

calculation of the PID parameters, in percent of the input range.

23.14.07.11 Trend Logging

Each DCU/MCI in the system shall contain a trending program that will store samples of all of the

DCU/MCI data points. The trend log file will be updated in memory continuously at discretely

assignable intervals by the trend program. As the DCU/MCI data files begin to fill, the DCU/MCI

shall have the capability to automatically initiate an upload request and shall then store the data on

hard disk for future use. The trending program may also be "time synchronized" to start sampling at

an operator specified time each day and cease sampling at operator specified end times. The

sampling on the trend interval established by the operator shall allow sample resolution of one

minute. Sampling shall allow co-ordination with the "on" state of a specified point, i.e., sample when

"on", cease to sample when "off".




It shall be possible to display the trend samples for each DCU/MCI in the system from the operator's

workstation in a graphic format. The trend graph shall be automatically scaled and shall display at

least 60 samples of data in a plot of time vs. data on the operator workstation. It shall be possible to

print the graph at any time while being displayed on the CRT.

A system-wide twelve point trend log shall be available. This trend log shall support operator

selected sample intervals, print intervals, print start times, and print stop times.

23.14.07.12 Override

It shall be possible to override the normal schedules of the equipment being controlled on the

Controller LAN and, if required, the actual control sequences.

The override shall be initiated by all of the following:

. A touch tone phone through interactive digital voice prompts

. Local console

. Operator PC workstation

The touch-tone telephone interface unit shall be controller LAN resident and support network wide

after hours billing. The touch-tone telephone interface unit shall support up to 50 zones of control,

linking up to 100 discrete system points, and shall have the ability to generate after hour bills based

on both shared and common loads. Additional system access codes shall be provided for these

specialized functions:

. After hours maintenance for non-billable overrides.

. Supervisor for acquiring any point information.

. Manager for acquiring any point information and controlling any point.

For each zone, the following values must be stored on a daily basis:

. Non-billable exclusive KWH override.

. Non-billable shared KWH override.

. Non-billable override time.

. Billable exclusive KWH override.

. Billable shared KWH override.

. Billable override time.

When local LAN access is by way of a touch-tone telephone, the LAN shall provide for digitised

voice communication with the operator to include data exchange like temperatures, zone status,

override condition, programmed times, etc.

23.14.08 PAGER INTERFACE

It shall be possible for specific alarm events to initiate an automatic page via an interface to either a

modem connected to the P.S.T.N. pager network or to a local site paging system.

It shall be possible to set-up shift patterns with groups of pager holders and the hours they are

working and route alarms to persons in the shift pattern.

It shall be possible to send alarms to an individual pager.

It shall be possible to support multiple pager interfaces such as both dial up network and local site

paging.

All alarms shall be configured as part of this Contract.




As a minimum the page message shall contain the time, date, mnemonic and text describing the

alarm condition e.g. “AHU 1 Fail”.

The paging system shall record the last 100 paging events.

The number of pagers provided shall be five (5)

23.14.09 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

23.14.09.01 Application Specific Controller Interface

The MCI shall be the ASC Interface platform. All members of the MicroRegulator product line, as

well as the Access Control (Door Processing Units - DPUs) product line for integrated access shall

live on the same sub-network.

The MCI shall support two channels of 32 controllers each. The MCI shall support a one second

scan rate of selected ASC points.

It shall not be necessary to calculate and enter Proportional, Integral, Derivative, or Interval values in

order to engineer, startup or commission the ASCs. The ASCs shall be shipped with default

parameters which can be adjusted if required. Standard default parameters will be different for each

application.

23.14.09.02 Application Specific Controller - Common Requirements

Inputs shall be software definable to accept Thermistor or Discrete Contact Closure. Outputs shall

be TRIAC, and shall support Two Position, Frequency Modulated, Pulse Width Modulated and

Floating.

Connectors for field wiring shall be easily removable without disconnecting the cabling.

LED indication shall be provided for communications status and controller self diagnostics status.

Setpoint bias, local override, and room temperature shall be available via the I/Stat or a plain

Thermistor based sensor, using the same terminals.

The room sensor shall support a HandHeld console. The I/Stat, when used as a HandHeld console,

shall plug into the room sensor.

The ASC shall be UL Listed for UL 916 Energy Management Systems. Any plastics used (i.e.,

cover, etc.) shall be UL Listed for UL 94-V0 (self extinguishing materials).

The ASC shall be field configurable for standalone operation, without power to the unit, using DIP

switches, or similar methods. DIP switch settings shall be capable of being overridden by the I/Stat,

Hand Held console or the PC operator station. The ASC shall operate with the new settings

immediately and not require a power cycle to initiate them. Each ASC shall ship from the factory

pre-programmed with common default values.

Editors, set points, addresses, etc. shall remain in NOVRAM or EEPROM, to ensure standalone

operation. It shall be possible to read and write to this memory, locally and remotely to make

changes to the default parameters. Parameters requiring ongoing changes will reside in RAM, and

default to the NOVRAM or EEPROM values.

The ASC shall contain a seven day software clock which shall be accurate to five (5) minutes per

day. This software clock is intended to be used for initial commissioning prior to connecting to an

MCI, as well as a "fallback" for when communication with the MCI is lost. The hardware clock in

the MCI shall automatically update the software clocks in the ASCs once per day, to ensure best

accuracy during occupancy hours. All "normal" operation shall be from the MCI's more accurate

clock.




Outside air sensor value will be available to all ASCs from a system point external to the ASC.

Where the ASC uses the outside air temperature value (e.g.; economizer) and communication is lost

with the source, the ASC will retain the last communicated value.

The ASCs shall support one step calibration of temperature sensors and velocity transducers.

Eliminate the need for a technician, test & balance trade, or owner to have to refer to look-up tables

or to interpolate "counts" in calibration or recalibration of an input or output.

Staging will be automatic. If one stage is required, analog outputs will vary between 0 and 100% as

the load calculation varies between 0 and 100%. If two stages are required, stage one analog output

will vary between 0 and 100% as the load calculation varies between 0 and 50%, and stage two

analog output will vary between 0 and 100% as the load calculation varies between 50 and 100%.

Digital outputs will also be staged and modulated using time proportioned modulation over a fixed

window (i.e., 5 or 10 minutes). If one stage is required the first stage will be on for 1/4 the time

window for a 25% load calculation, ½ the time window for a 50% load calculation, etc. If two stages

are required, the first stage will be on 100% at 50% load calculation, and the second stage will be on

for ½ its time window at 75% load calculation.

The currently active zone temperature set points (as biased by setpoint adjustment) shall be available

for dynamic displays, and use in other system applications.

The I/Stat shall be capable of displaying the current temperature setpoint in two modes. Dual mode

shall display the cooling setpoint if the ASC is in cooling and the heating setpoint if the controller is

in heating mode. Dual mode shall automatically display the correct setpoint. Adjusting the setpoint

from the I/Stat will only adjust the currently displayed setpoint. Single mode shall display the

temperature setpoint of the total controller. Heating and cooling set points shall be calculated from

this single value. Adjusting the Single Mode setpoint from the I/Stat will automatically adjust both

the heating and cooling set points accordingly.

The controller shall be provided with a verification mode that will demonstrate the complete end to

end thermodynamic performance of the control algorithm as the space temperature is manually

adjusted from below, through and above setpoint. This verification mode shall be capable of being

initiated from the I/Stat. The I/Stat shall also display the results of the verification process. Special

hand held devices or PC programs shall not be needed to perform this control algorithm verification.

Fans, compressors, heat stages, and the like shall have minimum on and maximum off times. It shall

be possible to lockout heating and cooling centrally. Fans shall be interlocked to operate when

stages of heat or cooling are operational.

Resident I/O database shall support minimum trip and close. Default minimum fan cycle times = 30

seconds and minimum compressor cycle time = 4 minutes. These values shall be adjustable.

Provide for points to be predefined based on how they are wired to certain terminals. For

applications which do not fully utilize all points in an application, the unused point may be any

defined for other applications resident in the MCI or other controllers.

23.14.09.03 HandHeld Console

This device shall communicate with the ASC via the room sensor. The HHC shall also connect to

the ASC and the MCI. The I/STAT shall be the HHC.

If batteries are used they shall be easily replaceable in the field, and shall maintain a charge

sufficient to last one full workday in normal use (ie., test and balance) and be able to recharge

overnight.

23.14.09.04 Workstation

Provide easy access to ASC editors.




Support copy of identical ASCs. This will copy all point names and parameters from a

representative ASC to similar ASCs. The ASC may be given a unique tag for all of its points, such

as "Room 35".

Dynamic editor will be in two (or more) pages. The top page will be the common items that the

average operator will require access to, such as setpoint and temperature readout. Page down,

requiring a higher password level provides access to additional information for the programmer type,

such as P,I, & D parameters.

There shall be an editor, should the operator want to delete standard options, such as the third stage

of heat, for applications with only two stages of heat.

23.14.09.05 Room Sensor

There shall be two versions: the I/STAT and the Slide/STAT.

Slide/STAT: This room sensor is to be attractive (white) and highly functional. A Hand Held

Console port shall be out of sight, and not require removal of cover. Provide versions with

thermistor only, thermistor plus push-button, thermistor plus push-button plus setpoint adjustment.

Single gang plate mounting option to be available.

The I/STAT display shall present the midpoint of the heating and cooling set points for normal

operation, and to avoid user confusion. Outside air temperature shall also be displayed, on request.

Setpoint bias and override shall be done by repeatedly pressing increase or decrease push buttons

where each push increments the setpoint display upward or downward by one degree, or one half

hour respectively. This sensor shall also support fan speed control (Variable and HI, LOW,

MEDIUM, OFF). This sensor shall provide sufficient Man Machine Interface to allow Factory setup

and testing of the ASC, as well as Testing & Balancing, without need for a Hand Held Console or a

portable PC.

23.14.10 FIELD DEVICES

23.14.10.01 General

A schedule of field devices shall be submitted, cross referenced to the points schedule showing the

total number and specification of the device to be supplied, which shall comprise the manufacturer,

model, range, accuracy, flow characteristics, working, operating and static pressure ranges, all as

applicable to the transducer or actuator. The BMCS specialist shall be responsible for the correct

output and positioning for sensors. Where sensor positions are indicated on drawings, he shall

advise any corrections to the engineer at an early stage of the project.

23.14.10.02 Temperature Sensors

Temperature sensors shall be platinum wire or thin film resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) or

thermistors. Performance limits shall be as follows:

(a) Accuracy: + 0.3ΕC max. for range up to 40ΕC.

+ 1.0ΕC max. for range up to 150ΕC.

(b) Repeatability: + 0.1ΕC max. for range up to 40ΕC.


(c) Long term drift: + 0.1ΕC max. for range up to 40ΕC.

+ .05ΕC max. for range up to 150ΕC.

(d) Time constant: + 0.1ΕC max. for range up to 40ΕC.





23.14.10.03 Current Transformers

Current transformers shall be used for run status indication signals on all pumps and fans.

Room temperature sensors shall be wall mounted, non-indicating type with a tamper proof cover.

Temperature sensors used for duct temperature sensing or sensing after heating or cooling coils shall

be extended element type with sufficient length of sensing element for winding several times across

the face of the coil or duct. Elements shall be securely mounted free of any thermal contact with

coils.

23.14.10.04 Humidity Sensors

Humidity sensors shall be 4-20 mA transmitters. The sensing element shall be a polymer, thin-film

capacitance type. Performance shall be at least equal to the following:

(a) Measuring range: 0:100% RH

(b) Accuracy at + 20oC including

calibration linearity and + 2% RH (0:90% RH)

repeatability errors. + 3% RH (90:100% RH)

(c) Temperature coefficient: + 0.05% RH/oC max.

(d) Time constant: 60 secs max. in still air.

Room humidity sensors shall be wall mounted, non indicating type with tamper proof cover. Sensors

used for duct humidity sensing or sensing after heating or cooling coils shall be extended probe type.

Return air and outside air humidity sensors shall include a heavy duty sinter filter over the sensing

element.

23.14.10.05 Differential Pressure Sensors (Low Pressure air)

Analogue pressure and differential pressure sensors shall be industrial quality, two wire, 4-20 mA

transmitters, having a mechanical design which provides a completely sealed metal diaphragm

between the sensed and reference volumes. Minimum performance requirements shall be as follows:

(a) Accuracy: + 0.5% (max) of calibrated span

(b) Repeatability: + 0.1% (max) of calibrated span.

(c) Dead band: 0.05% (max) of calibration span.

(d) Time constant: 1.5 seconds (max).

All differential pressure sensors shall have an allowable pressure difference rating exceeding the fan

shut-off head for the system in which they are installed. Similarly, pressure sensors shall have an

adequate safety margin between their allowable rated pressure and the maximum pressure they are

likely to be exposed to in service.

The measuring span of sensors shall be carefully chosen to maximise the accuracy of sensors in

service. A schedule of proposed sensor ranges shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior

to ordering sensors.

23.14.10.06 Damper Actuators

Damper actuators shall be of the solid state reversible proportional actuator type and be of sufficient

torque output to operate its damper against the air flow resistance at all points of its travel. Actuator

shall be selected on the basis of a maximum of 75% of manufacturer's rated output torque.




Actuator shall be complete with a weather resistant case when located in outside and relief air paths.

Damper motors shall be rigidly and centrally mounted at the drive side of the damper. Provide

additional bracing where necessary to provide the required rigidity.

Where actuators are driving dampers in smoke spill paths, actuators shall be mounted outside

ductwork and suitable mechanically robust drive linkages shall be provided. As a minimum, all

smoke spill dampers shall have two actuators, one fitted on each side of the damper.

Motor linkages shall be heavy duty type and shall be free from slack and/or spring in the mechanism.

Linkages and dampers shall be adjusted for smooth operation and the linkages shall be pinned to the

damper drive shafts.

All damper actuators shall be provided with a manual/off/auto test switch. The manual position shall

provide the exact opposite position to the "off" position and the test switch shall be located in the

adjacent MCC.

Where dampers must return to open or closed on power loss, e.g. fire mode dampers, they shall be

spring return type.

Damper activators shall be close coupled with an Input Signal of 4-20mA. All damper motors

associated with smoke spill, outside air and return air to comply with current British Standard and

other relevant standards. All activators shall have provision for manual override.

23.14.10.07 Motor Speed Controllers

The BMCS specialist shall be responsible for interfacing the system outputs to the motor speed

controllers, supplying any transducers or interface circuits as required.

23.14.11 COMMISSIONING

The BMCS specialist shall be responsible for the full commissioning of his system and any other

controls equipment supplied by him.

All safety interlocks, overrides and fail-safe conditions are to be operational prior to starting the

plant. Demonstrate as agreed with the engineer prior to starting plant in BMCS auto mode.

Fault conditions for all critical alarms, safety devices and control interlocks shall be simulated and

proved effective as soon as practical once BMCS control mode is selected.

Sensors shall be checked to ascertain accuracy within limits, pressure switches checked for switch

points and hysteresis. Humidity sensors shall be checked for accuracy using a wet/dry bulb

thermometer.

All the necessary test equipment and materials used in commissioning shall be supplied by the

BMCS specialist. All test equipment shall have valid test certificates.

Trend graphs will be provided to demonstrate the stable control of the plant. Simulated inputs will be

employed to check stability over the design environmental range.

The BMCS Trade shall include in their tender an allowance for system tuning via auto-dial or visit to

check correct operation of all plants which may exhibit changes in stability due to settling in or

seasonal conditions.

Commissioning documentation and schedules shall be submitted for approval during the design

phase showing each plant, point, interlock and control algorithms, and the stages of checks and

commissioning required. Each cleared item to have date and engineer reference. Completed copies




shall be available to the engineer prior to acceptance testing. A complete set of the commissioning

documentation is to form part of the system documentation.

Once any item of plant is commissioned and left running to the dictates of the BMCS, documentation

showing the overrides, control and software configuration shall be available on site at all times.

23.14.12 STANDBY FOR OTHER SYSTEMS TESTING

The BMCS specialist shall attend during the site test trials for the following systems and demonstrate

his system functions as specified elsewhere:

Fire Alarm

23.14.13 ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATIONS

The BMCS specialist shall give seven days notice to the engineer of his intention to provide the

acceptance demonstrations once the commissioning is complete. The operation of all safety

interlocks shall be tested and ten per cent of all points shall be selected by the engineer and

demonstrated for operation/accuracy. Should more than 1% fail performance test, a further ten per

cent may be selected. If above 1% fail he may at his discretion demand 100% demonstration. The

BMCS specialist shall supply sufficient man-power/test equipment, consumable items and portable

telephones to conduct the demonstration efficiently. Testing shall also incorporate an audit of the

wiring and hardware installation, demonstration of safety interlocks, start of system from power-

down and review of time schedules and alarm levels, grouping and selected control parameters.

23.14.14 SYSTEM HAND-OVER

The BMCS specialist shall ensure the following are completed at hand-over:

. Any snagging to be documented and agreed date determined for clearance.

. All passwords/PIN numbers, levels and operators recorded.

. Disk copies of all system and data files supplied.

. Complete sets of O&M manuals left with system, any agreed amendments/additions required

to be documented and a target date for completion agreed.

. Training of engineers and operators to be checked complete or program for completion

agreed.

23.14.15 DOCUMENTATION

23.14.15.01 Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

Four (4) copies of all final operating and maintenance manuals will be supplied two weeks prior to

Practical Completion in A4 binders. Preliminary copies shall be available for review by the Engineer

three (3) months prior to Practical Completion.

Operating Manuals shall comprise instructions on equipment safety checks, start-up and close-down

procedures, daily operation and full descriptions of operating features. Diagrams shall show the full

diagrammatical (network structures, outstations and peripherals) and physical layout of the system

and components.

Maintenance Manuals shall comprise full descriptive and maintenance details on each and every item

of equipment supplied. Suppliers and spare parts references, contacts, telephone numbers, and

addresses shall be supplied where relevant. Wiring schedules shall show the connection of each item

of equipment to the field equipment. Datasheets and maintenance instructions shall be provided for

each item of equipment. Diagrams showing the configuration of all control and monitoring schemes,

identifying the modules used, their interconnections and setting parameters, copy printouts showing

the individual outstation module configurations and sequences.




All drawings relating to the BMCS will be supplied A3/A4 sizes bound into A4 ring binders. These

shall include system, outstation and user terminal configuration diagrams, listings and flow charts.

23.14.16 SITE/USER TRAINING

The BMCS specialist shall supply the following training for the clients engineering staff.

General engineering staff:(3 number of people).

On-site; specific system structure, outstations locations, control strategy overviews. Operation of

user terminals, adjustments, trend graphs and alarm handling. Other networked components.

23.14.17 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

The warranty period shall run for twelve months following hand-over, during which time the

following facilities shall be available to the client.

(a) Call-out within 24 hours and same day if before 10.00am

(b) Replacement and labour for defective parts.

(c) Fault diagnosis and rectification.

(d) Three support visits each of one full working day to advise operation, check system tuning

and generally ensure the plant is operating to specification.

(e) On line modem support for the warranty period.

The tenderer shall provide a quotation along with his bid for a full maintenance contract to

commence after warranty providing all the facilities as described above.

This maintenance contract shall be broken down covering the cost associated with comprehensive

maintenance for the following three years further to the warranty period.



23.15.00 NOISE AND VIBRATION

23.15.01 GENERAL

All systems, equipment, pipework and ductwork shall be selected, manufactured and installed for

quiet and vibration free operation in accordance with the requirements of this Specification and

within the noise and vibration criteria as specified for individual items of equipment, acoustic lining

and vibration isolation. Any mechanical plant noise and/or vibration which can be heard and/or felt

and which exceeds the specified room design criteria, shall be rectified with no variation to the

contract sum.

In general, the following principal precautions shall be taken to ensure that minimum noise and

vibration emanates from the plant installed under this contract.

. All rotating machinery shall be accurately balanced statically and dynamically.

. Centrifugal and reciprocating rotating equipment such as fans and pumps shall be mounted on

vibration absorbing mountings. Inertia bases shall be provided where specified or shown on

the drawings.

. All connections to rotating machinery, or assemblies containing machinery shall be rendered

flexible by anti vibration hangers supporting ducting and piping systems, flexible connections

between ductwork and fans and, only with approval, with flexible connections between pipes

and pumps.

. Adequate provision shall be made to take up vibration in bends and pipe runs, wherever

possible. Adequate provision shall be made to take up vibration in bends and pipe runs,

wherever possible.

. Acoustic seals shall be provided where all pipes, ducts and conduits penetrate plantrooms or

acoustic walls.

. All fans, pumps, and similar equipment shall have speeds not greater than specified.

. All duct interiors, air outlets, dampers and similar air distribution equipment shall be free from

raw edges of metal, sharp screw ends or pop rivets projecting into the air stream.

. All ductwork shall be provided with radius fittings, turning vanes, shoe takeoffs, etc to

minimise regenerated noise within the air systems.

. Fire dampers, where velocity exceeds 5m/s in the duct shall be of the curtain type and

mounted out of the air stream by providing transition as necessary to the entering and leaving

side of the damper.

. Balancing dampers shall be sized and located to allow systems to be balanced without creating

regenerated noise at the damper.

. Rotating equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced and installed on bases

designed to accommodate vibration isolators. Inertia bases shall be used where specified.

23.15.02 NOISE MEASUREMENTS

If noise from the plant is obviously excessive due to noisy bearings or scraping of rotating parts in

guards or housings or other similar malfunctions, then the equipment shall be repaired or replaced

without first carrying out noise measurements. Noise measurements shall only be required if

excessive noise is evident, as determined by the Engineer, in which case the noise measurement tests

shall be carried out by the Mechanical Trade. If such measurements show that noise from items of

equipment exceeds the sound power levels specified, or alternately if no sound level is specified and

NOISE AND VIBRATION



the noise exceeds the manufacturer's catalogue data, then the cost of noise measurements shall be the

Mechanical Trade’s responsibility, at no extra cost to the Contract.

If the noise measurement tests are carried out at the request of the Engineer and it is determined that

noise from items of equipment does not exceed the specified sound power levels or alternatively

does not exceed the manufacturer's catalogue rating then the cost of the noise measurements shall be

chargeable as an extra to the Contract.

Noise measurements shall be made at the completion of the installation and after the system has been

balanced. Noise measurements shall be made with a sound level meter and octave band filter set of

approved manufacture. The meter shall be calibrated prior to and after noise measurements.

Noise measurements shall be made no closer than 1 metre from any air outlet or intake or wall and at

a height of at least 1 metre from the floor.

23.15.03 NOISE RATING NUMBERS

The noise spectrum for a given environment shall be compared against the Noise Rating Curve so

that the noise can be evaluated throughout the audible range. The curve that lies on or slightly above

the plot of the noise in each octave band is considered to be the Noise Rating Number (N) associated

with the particular noise. A single figure number (N) can then be used to describe the noise in an

area around a given noise source.

Throughout this project a tolerance of 2 dB above the maximum Noise Rating Curve, in any two

octave bands, is proposed to be acceptable. Noise levels that are in excess of the specified maximum

curve and this tolerance will be considered unacceptable.

Where a noise level in any octave band exceeds the noise level in a neighbouring octave band by 5

dB, or more, a pure tone or discreet frequency will be considered to exist and the noise rating curve

will apply here with no tolerance.

23.15.04 INTERNAL NOISE LEVELS

Noise from mechanical plant inside the development should not exceed the levels given in the

performance criteria. Unless stated otherwise, the noise level criteria should not be exceeded with

the plant operating under normal operating conditions and at start-up for intermittently operating

plant items.

Noise from all plant during a fire emergency shall not exceed 80 dB(A) within fire isolated

passageways. Noise levels inside the fire control room shall not exceed 65 dB(a) during a fire

emergency.

23.15.05 EXTERNAL NOISE LEVELS

23.15.05.01 Property Boundaries

Noise levels emitted by the mechanical plant at all property boundaries and nearby buildings on

adjacent properties shall meet the requirements of:

1. The DHCC

2. Any other relevant Statutory Authority

23.15.06 PLANT NOISE LEVELS

NOISE AND VIBRATION



The Mechanical Trade shall ensure that systems are installed, adjusted and balanced so that

excessive noise is not created and the scheduled internal and external noise levels are complied with.

23.15.07 VIBRATION PRODUCED BY PLANT

All plant equipment shall be isolated from the building structure in such a manner that noise and

vibration is not transmitted through the structure.

Anti-vibration equipment will be manufactured by a specialist company acceptable to the Consultant,

and with standard ratings information available.

Anti-vibration equipment shall comply with Seismic code for zone 2A.

23.15.08 TESTING ON COMPLETION

Following installation, if requested, carry out noise and vibration level tests to confirm compliance.

The locations selected for measurement shall be nominated. Noise levels should be measured in the

worst affected part of the occupancy.

The sound level meters used for the noise tests shall be an authority certified Sound Level Meters -

Precision.

If the noise or vibration levels exceed those specified, carry out rectification work and remeasure

noise levels to demonstrate compliance with the specification. All testing and rectification work is at

the Mechanical Trade’s expense.

23.15.09 NOISE GENERATED BY THE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

Noise from the air distribution system should be minimised by:

1. Selecting grilles, diffusers, dampers and accessories to meet the specified noise levels.

2. Balancing the system using dampers on duct branches, with dampers at grilles being used for

minor adjustment of air volumes. Where excessive noise levels are due to noise generated at

dampers near grilles, the branch dampers should be re-adjusted to eliminate excessive

dampering and noise at the grilles.

3. Installing ductwork with a minimum number of bends, offsets, etc. Flexible ducts should not

be kinked or have excessive bends, particularly near grilles, etc. Ensure there are no

protrusions inside the duct that could generate noise. Unless indicated otherwise, install

turning vanes in tees and bends or use long radius bends to minimise turbulence.

4. Seal duct joints adequately so there is no noise resulting from air leakage.

23.15.10 STRUCTURE BORNE NOISE AND VIBRATION

The Mechanical Trade shall minimise the transmission of vibration to the building structure to

ensure the noise and vibration criteria are achieved by:

1. Statically and dynamically balancing rotating plant and equipment. Out of balance should not

exceed 0.03mm kg/kg of rotating element after installation. Where specified, provide

balancing test certificates.

2. Providing isolation mounts or hangers for vibrating plant and equipment.

3. Providing inertia blocks where indicated to limit the vibration amplitude.

NOISE AND VIBRATION



4. Isolating piping, electrical conduit, etc subject to vibration from the building structure.

5. Providing flexible connections where ducts and piping is connected to vibrating plant and

machinery.

6. Pipes running through risers not be supported on plasterboard riser walls.

Submit a schedule of isolation mounts indicating make, model, rated load and static deflection,

actual load and static deflection, unloaded height, fully loaded height.

23.15.11 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTS AND ISOLATORS

23.15.11.01 Selection of Equipment Isolation Mounts

The following requirements are minimum requirements and must be confirmed by the specialist

manufacturer’s representative as being adequate for the particular equipment proposed by the

Contractor.

Isolation mount type and minimum static deflection should be in accordance with the following table

(refer below for isolator types).

Plant Isolator Type Minimum Static

Deflection

In-line Centrifugal Fans and Small Axial

Fans (<450mm diameter)

M3/H1

10mm

Axial Fans >450mm diameter M4 25mm

Centrifugal Fans M4 25mm

Pumps M4 50mm

Chillers M4* 50mm

Air Conditioning Units <1500 l/s M3/H1 10mm

Air Conditioning Units >1500 l/s M4 25mm

* with an additional 10mm thick ribbed neoprene pad between the chiller leg and the isolator (99%

isolation)

23.15.11.02 Piping Isolation Mounts

Piping within 25m of the pumps, cooling towers or chillers shall be vibration isolated using type M4

or H2, 25mm static deflection isolators.

23.15.11.03 Isolation Mount Types

Type M1 - Waffle Pad Mounts

Waffle pad mounts shall be: minimum 17mm thick neoprene rubber (nitrile rubber where oil

contamination is possible); cross ribbed with alternately raised ribs on both faces of the pad; loaded

within the load range of the isolator with a minimum static deflection of 1.5mm.

Type M2 - Multiple Layer Waffle Pad Mounts

Multiple layer waffle pad mounts incorporating; specified number of layers of Type M1 Waffle Pad

Mount; 1.5mm thick metal shim plate between the pad layers; minimum of 1.5mm static deflection

per layer.

Type M3 - Neoprene Mounts

NOISE AND VIBRATION



Neoprene mounts should be selected to give the static deflections under load nominated for the item

of plant and incorporate: separate steel top and base plates completely embedded in elastomer;

elastomer colour coded for identification of load rating; non-skid mounting surfaces; bolt holes for

bolting down plant.

Type M4 - Spring/Neoprene Mounts

Spring/neoprene mounts should be selected to give the static deflections under load nominated for

the item of plant and: be laterally stable without any housing or other lateral support; be capable of

an additional travel to solid of at least 50% of the rated static deflection; incorporate a levelling

facility; a spring diameter not less than 0.8 of the loaded height; incorporate a 6mm thick neoprene

base pad to isolate acoustical frequencies. Isolators exposed to weather should have zinc plated

springs and housings coated with a flexible epoxy to prevent corrosion.

23.15.11.04 Isolation Hanger Types

Neoprene hanger elements should be selected to give the static deflections under load nominated for

the item of plant and incorporate: separate steel top and base plates completely embedded in

elastomer which should interlock in the event of fire or mechanical failure; elastomer colour coded

for identification of load rating; hole for locating hanger and a lip to locate the element within the

mounting hole.

Type H1 - Neoprene Hangers

Neoprene hanger elements should be selected to give the static deflections under the load nominated

for the item of plant and incorporate: Type HE1 - Heoprene Hanger Element located within a

galvanised steel cage with provision for threaded hanger rods to screw into the hanger element;

provide sufficient clearance around the threaded hanger rod to ensure it cannot touch the hanger

cage.

Type H2 - Spring/Neoprene Hangers

Spring/neoprene hangers should be selected to give the static deflections under load nominated for

the item of plant and: be laterally stable without any housing or other lateral support; be housed in a

galvanised steel cage; be capable of an additional travel to solid of at least 50% of the rated static

deflection; incorporate a levelling facility; a spring diameter not less than 0.8 of the loaded height;

incorporate a neoprene base pad to isolate acoustical frequencies. Isolators exposed to weather

should have zinc plated springs and housings coated with a flexible epoxy to prevent corrosion and

self-draining cups.

23.15.12 EQUIPMENT BASES

Mount equipment on rigid bases. The bases shall be sufficiently rigid not to deform under the

weight of the machinery or during operation and reduce the effectiveness of the isolation mounts.

23.15.13 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTS

The mounts shall be levelled once the equipment is fully loaded in its operating condition with a

minimum clearance between the machine and the structure of 20mm and adjusted to ensure that the

isolators are loaded correctly. Ensure that the isolators are not bridged by mounting bolts or contact

between any part of the machine or an un-isolated part of the isolation mounts and the structure.

The number and spacing of the mountings shall be selected to minimise machine rocking. Static and

dynamic forces during operation and start-up shall be considered when selecting the mounts.

Where there is a possibility of significant lateral loads occurring use hold down bolts, lateral

restraints, or housed mounts to locate equipment.

NOISE AND VIBRATION



23.15.14 PENETRATIONS

Duct, pipe and electrical penetrations through walls, floors etc shall not:

1. Decrease the required sound rating isolation rating of the wall, floor, ceiling, etc.

2. Allow the transmission of vibration from pipes and ducts to the wall, floor, etc.

Flexible ducts shall not be taken through full height walls. Where ducts pass through above ceiling

barriers or full height walls, the duct should be treated so as not to decrease the acoustic rating of the

partition.

Seal ducts and pipes penetrating slabs, walls and above ceiling baffles as per details shown on the

drawings.

23.15.15 SILENCERS - GENERAL

23.15.15.01 Silencers

Performance

Submit with the tender performance data based on laboratory testing detailing silencer insertion loss,

self generated noise, radiated noise, pressure drop and dimensions. Refer attached schedule for

minimum performance requirements.

Construction

General

Acoustic silencers shall be manufactured by an approved specialist manufacturer and shall comprise:

1. A minimum 1.6mm thick galvanised outer casing, stiffened as required to ensure that

deformation of the silencer does not occur during installation and operation.

2. Acoustically absorbent internal splitters constructed of perforated zincanneal steel sheet with

acoustically absorbent, heavy density mineral fibre infill. The ends of the splitters shall be

shaped to minimise air flow resistance and regenerated noise.

3. Heavy gauge flanges where the silencer is to be connected to ducting. Flanges shall be

corrosion protected with an approved finish.

Allow for duct transition sections before and after the silencers, if required. Select and install

silencers to ensure that air flow generated noise levels do not cause exceedences of the specified

levels. Where silencers are installed in risers, behind louvres, etc seal around the perimeter of the

silencer to the building opening with minimum 1.6mm thick sheet metal, fixed and caulked in a

similar manner to that indicated in the PB duct penetration detail.

Silencers for Kitchen Exhaust Ducts and Similar

Wherever possible, quiet running kitchen exhaust fans are to be selected for kitchen exhausts to

avoid the need for silencer treatment. Where required, silencers used in kitchen exhaust ducts or

other ducts carrying contaminated air shall have a 12um thick Melinex sheet between the splitter

perforated metal facings and the absorptive infill to prevent the ingress of grease, dirt, etc into the

infill material. Connect silencers to ductwork and maintain access so that the silencers are easily

removable for cleaning.

23.15.15.02 Silencers Exposed to Moisture

NOISE AND VIBRATION



Use hydrophobic grade rockwool absorbent lining faced with perforated zincanneal steel sheet in all

silencers and all internally insulated ductwork carrying moisture laden air or that are internally

exposed to the weather.



23.16.00 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

23.16.01.01 GENERAL

On completion of the installation, submit a programme to the Engineer, itemising the systems and

the proposed dates for conducting acceptance tests.

Start up, operate, test and adjust the systems in accordance with the agreed programme. The setting

up of major equipment shall be supervised by the manufacturer's representative, who shall remain on

site until the equipment is operating satisfactorily. Advise and co-ordinate with the manufacturer's

representatives so that all testing is carried out according to the agreed programme.

When the Mechanical Trade is satisfied that a system is operating satisfactorily, he shall test the

system and forward a copy of the recorded test results to the Engineer. Acceptance tests will be

witnessed by the Engineer when he considers the Mechanical Trade’s test results to be satisfactory.

The Mechanical Trade’s representative, who shall be qualified to commission the installation, shall

remain on site until the plant is operating to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Engineer will make two complete tests of all equipment if necessary. If the equipment fails the

second test and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Mechanical Trade has not made any serious

endeavour to correct the fault, all further tests will be charged at current A.C.E.A. Hourly Rates plus

expenses and such charges will be deducted from the Mechanical Trade’s price.

23.16.02 TESTING

23.16.02.01 General

The plant and its components shall be given the following tests and such other tests as the Engineer

considers necessary to bring the plant into running order. The Engineer shall be given reasonable

notice, generally not less than seven (7) days, regarding the nature of tests, the time and location.

Test requirements for each component shall be either as specified under the particular component's

clause or where not specified shall be in accordance with the requirements of the relevant BS Codes,

Statutory Regulations and the following.

All materials, instruments, power and labour necessary for the tests shall be provided and paid for by

the Mechanical Trade who shall ensure that mechanical trades experienced in balancing and

commissioning of mechanical services are employed, or alternatively, the services of a specialist

balancing company shall be engaged.

Acceptance tests of individual system components shall be undertaken by accredited representatives

of the particular component's manufacturer or supplier.

Acceptance tests, incorporating water circulating systems, must be undertaken with each system's

circulating supply water maintained at its specified operating temperature.

Acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and compliance with the drawings and

specifications and code requirements shall be certified.

Test instruments shall be checked for accuracy by a N.A.T.A. approved laboratory not more than one

(1) month prior to their anticipated use and copies of the calibration certificates showing the degree

of accuracy shall be supplied to the Engineer prior to acceptance testing.

Minimum requirements are as follows:

. Test all plant components and system operations to ensure that all specified requirements have

been achieved.

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING



. Balance all air and water circulating systems.

. Provide the Engineer with copies of these test and balance results prior to offering the plant

components and systems for acceptance testing.

The established air and water circulating system balance and test results for the compressor sets shall

be submitted to the Engineer on the standard test and/or balance data sheets for approval along with

the Commissioning Programme.

23.16.02.02 Medical Gases

Refer to Medical Gases section within this document for testing requirements.

23.16.02.03 Control, Instrumentation, Gauges

The operation, correct settings, sequences and interlocks of all controls shall be demonstrated.

Recalibration and modification of controls shall be carried out as necessary up to expiry of Defects

Liability Period to maintain manufacturer's specified tolerances.

The operation of all DDC and BMCS hardware and software shall be demonstrated.

Hand instruments shall be provided as necessary to check and log readings for which permanent

gauges and instruments may not have been installed.

. speed of all pumps, motors, fans etc

. overload settings of motors and voltage tests

. air pressure drops through all coils, air filters, silencers, louvres etc.

. ambient and internal dry and wet bulb temperatures

. temperatures and water flow rates of all coils, chillers, boilers, etc.

23.16.03 WITNESSING OF ACCEPTANCE TESTING BY THE ENGINEER

The Engineer shall be given 7 days notice of all acceptance tests and as a minimum requirement,

arrangements shall be made for the Proprietors Representative to witness the following tests:

. Air balance results

. Refrigerant compressor site tests

. Fire safety systems' tests

. Pipework pressure tests

. DDC and BMCS tests

. Air conditioning system capacity tests.

. Air conditioning operation tests

The Mechanical Trade shall submit his proposed Testing Procedure to the Engineer for approval not

less than seven (7) days prior to the anticipated commencing date of the test.

23.16.03.01 MSSs and Control Panels

The operation of all indicating and recording instruments and associated equipment (relays,

indicating lights with associated flashers) to be provided under all working conditions. Resistance

measurements on all motors and starters shall be recorded.

23.16.04 COMMISSIONING

Prerequisites for achieving "Practical Completion" shall include the acceptance by the Engineer that

the following commissioning activities have been satisfactorily completed.




(i) Establishment of the settings and operation of all automatic controls and ancillary

devices, safety interlocks and the like.

(ii) Air balancing of all air handling systems.

All air handling system components shall be cleaned to remove all dust and foreign matter prior to

energising the fans.

The balancing method proposed shall ensure that the manually adjustable volume control (balance)

dampers installed in the ductwork are used to establish the primary balance. Each air outlet's integral

damper shall only be used to "trim" the terminal air flow rate.

Supply air outlets shall be adjusted to provide an air distribution pattern to accommodate the

maximum cooling demand load.

The air quantities shall be balanced to within plus ten percent (10%) minus zero percent (0%) of

those specified.

For purposes of establishing the air balance:

(a) all air handling systems must be operating concurrently;

(b) the building is clean and sealed with all partitions and ceilings in place;

(c) all components of the air handling systems are installed, e.g. air registers, grilles;

(d) the resistance across filter banks, where installed, shall be simulated to provide the means of

the initial and final resistance of the filter bank.

(iii) Water balancing of all water circulation systems:

Each system shall be sequentially:

(a) pressure tested;

(b) drained to ensure the complete removal of all foreign matter;

(c) chemically cleaned and drained. The services of a reputable water treatment company shall be

engaged to undertake this treatment.

(d) vented to remove all non condensibles.

Each system shall be balanced with the circulating supply water maintained at its specified operating

temperature.

All pressure and flow actuated controls, relief devices, bleeds, vents and drains shall be checked and

proven to operate.

All water flow rates shall be adjusted to within plus ten percent (10%), minus zero percent (0%), of

the specified flow rates at the peak design condition for the valve.

(iv) Acceptance testing of all plant components and systems.

All acceptance testing shall be undertaken in accordance with the requirements specified under the

Clause 'Testing' herein. Acceptance tests on any one (1) system shall be subject to the satisfactory

completion of all work associated with items (i), (ii) and (iii). Acceptance tests on any one (1)

operating system shall be undertaken with all specified systems operating concurrently.

The Mechanical Trade is responsible to provide the Consulting Engineer the copies of all data

recorded during testing and commissioning of the installations with all necessary inspection




certificates from local Authorities, pressure test certificates and performance curves or tables for the

following items:

. all chillers

. all fans, pumps, air filters, heaters

. all air conditioning units

. medical gases systems

. other specific equipment as required

(v) Plant/System Operation

On completion of all acceptance testing, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all specified systems

shall be run continuously for a minimum period of 12 hours. Any faults detected during this period

shall be immediately rectified and the specified running period recommenced.

23.16.05 POST COMMISSIONING OPERATION

On occupation of the premises the Proprietor shall operate all systems and the Mechanical Trade

shall make available the services of experienced technicians for the training and guidance of the

Proprietor.

Recordings shall be taken of temperatures and room indicators and controls adjusted.

23.16.05.01 Capacity Tests

If the installation is completed at a time when the ambient or such like conditions preclude the

completion of capacity tests, the work may be deemed "practically complete" subject to the approval

by the Engineer.

The outstanding capacity tests shall be undertaken, during the Defects Liability Period at a time

selected by the Engineer when the plant is and has been in unserviced operation for more than seven

(7) days.

The air conditioning system/s shall be tested on a day when the wet bulb temperature is equal to or

greater than the specified design wet bulb temperature or when, subject to the Engineer's approval,

the ambient wet bulb temperature approaches the design wet bulb temperature sufficiently close to

allow the tests to be undertaken.

Outside air and return air dampers shall be adjusted to give the specified entering wet bulb

temperature whilst maintaining the design air quantity.

Recording instruments shall be provided by the Mechanical Trade during the Defects Liability

Period, for a period of two (2) weeks during both summer and winter to ensure the plant is

maintaining specified conditions. Records and logs of performance shall be presented in triplicate to

the Engineer.

23.16.05.02 Final Checks

Prior to the issue of the 'Final Certificate' verify the performance of all safety and control functions

of each system by way of a certified report from the respective Manufacturers, Contractors or

Suppliers. Such checks shall be undertaken not earlier than one (1) month before the scheduled

expiry date of the Defects Liability Period.



23.17.00 WARRANTY AND SERVICE

23.17.01 GENERAL

The Mechanical Trade shall commence a comprehensive preventative maintenance programme at the

time of handing-over the installation.

At hand-over the Mechanical Trade shall instruct person/s nominated by the Proprietor of the correct

operation of the plant. One week’s notice shall be given to the engineer of intention to start-up.

Instructions shall continue until a Certificate of Practical Completion is issued.

23.17.02 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

(1) During the Defects Liability Period, the Proprietor will operate all building services, plant and

equipment and may take an active part in the maintenance of equipment, even though under

the control and direction of the Mechanical Trade. The Mechanical Trade shall maintain a

maintenance log throughout the Defects Liability Period.

(2) All scheduled, preventative and statutory maintenance work shall be carried out by the

Mechanical Trade during this period in accordance with the recommendations of the

Manufacturers, Code requirements and as detailed in the operation and maintenance manuals.

The Mechanical Trade shall send experienced and qualified technicians to site at periods

covered in the routine maintenance schedule or as required for testing. They shall carry out all

service, routine adjustments, replacements, cleaning and lubrication needed to keep the whole

installation operating in a first class condition. They shall report to the Proprietor or his

nominated representative on arrival, receive any instructions about the work and issue a

written report on their activity and the condition of the installation both to the Proprietor and

the Engineers within five days.

(3) The Mechanical Trade shall maintain the installation and make good any defect in

workmanship or materials during the Defects Liability Period. The Mechanical Trade shall

also be prepared to send a suitable technician to site at one hour's notice throughout the

Defects Liability Period to meet any emergency calls for service at any time. The Mechanical

Trade shall work continuously during all hours of any day as required to effect the fastest

possible restoration of normal system operation in the event of breakdown.

(4) The Mechanical Trade shall supply complete lists of spare parts normally held in

Manufacturer's stocks with sufficient details to permit accurate ordering by telephone. The

Mechanical Trade shall also supply additional spare parts if specified and shall deliver them

into store on site, properly packed and preserved.

The Mechanical Trade shall supply at the time of commissioning all special tools and

equipment which may be required for routine operation, maintenance adjustment or cleaning

of the installation as recommended by the equipment manufacturers.

No work or operation shall be carried out by the Mechanical Trade at any time in the building

after hand-over without the full knowledge and prior approval of the Proprietor.

23.17.03 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

The Mechanical Trade shall supply two (2) hard copy and soft copies on CD in both PDF and

Microsoft Word formats of the Operating and Maintenance Instructions. Hard copies shall be bound

in a blue vinyl hard back folder with stamped lettering on its cover and spine. The instructions shall

be in the form of a manual. A draft manual shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer prior to

Practical Completion. No plant will be deemed practically complete until the manuals have been

approved.

WARRANTY AND SERVICE



The format and content of each manual shall, as a minimum, comply with the following

requirements:

Section A - Index

Shall comprehensively list all elements and sub-elements of the subject matter.

Section B - Introduction and General Description

Shall comprehensively describe:

. the scope of work executed.

. the function and composition of each system.

Section C - Description of Operations


. the correct method of operating all manually controlled items of plant for all specified modes

of operation, including start-up, shutdown and emergency procedures.

. the operation of all automatic control systems.

Section D - Maintenance Instructions


. all procedures necessary to undertake the preventative and corrective maintenance of all items

of plant installed under the Contract.

. details of proposed water treatment, plant inspection and cleaning of plant items, including

relevant schedules.

The maintenance procedures shall be based on manufacturers recommendations.

The minimum frequency of these procedures will be twelve per annum, one of which will be

procedures prescribed for "annual" inspections.

Section E - Schedule of Installed Equipment and Equipment Suppliers

Shall comprehensively list details of all items of equipment installed and the equipment suppliers

and/or agents. Such details shall include the original purchase order and/or invoice number of each

component having a manufacturer's warranty extending beyond the expiry of the Defects Liability

Period.

Section F - Manufacturer's Literature

Original copies only of all relevant literature shall be supplied to the Engineer. Characteristic

performance curves of pressure against flow rate for fans, pumps, valves and the like shall each have

the appropriate system operating point indicated thereon.

Section G - Commissioning and Capacity Test Results

Shall include the following information, such information having been accepted and approved by the

Engineer:

. commissioning and capacity test results;

. factory test data results;




. medical gases validation results;

. air and/or water balance results;

. calculations verifying achievement of the specified performance requirements;

. schedules of control set points and balancing valve settings.

Where capacity tests have not been undertaken at the time of 'Practical Completion', provision shall

be allowed in each manual to include these results after the tests have been completed during the

Defects Liability Period, together with a set of the "Work as Executed" drawings.

Each of the above sections shall be provided with a title page which shall incorporate a robust thumb

index tab to facilitate easy accessing.

All information in the manuals shall be clearly set out on A4 standard size pages, which shall be

loose leaf bound into robust covers, so as to permit easy reading of any page. The covers and each

page shall be sealed within a laminate of durable clear plastic to the approval of the Engineer.

The final "marked up" proof copy of the draft manual shall be returned to the Engineer with the final

copies.

23.17.04 AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS

The Mechanical Trade shall provide "as installed drawings" prepared to comply with current British

Standard in the following formats and numbers:

. 2 sets included within the maintenance manuals.

. 1 off CD with drawings in DWG and PDF formats.

They shall show:

. Plan layout of all floors.

. Plan layout and sections of all plants and machinery.

. Piping layout.

. Power wiring and control diagrams.

. Details of construction of all custom made components not covered by manufacturer's

instructions.

. System diagrams, including schematic controls and piping circuits.

. Framed schematic drawings of air and water systems mounted in plantroom.

23.17.05 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The Mechanical Trade shall provide all materials, labour, tools and services necessary to service the

plant during the Defects Liability Period.

Servicing provided shall comply with recommendations of the approved operating instructions and

shall include regular oiling and/or greasing of all fans, electric driving motors and all other

machinery in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The servicing shall also include

regular cleaning of all filtering elements and electrical switchgear in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.

The Mechanical Trade shall check and adjust the following:




23.17.05.01 All Plant

Monthly

. Contact Building Manager for air conditioning problems and check plant log book and service

reports.

. Visually inspect all plant and report any malfunctions and faults to the Building Manager.

. Obtain approval for any additional work deemed necessary to ensure the continuity of

operation of the plant.

Note: This work shall not include work which can reasonably be done as part of the next

two monthly service.

. This inspection should normally not take more than 30 minutes.

23.17.05.02 Air Handling Units

Six Monthly

. Check panels, doors and fastenings for security, repairs, leaks.

. Remove rubbish from Conditioner housing.

. Ensure insulation is secure and repair as necessary.

. Resecure insulation with fixing equal to or better than original.

. Replace defective internal lights.

. Inspect drain trays for leaks and clear drains. All drains must drain and cleaning when the fan

is off. Scrub trays with a broom and disinfect with Sodium Hypochlorite (around 15% active

ingredients by volume) or laundry bleach. Personnel handling Sodium Hypochlorite should

wear protective clothing including an approved type of face mask.

. Inspect casing for corrosion and water or air leaks and carry out necessary remedial work.

. Inspect flexible connections and repair as necessary.

. Check for leaks on coils and piping connections and repair as necessary.

. Lubricate damper hinges and check linkages are secure.

Note: Incorrectly adjusted or creased dampers and insecure linkages are a frequent cause of

the inability for air conditioning plant to provide room conditions or perform satisfactorily.

Annually

. Vent water coils.

. Inspect coils for dirt build up.

. Inspect coil fins for damage and comb if necessary.

. Externally clean coils with soft brush or air jet. Do not use hot water or steam on refrigerant

coils.

. Report on condition of equipment.




23.17.05.03 Vibration Isolators

Annually

. Inspect vibration isolators and replace if damaged.

. Check isolators for incorrect settings on jacking bolts and re-adjust if necessary.

. Check that isolators are not short-circuited by electrical conduits, guards, debris etc.

. Ensure mounts are clear of oil or water.

23.17.05.04 Fans (Supply, Return and Exhaust)

Two Monthly

. Check fan operates.

. Check fan for vibration, bearing noise or overheating.

. Adjust belt tension as necessary. Check for wear and replace if necessary.

. Inspect and repair flexible duct connections.

. Check belt guard firmly in place.

Six Monthly

. Lightly lubricate bearings to Manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure that the same Make

and Type of lubricant are used on each occasion.

. Lightly lubricate any vane controls or dampers.

. Check couplings for tightness.

. Check anti-vibration mounts are securely fixed and operating correctly.

Annually

. Check impeller and drive pulleys are tight on shaft. Tighten if necessary.

. Check pulley alignment. Re-align to Manufacturer's tolerances.

. Remove corrosion and repair paintwork and lightly grease bright steel.

. Check couplings for alignment.

. Measure and record fan output.

. If accessible, clean fan blades.

. Check access panels for air leaks. Replace seals if leaking.

23.17.05.05 Pumps

Two Monthly

. Check pump and motor for vibration and bearings for noise or overheating.

. Change duty pumps (if applicable).




. Inspect pump gland and adjust if necessary. Packed glands to drip slowly, rather than run dry.

Ensure that spray from pump shafts does not escape from well or enclosure. It may be

necessary to manufacture an additional sheetmetal guard.

. Check gland well drain is clear.

Six Monthly

. Operate pump suction and discharge valves.

. If pressure gauge fitted, check operating pressures to ensure strainer is clean. Checking shut

off head and comparing this with normal pressure will indicate degree of strainer fouling.

. Check guards are securely in place.

. Visually check pump coupling. When checking coupling note if it is shredding rubber or

other damage has occurred. Repair as required.

. Vent pump if valve fitted.

. With pump running lightly lubricate bearings of pump and motor.

. Lightly grease bright steel shaft.

. Generally clean pump and motor assembly.

Annually

. Clean pump strainer.

. Check coupling bushes for wear. If worn replace bushes and check pump motor alignment.

. Inspect exposed surfaces for corrosion, repair paintwork as necessary.

. If required, replace packing or mechanical seal using recommended packing or seals.

Note: Re-assemble insulation after any work requiring its removal.

23.17.05.06 Air Handling Units, Filters, Fans, Electrical Switchboards, Refrigeration

Pipework (Split Systems Only), Vibration Isolators, Controls, Condensers

Six Monthly

. Check refrigerant charge through sight glass where fitted.

Annually

. Fit set of gauges to refrigeration circuit. Record readings.

. Check and adjust refrigerant charge. Record readings.

. Clean air cooled condenser coils, examine for damaged fins. Comb as necessary.

. Check loading of compressor. (This may have to be done during summer).

. Clean fan side of evaporator coil.

. Check casing for corrosion. Clean, dry and make good any paintwork.




. Check for broken frame supports. Repair as necessary.

. Check power wiring on contactors, overloads, terminal block and at compressor motor

terminal.

. Compressor contactor contacts should be checked for wear.

23.17.05.07 Refrigeration Pipework

See "Insulation"

23.17.05.08 Controls

Two Monthly

. Note the type of control system in operation and refer to Control Manufacturer's data for any

specific setting alterations and/or adjustments.

. Measure and record conditioned space wet and dry bulb temperatures.

. Measure and record wet and dry bulb temperatures for supply, return and outside air.

. Adjust thermostat only after authority has been given. Give controls time to settle down after

adjustment has been carried out. When setting and/or calibrating, work in conjunction with

the Refrigeration system to ensure that required settings and differentials are obtained. Do not

adjust or move control settings to start and/or stop the cooling cycle.

. Check and adjust time setting of programme on time clocks.

Annually

. Check operation and settings of controls.

. Check thermostat positions are not affected by local heaters, store equipment or supply air

diffusers. Advise if irregularities found.

. Liaise with fire protection Maintenance Contractor (if necessary) to test the mode of operation

of the mechanical services in the event of a fire.

. Check temperature (and humidity if controls exist) in each Zone or sub-zone. Check

calibration and operation of sensors, thermostats, humidity sensors and pressure controllers.

. Check modulating motor mountings and secure if necessary.

. Check linkages for tightness and restroke if loose.

. Clean and lubricate spindle linkages and ensure pivots are free.

. Check that dampers and louvres are free, stroked correctly and shut tightly. Adjust or

lubricate if not correct especially minimum fresh air.

. Minimum fresh air levels of a maximum of 10% of total fan capacity is to be achieved through

fixed fresh air dampers and not through stroking of dampers.

23.17.05.09 Electrical Switchboards, Electrical Wiring

Two Monthly

. Check for any sign of burnt, hot connections and burnt contacts on starters and relays. Clean,

tighten and rectify.




. Replace any faulty indicator lights.

. Examine general condition of conduits, connectors, switches and wiring, especially in the

damp and outdoor areas.

. Check time clocks are in correct adjustment.

Annually

. Inspect, clean or replace, if necessary, contacts or faulty relays.

. Check overload rating against motor nameplate rating, notify any discrepancies.

. Check connections (a) motors, (b) switchboards, (c) or equipment/contactors subject to

variation. Tighten or rectify as necessary.

. Examine external switches etc. for damage to seals and replace if necessary.

. Check time delays by operating plant and observing delays.

. Check all fuses for correct rating and ensure that spare fuses for all sizes are available in or

near the switchboard.

. Replace any labels that have fallen off or been removed.

. Check and rectify, where necessary, any damaged cable or bus bar insulation. Obtain

additional approval for repairs expected to take more than ½ hour.

. Vacuum clean switchboard interiors.

. Check conduits securely fixed.

. Examine and rectify panel and floor seals. Rectify and locking deficiencies. Seals may need

to be replaced at next service if material is to be ordered.

. Report where wiring diagram considered to be incorrect. Also report where no diagram

exists.

23.17.05.10 Plantrooms

. Check that fresh air intakes are not blocked by stores equipment. Report any storage of stores

material in the plantroom to the Regional Building and Maintenance Manager. Check that

Cleaners equipment or similar smelling products are not stored in plantrooms which are used

as fresh air plenums.

Annually

. Advise of any building repair work necessary.

23.17.05.11 Water Treatment

Carried out by nominated Water Treatment Contractor.

23.17.05.12 Corrosion Protection

All water systems are to be treated with chemicals to control organic fouling, suspended solids, scale

formation, corrosion and PH level. The chemicals shall be dosed on a continuous basis for

condenser water systems and slug dosed for hot and chilled water system. The chemicals used in the

condenser water system shall be suitable for discharge into the sewer system. The chemical




treatment contractor shall contact the local sewerage authority to seek their approval for the

chemicals to be discharged into the sewer. A copy of this approval shall be filed in the Store

Maintenance Procedure Manual. Chromate chemicals are generally unacceptable to sewerage

authorities.



23.18.00 SCHEDULES OF PERFORMANCE

23.18.01 GENERAL

The performance schedules of equipment has been prepared as a guide for tendering purposes and

generally represent minimum acceptable values.

Fan static pressures and pump-heads have been estimated on the basis of the indicated layout and

average losses through typical equipment. These shall be verified for the tendered equipment with

the Sub-Contractor offering all equipment selections to suit his actual calculated conditions.

Insertion losses indicated for silencers are also minimum indicative values, intended for tendering

purposes only. The successful tenderer shall calculate the final insertion losses on the various

systems, based on equipment selection and final duct layout.

When selecting fan coil units, the air quantities and temperatures may be revised to suit the

manufacturers equipment rating, however, these shall not effect the statutory requirements and

system performance.

23.18.02 Chillers - Air Cooled

23.18.03 Circulating Water Pumps

23.18.04 Air Handling Units (Including Heat Recovery)

23.18.05 Air Handling Units (Including Heat Recovery) Fan Schedule

23.18.06 Air Handling Units (Without Heat Recovery)

23.18.07 Chilled Water Fan Coil Units (FCU’s)

23.18.08 Computer Room – Chilled Water

23.18.09 Fans

23.18.10 Medical Air/Surgical Air Compressor Schedule

23.18.11 Medical Vacuum Pump

23.18.12 Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging System

23.18.13 Electric Duct Heaters

23.18.14 Plate Heat Exchangers (Water to Water)

23.18.15 Motor Control Centres

SCHEDULES OF PERFORMANCE



23.18.02 CHILLERS – AIR COOLED

GENERAL EVAPORATOR COMPRESSOR EL. DATA

Chiller

Tag Refrigerant

Chiller

Output

Minimum

Rundown

Load

Chilled

Water

IN / OUT

Chilled

Water

Flow

Fouling

Factor

Maximum

Water

PD

Maximu

m

Working

Pressure

Ambient

Temp.

Compr.

Type

Starter

Type

Total

Chiller

kW

Elect.

Requirement

Selected

Chiller

Model

Rev

(-) (-) (kWR) (%) (C) (l/s) (m2C/kW) (kPa) (kPa) (‘C) (-) (-) (kW) ph/V/Hz (-) (-)

CH-B/5-1 R134a 617 12.5 14.5/5.5 16.4 0.01800 25 40 50 Screw VSD 297.6 3/400/50 YCAV0819EA50 01

NOTES: 1. Cooling capacity must be infinitely variable by means of capacity slide controlled by chiller’s microprocessor system

2. Flow switch must be supplied by chiller’s manufacturer.

3. Single point supply for each chiller.




23.18.03 CIRCULATING WATER PUMPS

GENERAL PUMP DATA MOTOR DATA

Ref. Pump Location Design

Flow

Estimated Head

(Note 1)

Pump Type

(Note 6)

Min Pump

Efficiency

Max.

Pump Speed

Impeller

Dia. (Note 2)

Min

Motor Power

Motor

Drive

Motor Protection

(Note 4)

Motor

Efficiency Rev.

(-) (-) (l/s) (kPa) (-) (Note 3 (rpm) (mm) (kW) (vsd/dol) (IP…) (ST or HI)

HRP-A/5-1 Building A-Level 5 2.0 100 C Note 3 1450 Note 2 0.75 DOL IP 56 ST 01

SCHWP-B/B1-1 Basement B1 28 400 A Note 3 1450 Note 2 30 VSD IP 56 ST 01



PCHWP-B/5-1 Building B – Level 5 16.4 350 A Note 3 1450 Note 2 7.5 VSD IP 56 ST 01

PCHWP-B/5-2 Building B – Level 5 16.4 350 A Note 3 1450 Note 2 7.5 VSD IP 56 ST 01

HRP-B/5-1 Building B-Level 5 0.26 80 C Note 3 1450 Note 2 0.25 DOL IP 56 ST 01






NOTES:

1. Pump heads are estimated for tender purposes only. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the actual system head and selection of an appropriately rated pump.

2. Pump selection shall have mid range impeller selection or at least one impeller change without the need for motor change

3. Pump efficiency should be as close as possible to the pump best efficiency and should not deviate more than 5% from the pump best efficiency.

4. Motor protection: IP55 - indoor installations. IP56 - outdoor installation.

5. Motor efficiency: standard (ST) or high (HI) efficiency motors to AS/NZS1359.5:2000 (test method B) Only motors above 15.0 kW should be high efficiency motors.

6. Pump Type: A - centrifugal, split casing, back pullout design

B - centrifugal, double suction pump

C- in line pump




23.18.04 AIR HANDLING UNITS (INCLUDING HEAT RECOVERY)

Heating coil (COIL 1) Cooling coil (COIL 2) Cooling coil (COIL 3)

AHU Reference Air

Flow

Air

ON

Coil

Air

OFF

Coil

Capacity

Tot/Sens

W.F. Max WPD

Max APD

Air Flow

Air

ON

Coil

Air

OFF

Coil

Capacity

Tot/Sens

W.F. Max WPD

Max APD

Air

ON

Coil

Air

OFF

Coil

Capacity

Tot/Sens

W.F. Max WPD

Max APD

Rev

(-) (l/s) ‘(C) ‘(C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (Pa) (l/s) ‘(C) ‘(C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (Pa) ‘(C) ‘(C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (Pa)

AHU-A/5-1 5500 26 41 100 2.0 30 30 7500 46.1/29 35/26.3 100/100 2.0 40 100 35/26.3 14.0/13.9 386/189 10.3 40 100 01

AHU-B/5-1 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01

AHU-B/5-2 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01

AHU-B/5-3 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01

AHU-B/5-4 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01

AHU-B/5-5 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01

AHU-B/5-6 6000 26 39.5 96 2.0 30 30 7000 46.1/29 35/26.3 96/96 2.0 40 100 35/26.3 14.0/13.9 360/176 9.6 40 100 01




23.18.05 AIR HANDLING UNITS (INCLUDING HEAT RECOVERY) FAN SCHEDULE

FAN MOTOR

AHU

Reference Fan

Type

Air

Flow

Est.

Tot

Static

Max

Fan

Speed

Imp.

Dia

Motor

Rating

Motor

Class

Starting

Method

(-) (-) (l/s) (Pa) (RPM) (mm) (ph / kW)) (-) (vsd / dol)

AHU-A/5-1 BC 7500 750 960 - 3/15 F VSD

AHU-B/5-1 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD

AHU-B/5-2 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD

AHU-B/5-3 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD

AHU-B/5-4 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD

AHU-B/5-5 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD

AHU-B/5-6 BC 7000 750 960 - 3/11 F VSD

Notes: 1. Fan type: BC – backward curved

FC – forward curved 2. System static is an estimated value only and excludes AHU pressure drops but includes unit mounted bag filter.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the actual system resistance and selection of an appropriately rated fan.




23.18.06 AIR HANDLING UNITS (WITHOUT HEAT RECOVERY)

GENERAL DATA COOLING COIL FAN MOTOR

AHU Reference Area

Served

AHU

Location

Air

Flow

Outside

Air

“ON” Coil

Temp.

(DB)

“ON” Coil

Temp.

(WB)

Capacity

Tot/Sens W.F.

Max

WPD

Max

APD

Fan

Type

Est.

Tot

Static

Max

Fan

Speed

Imp.

Dia

Motor

Rating

Motor

Class

Starting

Method

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (l/s) (l/s) ‘(C) ‘(C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (Pa) (-) (Pa) (RPM) (mm) (ph / kW)) (-) (vsd / dol) (-)

AHU-A/G-11/0 Dining Ceiling 3100 500 27 19.8 85/53 2.3 15 120 Cent. 450 960 800 3/5.5 F DOL 01

AHU-A/G-22/0 Waiting Ceiling 3100 500 23 17 56/38 1.5 15 120 Cent. 400 960 800 3/5.5 F DOL 01

AHU-A/G-38 Lounge Ceiling 1800 200 23 17 33/22 0.9 15 120 Cent. 400 960 600 3/4.0 F DOL 01

AHU-A/G-60/0 Kitchen Ceiling 1850 1850 46 29 116/64 3.1 20 120 Cent. 550 960 600 3/4.0 F DOL 01

AHU-B/2-31/0 Packing, Wash & Sort Ceiling 1350 400 23 17 25/17 0.7 15 120 Cent. 600 960 500 3/4.0 F DOL 01




23.18.07 CHILLED WATER FAN COIL UNITS (FCU’S)

GENERAL DATA COOLING COIL ELECTR. DATA

FCU

Tag Area

Served

FCU

Location

FCU

Supply Air Qty.

Minimum

Outside Air Qty.

“ON”

Coil Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled

Water Flow

Maximum

Water PD

Electrical

Require.

Motor

Size

Operating

Hours

Run in

Emergency

Mode

Selected

FCU

Model / Size

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (l/s) (l/s) (C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (1/3) ph (kW) (10/24)h (y/n) (-) (-)

FCU-A/B2-08 Body Hold Body Hold 600 0 23/18 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/B2-08 EHS Pharmacy Store EHS Pharmacy 600 0 23/18 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/B1-1 Energy Transfer Station ETS Room 2000 50 32/26 28.3/24 0.75 10 3ph 1.5 N 39TDH-18 01

FCU-B/B1-2 BMS Room BMS Room 600 0 23/18 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/G-13/0 Office Corridor - Ceiling 750 80 22.1/17.7 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/G-34 Main LV Switch Corridor - Ceiling 550 0 23/18 12.1/10.2 0.32 5.5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/G-03 Comm’s Room Airlock - Ceiling 600 0 23/18 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-09/0 Waiting & Corridor Store - Ceiling 800 115 21.9/17.5 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-17.1 DIC Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 20.7/17.6 0.55 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-17.2 DIC Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 20.7/17.6 0.55 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-25/0 Clerks, Linen & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 800 60 22.4/17.8 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-34/0 Manifold Rooms Gas Manifold 600 0 23/18 14.7/12.5 0.39 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-37/0 Renal Dialysis Fluid Store - Ceiling 600 70 22.1/17.6 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-38/0 Renal Dialysis Lounge - Ceiling 500 70 21.9/17.6 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/G-39/0 Renal Dialysis Fluid Store - Ceiling 500 70 21.9/17.6 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/G-42/0 CAPD & East Offices Corridor - Ceiling 700 90 22/17.6 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-03 Comm’s Room Airlock - Ceiling 600 0 23/18 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-09/0 Waiting & Corridor Store - Ceiling 800 115 21.9/17.5 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

GENERAL NOTES: 3. Unit airflow and capacity based on “low” speed fan.

1. Cooling coil flow based on 5.5/14.5C chilled water temperature IN/OUT 4. 1ph = 200V/50Hz, 3ph = 400V/50Hz

2. Unit selection (model and size) based on a “CARRIER” catalogue.




23.18.07 CHILLED WATER FAN COIL UNITS (FCU’s) Cont.


FCU

Tag Area

Served

FCU

Location

FCU

Supply Air Qty.

Minimum

Outside Air Qty.

“ON”

Coil Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled

Water Flow

Maximum

Water PD

Electrical

Require.

Motor

Size

Operating Hours

Run in Emergency

Mode

Selected FCU

Model / Size

Rev


FCU-B/G-47/0 Consult & Office Waiting - Ceiling 810 100 22/17.6 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-54.1 Pharmacy Pharmacy - Ceiling 750 50 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-54.2 Pharmacy Pharmacy - Ceiling 750 50 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-56 Pharmacy Out Patient - Ceiling 750 50 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-59/0 Workshop & Store Store - Ceiling 800 60 22.4/17.8 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-72/0 NUM & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 800 45 22.6/17.8 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/G-75 Lobby & Airlock Corridor - Ceiling 680 150 21.2/17.3 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/1-01 Lobby Ceiling 525 210 19.8/16.7 8.3/7 0.22 5.3 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/1-06.1 Link Bridge Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01


FCU-A/1-07/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 550 100 21.5/17.4 8.3/7 0.22 5.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/1-08/0 Offices Ceiling 160 60 20/16.8 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/1-13/0 General Area Ceiling 185 40 21.3/17.3 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/1-17/0 Waiting A /Support EMG Ceiling 320 100 20.5/17 5.3/4.5 0.14 4.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/1-24/0 Waiting B/Nurse Bases Ceiling 600 220 20.1/16.8 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/1-28/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 700 110 21.7/17.5 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/1-30/0 Offices Ceiling 465 160 20.2/16.9 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.7 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/1-37/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 300 40 21.9/17.6 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/1-39/0 Offices Ceiling 180 40 21.2/17.3 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


FCU-A/1-42/0 Nurse Base/Sub Wait Ceiling 180 130 17.2/15.7 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01









FCU

Tag Area

Served

FCU

Location

FCU

Supply Air Qty.

Minimum

Outside Air Qty.

“ON”

Coil Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled

Water Flow

Maximum

Water PD

Electrical

Require.

Motor

Size

Operating

Hours

Run in

Emergency

Mode

Selected

FCU

Model / Size

Rev


FCU-A/1-43/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 610 100 21.7/17.5 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/1-53 Laser Ceiling 125 40 20.4/17 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/1-62/0 Gym Ceiling 360 50 21.9/17.6 5.7/4.8 0.15 4.9 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/1-64/0 Physio Therapy Offices Ceiling 165 40 21.1/17.2 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


FCU-A/1-74 Clinic Support Meeting Rm Ceiling 180 120 17.7/15.9 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/1-80 Laboratory Ceiling 110 20 21.5/17.4 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


FCU-A/1-96 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 160 20 22/17.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


FCU-B/1-1/0 Lobby Lobby - Ceiling 700 60 22.3/17.7 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-03 Comm’s Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-6.1 Bridge Lobby - Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-6.2 Bridge Lobby - Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-9/0 Gamma Camera & Lab Corridor - Ceiling 700 45 22.5/17.8 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-26/0 Admin & Corridor Waiting - Ceiling 750 60 22.4/17.7 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-30 Head of Dept. Corridor - Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-36/0 Radiographers Corridor - Ceiling 600 45 22.4/17.8 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-37/0 PACS & Processing Room Corridor - Ceiling 300 45 21.8/17.5 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-B/1-39 Video Fluoroscopy Corridor - Ceiling 720 45 22.5/17.8 11.7/9.9 0.31 4.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-43 Brachy. Therapy Corridor - Ceiling 300 30 22.2/17.7 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01









FCU

Tag Area

Served

FCU

Location

FCU

Supply Air Qty.

Minimum

Outside Air Qty.

“ON”

Coil Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled

Water Flow

Maximum

Water PD

Electrical

Require.

Motor

Size

Operating

Hours

Run in

Emergency

Mode

Selected

FCU

Model / Size

Rev


FCU-B/1-44/0 CT Control Room CT Ceiling 750 45 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-45.1 CT/Ang CT - Ceiling 750 45 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-45.2 CT/Ang CT – Ceiling 750 45 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-52/0 Ultrasound 2 Service Lob - Ceiling 400 30 22.4/17.8 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/1-59/0 Ultrasound 1 Linen - Ceiling 780 60 22.4/17.8 12.4/10.6 0.33 5.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-62 Records Room Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-65/0 Office & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 700 45 22.5/17.8 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-68/0 Nurse Base, Store & Corr. Tech. Store - Ceiling 780 60 22.4/17.8 12.4/10.6 0.33 5.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-78/0 X-Ray & Store Corridor - Ceiling 450 30 22.5/17.8 7.2/6.1 0.19 4.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/1-80/0 Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 750 45 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-83/0 CT/Ang Store - Ceiling 750 30 22.7/17.9 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/1-84 CT Control Room Store - Ceiling 500 35 22.4/17.8 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/1-86/0 CT/Ang Service Lob - Ceiling 830 45 22.6/17.8 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/2-01/0 Lobby Ceiling 380 120 20.5/17 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/2-06 VIP Single Bedroom Ceiling 240 50 21.3/17.3 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/2-08 VIP Single Bedroom Ceiling 300 50 21.7/17.5 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/2-11 Guest Bedroom Ceiling 180 50 20.8/17.1 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/2-12/0 Royal Suite 2 Ceiling 420 50 22/17.6 7.2/6.1 0.19 4.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/2-20/0 Royal Suite 1 Ceiling 510 50 22.2/17.7 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01


FCU-A/2-30/0 Recep/Nurse Base Ceiling 395 140 20.2/16.9 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01









FCU

Tag Area

Served

FCU

Location

FCU

Supply

Air Qty.

Minimum

Outside

Air Qty.

“ON”

Coil

Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled

Water

Flow

Maximum

Water

PD

Electrical

Require.

Motor

Size

Operating

Hours

Run in

Emergency

Mode

Selected

FCU

Model / Size

Rev


FCU-A/2-35 Single Bedroom Ceiling 300 55 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01




FCU-A/2-43 Single Bedroom Ceiling 270 55 21.4/17.3 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01







FCU-A/2-59 VIP Single Bedroom Ceiling 405 60 21.8/17.5 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01




FCU-A/2-67/0 Bev Pantry/Clean Utility Ceiling 400 90 21.2/17.3 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/2-72/0 NUM/Interview Room Ceiling 310 60 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/2-82 Treatment Room Ceiling 120 20 21.7/17.5 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01












FCU

Tag Area

Served

FCU

Location

FCU

Supply

Air Qty.

Minimum

Outside

Air Qty.

“ON”

Coil

Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled

Water

Flow

Maximum

Water

PD

Electrical

Require.

Motor

Size

Operating

Hours

Run in

Emergency

Mode

Selected

FCU

Model / Size

Rev


FCU-B/2-3 Comm’s Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 0 23/18 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/2-18/0 Lab, Teleconference & Lob Lobby - Ceiling 700 70 22.2/17.7 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/2-20 Seminar Corridor - Ceiling 450 60 21.9/17.6 7.2/6.1 0.19 4.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/2-23 Seminar Kitchen - Ceiling 450 60 21.9/17.6 7.2/6.1 0.19 4.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/2-24/0 Corridor Lobby - Ceiling 750 70 22.3/17.7 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/2-26 CSSD Store Ceiling 300 0 23/18 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-B/2-40/0 Office & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 500 50 22.2/17.7 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/2-49 Chemistry/Haematology Ceiling 800 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/2-51/0 Phlebotomy, Wait & Staff Wait - Ceiling 650 60 22.3/17.7 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/2-53/0 Reception & Waiting Corridor - Ceiling 800 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/2-56 Blood Bank Ceiling 500 30 22.5/17.8 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/2-60.1 Auditorium Corridor - Ceiling 700 250 20.1/16.9 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/2-60.2 Auditorium Lobby - Ceiling 800 250 20.5/17 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/2-63/0 Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 800 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/2-65 Microbiology Ceiling 160 20 22/17.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-B/2-88.1 Bridge Lobby - Ceiling 330 30 22.3/17.7 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


FCU-A/3-01/0 Lobby Ceiling 380 120 20.5/17 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/3-09 Bladder Training Nurse Ceiling 85 20 21.1/17.2 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/3-10 Bladder Training Ceiling 300 55 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/3-15/0 Urology Clinic Recep Ceiling 380 110 20.7/17.1 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01









FCU

Tag Area

Served FCU

Location

FCU Supply

Air Qty.

Minimum Outside

Air Qty.

“ON” Coil

Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled Water

Flow

Maximum Water

PD

Electrical Require.

Motor Size

Operating

Hours

Run in

Emergency

Mode

Selected

FCU

Model / Size

Rev


FCU-A/3-17 Consult/Exam Ceiling 175 20 22.1/17.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01



FCU-A/3-33/0 Recep/Nurse Base Ceiling 395 140 20.2/16.9 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/3-35 HDU Single Bedroom Ceiling 300 55 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01





FCU-A/3-47/0 NUM/Interview Room Ceiling 310 60 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01



FCU-A/3-53/0 Bev Pantry/Clean Utility Ceiling 290 90 20.5/17 4.9/4.2 0.13 3.7 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


















FCU

Tag Area

Served

FCU

Location

FCU

Supply

Air Qty.

Minimum

Outside

Air Qty.

“ON”

Coil

Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled

Water

Flow

Maximum

Water

PD

Electrical

Require.

Motor

Size

Operating

Hours

Run in

Emergency

Mode

Selected

FCU

Model / Size

Rev



FCU-A/3-87/0 PA & Head of Urology Ceiling 165 20 22/17.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/3-89 Royal Suite 3 Ceiling 460 65 21.9/17.5 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.7 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01



FCU-B/3-3 Comm’s Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 60 22.2/17.7 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/3-15 Staff Common Room Corridor - Ceiling 500 60 22/17.6 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/3-17/0 Change Rooms Ceiling 400 100 21/17.2 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/3-19 Corridor Store - Ceiling 800 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/3-20 Store Ceiling 400 30 22.4/17.8 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01

FCU-B/3-46 Procedure Room Ceiling 600 0 23/18 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/3-50/0 Reporting & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 810 70 22.3/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/3-60/0 Entry Ceiling 600 70 22.1/17.6 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/3-63/0 Nurse Base Corridor - Ceiling 810 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/3-64/0 Recovery Nurse Base Ceiling 810 90 22.1/17.6 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/3-65/0 Bed Rooms Corridor - Ceiling 600 60 22.2/17.7 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01



FCU-A/4-01 Lobby Ceiling 440 50 22.1/17.6 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/4-04 Apartment 1 Ceiling 580 60 22.2/17.7 8.7/7.4 0.23 5.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01









FCU

Tag Area

Served

FCU

Location

FCU

Supply

Air Qty.

Minimum

Outside

Air Qty.

“ON”

Coil

Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled

Water

Flow

Maximum

Water

PD

Electrical

Require.

Motor

Size

Operating

Hours

Run in

Emergency

Mode

Selected

FCU

Model / Size

Rev




FCU-A/4-11 Apartment 4 Ceiling 600 60 22.2/17.7 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/4-17/0 Breakout & Pantry Ceiling 210 50 21.1/17.2 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/4-23.1 Link Bridge Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/4-23.2 Link Bridge Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/4-24 Open-plan Offices Ceiling 800 90 22.1/17.6 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/4-25/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 640 80 22/17.6 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/4-26 Meeting Room Ceiling 200 60 20.6/17 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/4-32/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 540 60 22.1/17.6 8.3/7 0.22 5.5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/4-34 Open-plan Offices Ceiling 580 80 21.9/17.6 8.7/7.4 0.23 5.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/4-36/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 450 60 21.9/17.6 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/4-43/0 Offices Ceiling 570 130 21.2/17.3 8.7/7.4 0.23 5.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/4-45 Chairman Ceiling 330 65 21.4/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/4-47 Board Room Ceiling 380 120 20.5/17 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/4-48/0 PA & Corridor Ceiling 300 30 22.2/17.7 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/4-50/0 Hospital Dir & Marketing Ceiling 460 50 22.1/17.7 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.7 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01

FCU-A/4-52 Reception Ceiling 165 60 20.1/16.8 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/4-53 Clinical Director Ceiling 120 20 21.7/17.5 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/4-54 Pantry Ceiling 165 70 19.6/16.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01

FCU-A/4-62 EHS Board Room Ceiling 480 160 20.3/16.9 7.9/6.7 0.21 4.9 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01









FCU

Tag Area

Served FCU

Location

FCU Supply

Air Qty.

Minimum Outside

Air Qty.

“ON” Coil

Temp.

DB/WB

Capacity

Tot/Sens

Chilled Water

Flow

Maximum Water

PD

Electrical Require.

Motor Size

Operating

Hours

Run in

Emergency

Mode

Selected

FCU

Model / Size

Rev


FCU-B/4-7 Comm’s Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 0 23/18 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/5-01.1 Hydraulic Plant Room Ceiling 650 100 21.8/17.5 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/5-01.2 Hydraulic Plant Room Ceiling 650 100 21.8/17.5 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/5-02.1 Mech AHU Plant Room Ceiling 650 100 21.8/17.5 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/5-02.2 Mech AHU Plant Room Ceiling 650 100 21.8/17.5 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/5-05.1 UPS Ceiling 650 20 22.8/17.9 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-A/5-05.2 UPS Ceiling 650 20 22.8/17.9 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/5-1 Mechanical Plant Room Mechanical Plant 1375 0 32/26 19.2/16.3 0.51 6.1 3ph 1.1 N 39TDH-14 01

FCU-B/5-2 Hydraulic Plant Room Hydraulic Plant 1020 0 32/26 15.1/12.8 0.4 6.1 3ph 1.1 N 39TDH-14 01

FCU-B/5-3 Medical Gases Plant Room Gases Plant 900 0 32/26 13.6/11.5 0.36 6.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01

FCU-B/5-4 GSM Room GSM Room 135 0 23/18 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01







23.18.08 COMPUTER ROOM UNITS – CHILLED WATER

CRAC Tag

Discharge

‘ON” coil Cond.

DB/WB

Net Cooling Capacity

GTH/TSH

Chilled Water

IN / OUT

Chilled Water

Flow

Maximum Water

PD

Fan Air Flow

Ext. Static

Heating Duty

Humidifier Cap.

Elect. Requirement

Selected Make / Model Rev

(-) (-) (C) (kW) (C) (l/s) (kPa) (l/s) (Pa) (kW) (kG/h) ph/V/Hz (-) (-)

CRAC-B/G-58.1 Down Flow 24/17 52/45 5.5/14.5 1.4 30 4185 80 - - 3/400/50 LIEBERT RCD 01

CRAC-B/G-58.2 Down Flow 24/17 52/45 5.5/14.5 1.4 30 4185 80 - - 3/400/50 LIEBERT RCD 01

NOTES:

1. External static is an estimated value only. The Contractor shall be responsible for final calculation of fan static pressure.

2. Net Cooling Capacity = (Total Cap. – Fan input power)

3. Maximum cooling coil face velocity – 2.5m/s 4. Selection based on Atlas by Liebert Technical Data Manual

5. Maximum water pressure drop include both coil and flow control valve.




23.18.09 FANS

Fan

Reference Application Location

Fan

Duty

Estimated

Tot. Static

Fan

Type

Maximum

Speed

Impeller

Diameter Motor

Class

Starting

Method Selected Model

Motor

rating Revision

(-) (-) (-) (l/s) (Pa) (-) (rps) (mm) (-) (dol / vsd) (-) (ph/kW) (-)

TEF-A/5-1 Toilet Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 5500 450 ILMF 960 800 F DOL MMD806/4 3/5.5 01

KEF-A/5-1 Kitchen Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 2400 400 ILAX 2880 500 F DOL APO502AA5/17 3/2.2 01

EAF-A/5-1 Garbage Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 100 300 ILMF 2520 244 F DOL TD-1300/250 Hi 1/0.18 01

EAF-A/B1-1 Car Park Exhaust E/A Fan Room 1 20000 450 ILAX 960 1800 F VSD AP1806DA6/14 3/15.0 01

EAF-A/B1-2 Grease Arrestor Exhaust E/A Fan Room 1 180 350 ILC 1450 250 F DOL TEF-315 1/0.27 01

SAF-A/B1-1 Car Park Supply S/A Fan Room 1 15000 450 ILAX 960 1600 F VSD AP1608FP12/18 3/15.0 01

EAF-B/B1-1 Car Park Exhaust E/A Fan Room 2 18600 450 ILAX 960 1800 F VSD AP1808FP12/15 3/15.0 01

SAF-B/B1-1 Car Park Supply S/A Fan Room 2 14000 450 ILAX 960 1600 F VSD AP1606DP6/13 3/11.0 01

EAF-B/B2-1 Hydraulic Dilution Room B1 Fan Room 50 350 ILC 1450 200 F DOL TE3-200 1/0.12 01

EAF-B/5-1 Sterile Store Mechanical Plant Room 800 300 ILC 1450 450 F VSD PCD454ER 3/0.75 01

EAF-B/5-2 Operating Theatre Mechanical Plant Room 800 300 ILC 1450 450 F VSD PCD454ER 3/0.75 01




EAF-B/5-6 Toilet Exhaust Mechanical Plant Room 6000 400 ILAX 1450 1000 F DOL AP1004GA6/14 3/4.0 01

EAF-B/5-7 Safety Cabinet Mechanical Plant Room 150 250 ILC 1450 200 F DOL PCD354DD 3/0.55 01



EAF-B/5-10 IT/Comm’s Rooms Mechanical Plant Room 400 300 ILC 1450 400 F DOL PCD404ER 3/0.45 01

EAF-B/5-11 Batch Washer Mechanical Plant Room 300 300 ILC 1450 400 F DOL PCD354DD 3/0.37 01

Fan Type ILAX ILC ILMF DWDI SWSI CRU ARU MFRU PF

Description In line

axial

In line

centrifugal

In line mixed

flow

Double width double

inlet Single width single inlet Centrifugal roof unit Axial roof unit Mixed flow roof unit Propeller Fan




23.18.10 MEDICAL AIR (4 BAR) / SURGICAL AIR (7 BAR) COMPRESSOR SCHEDULE

Power Supply Data Ref. Designation Quantity Type Capacity

(LPM) / Compressor

Mounting

Rating (kW) /

Compressor

Voltage Phase Frequency

(Hz)

Brand/Model Accessories

Medical Air 1 Duplex 840 Floor 7.5 400 3 50 Medaes / or

approved equal

Receiver / after cooler

drier pre.carbon / bacterial

dust filter

Surgical Air 1 Duplex 630 Floor 7.5 400 3 50 Medaes / or

approved equal

Receiver / after cooler

drier pre.carbon / bacterial

dust filter




23.18.11 MEDICAL VACUUM PUMP SCHEDULE (450MM HG)


(LPM)s

Mounting

Rating (kW)/

Pump


(Hz)


Vacuum Pump 1 Triplex 1140 Floor 2.2 400 3 50 Medaes / or

approved equal

Bacterial filter vacuum

pump panel 1500L

vacuum vessel




23.18.12 ANAESTHESIA GAS SCAVENGING SYSTEM SCHEDULE


(LPM) / Pump

Mounting

Rating (kW)/

Pump


(Hz)


Vacuum Pump 1 Duplex 500 Floor 0.55 400 3 50 Medaes / or

approved equal

Bacterial filter vacuum

pump panel




23.18.13 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS (EDH)

Ref

(-)

Air

Flow

(l/s)

Duct

Size

(mm x mm)

Fan

Interlock

(-)

Cap.

(ph/kW)

Steps

(-)

Rev

(-)

EDH-B/5-1 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01

EDH-B/5-2 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01

EDH-B/5-3 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01

EDH-B/5-4 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01

EDH-B/5-5 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01




23.18.14 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS (WATER TO WATER)

Primary Circuit Secondary Circuit

Ref

Location

Capacity

(kW)

Fluid

Type

Temp

in/out)

(0C)

Water

Flow

(l/s)

Max Press.

Drop

(kPa)

Fluid

Type

Temp.

In/out

(0C)

Water

Flow

(l/s)

Max Press.

Drop

(kPa)

Notes

Rev.

HEX-A/5-1 Building A – Level 5 Plant Room 60 Chilled Water 5.5/14.5 1.6 30 Chilled

Filtered/Cold

Water

34.5/20 1.0 25 - 01

HEX-A/5-2 Building A – Level 5 Plant Room 60 Chilled Water 5.5/14.5 1.6 30 Chilled

Filtered/Cold Water

34.5/20 1.0 25 - 01

HEX-B/5-1 Building B – Level 5 Plant Room 60 Chilled Water 5.5/14.5 1.6 30 Chilled

Filtered/Cold

Water

34.5/20 1.0 25 - 01

HEX-B/5-2 Building B – Level 5 Plant Room 60 Chilled Water 5.5/14.5 1.6 30 Chilled

Filtered/Cold

Water

34.5/20 1.0 25 - 01




23.18.15 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES (MCCS)

Supply Type: Board Form: Degree of Protection Starting Method: The following are required on the switchboard:

Normal Form 1 – Secondary mechanical panels IP43 – for indoor installed MCC dol–direct on line (<11.0kW) 1. Fire alarm light indicating fire signal to MCC.

Emergency Form 2 – Drive and control section IP65 – for outdoor installed MCC vsd – variable speed drive 2. Run / Fault lights indicating MCC power available or fault

Form 3A – Fire drive MCC with more than 1 drive Soft – soft starters (for motors 3. Power analyses which provides the following as a minimum:

Form 3B – Main plant MCC power dist section 15 kW and above ) Voltage, Current, Max. Demand, kWh and power factor

4. Lamp test button

Motor Control Centre Tag Supply Type Boards Form to IEC 439-1 Board Protection: Board Color: Incoming Supply – Circuit Beaker Size

MCC-A/B1-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps

Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment

running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

SAF-A/B1-1 Supply Air Fan S/A Fan Room 1 15 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01




23.18.15 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES (MCC) Cont.


MCC-A/B1-2 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps

Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

EAF-A/B1-1 Car Park Exhaust E/A Fan Room 1 15 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01

EAF-A/B1-2 Grease Arrestor Exhaust E/A Fan Room 1 0.27 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-A/B2-08 Fan Coil Unit Body Hold 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01






MCC-A/G-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps

Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

FCU-A/G-13/0 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-A/G-34 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

AHU-A/G-11/0 Air Handling Unit Ceiling 5.5 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01


AHU-A/G-38 Air Handling Unit Ceiling 4.0 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01


AC-A/G-01 Air Curtain Ceiling 0.3 1ph duty DOL - Y Y N/A N/A 01

AC-A/G-02 Air Curtain Ceiling 0.3 1ph duty DOL - Y Y N/A N/A 01






MCC-A/1-1 Normal Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps

Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

FCU-A/1-01 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-A/1-06.1 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01


FCU-A/1-07/0 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01


















MCC-A/1-1 – continued on following page





Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment

running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)










Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)



























Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment

running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)














Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)



























Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment

running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
















Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)



























Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment

running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)








MCC-A/5-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps

Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)







AHU-A/5-1 Air Handling Unit Mechanical Plant Room 15 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

HRP-A/5-1 Heat Recovery Pump Mechanical Plant Room 0.75 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

TEF-A/5-1 Toilet Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 5.5 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

KEF-A/5-1 Kitchen Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 2.2 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

EAF-A/5-1 Garbage Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 0.18 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01






MCC-B/B1-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps

Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

FCU-B/B2-08 Fan Coil Unit EHS Pharmacy Store 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

SAF-B/B1-1 Supply Air Fan S/A Fan Room 2 11 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01







Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

FCU-B/B1-1 Fan Coil Unit Energy Transfer Station 1.5 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

EAF-B/B1-1 Car Park Exhaust E/A Fan Room 2 15 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01

SCHWP-B/B1-1 Chilled Water Pump Energy Transfer Station 30 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01









Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

FCU-B/B1-2 Fan Coil Unit BMCS Room 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01






MCC-B/G-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps

Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

FCU-B/G-03 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-B/G-09/0 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-B/G-17.1 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01















CRAC-B/G-58.1 Computer Room A/C IT Floor 3.0 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

CRAC-B/G-58.2 Computer Room A/C IT Floor 3.0 3ph stand-by DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

AC-B/G-75.1 Air Curtain Ceiling 0.3 1ph duty DOL - Y Y N/A N/A 01

AC-B/G-75.2 Air Curtain Ceiling 0.3 1ph duty DOL - Y Y N/A N/A 01






MCC-B/1-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps

Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

FCU-B/1-1/0 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-B/1-03 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-B/1-6.1 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01



















MCC-B/1-1 – continued on following page





Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment

running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)










Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment

running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)



















AHU-B/2-31/0 Air Handling Unit Ceiling 4.0 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01







Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment

running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)





















Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)


Have provision for 10 extra fan coil units for future tenancies







Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

FCU-B/5-1 Fan Coil Unit Mechanical Plant 1.1 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-B/5-2 Fan Coil Unit Hydraulic Plant 1.1 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-B/5-3 Fan Coil Unit Gases Plant 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

FCU-B/5-4 Fan Coil Unit GSM Room 0.37 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

AHU-B/5-1 Air Handling Unit Mechanical Plant 2.2 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01






PCHWP-B/5-1 Chilled Water Pump Mechanical Plant 7.5 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

PCHWP-B/5-2 Chilled Water Pump Mechanical Plant 7.5 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

HRP-B/5-1 Heat Recovery Pump Mechanical Plant 0.25 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01





CH-B/5-1 Emergency Chiller Emergency Chiller Plant 297.6 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

MCC-B/5-1 – continued on following page





Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply

Equipment

running status

(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

EAF-B/5-1 Sterile Store Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.75 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

EAF-B/5-2 Operating Theatre Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.75 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01




EAF-B/5-6 Toilet Exhaust Mechanical Plant 4.0 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

EAF-B/5-7 Safety Cabinet Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.55 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01



EAF-B/5-10 IT/Comm’s Rooms Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.45 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

EAF-B/5-11 Batch Washer Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.37 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01







Equipment

Tag

Equipment

Description

Equipment

Location

Motor

Power

Elect

Supply


(duty/stand-by)

Starting

Method

Start/Stop

Signal

From

Run/

Fault

Lights

Hand /

Off/Auto

Switch

Run

In

Fire

Mode

FIB

Override

Facility

Rev

(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

MA-B/5-1 Medical Air Gases Plant 11 3ph duty & standy-by DOL - Y Y Y N 01

SA-B/5-1 Surgical Air Gases Plant 7.5 3ph duty & standy-by DOL - Y Y Y N 01

V-B/5-1 Medical Vacuum Gases Plant 4 3ph duty & standy-by DOL - Y Y Y N 01

AGSS-B/5-1 Anaesthetic Scavenging Gases Plant 2.2 3ph duty & standy-by DOL - Y Y Y N 01

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE

269


23.19.00 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE



MECHANICAL SERVICES

SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS

SUB-CONTRACT COMPANY

. Piping

. Ducting

. Insulation

. Electrical

. Automatic Controls

. Painting

. Water Treatment

. Commissioning

. Medical Gases

Tenderer: …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Signed by: …………………………………………… Title: …………………………………………

Witness: …………………………………………… Title: …………………………………………

Date: ………………………………………………………………..…………………………… 2006

TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE

270




MECHANICAL SERVICES

SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS

EQUIPMENT NO. MANUFACTURER MODEL

. BMCS

. Air Handling Units

. Fans

. Attenuators

. Air Diffusers & Grilles

. Filters

. Water Treatment

. Pumps

. Chillers

. Medical Gas

. Air Curtains

Tenderer: …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Signed by: …………………………………………… Title: …………………………………………

Witness: …………………………………………… Title: …………………………………………

Date: ………………………………………………………………..…………………………… 2006

JOL/IH.2664S5896MA